1. sports
2. auto racing
3. nascar

Contents chapter 3
Safety Detection Solutions
Safety interlock switches
Selection guide: Safety interlock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/2 to 3/5
1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/6 to 3/21
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
b
b
b
b
b
2
Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3ODVWLFGRXEOHLQVXODWHG¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&603 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plastic, turret head, types XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3/22
3/24
3/26
3/40
3/44
Safety interlock switches with rotary lever or rotary shaft
operator
3
b Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/50
b Plastic, double insulated, turret head,
W\SHV;&63/;&67/;&635DQG;&675 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/52
Non-contact safety interlock switches
4
b
b
v
v
b
5
Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plastic,
pre-cabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
connector on pigtail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3/54
3/56
3/57
3/58
Non-contact safety interlock systems
b
b
v
v
b
6
Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plastic, solid-state PNP type output,
Pre-cabled connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M12 connector connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3/66
3/68
3/69
3/70
Safety limit switches
Metal, miniature
b Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/74
b Pre-cabled, type XCSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/76
7
Compact
b Presentation, General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/78
b Metal, type XCSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/80
b Plastic, type XCSP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/82
8
9
10
3/0
2
Light curtains
Selection guide: Light curtains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/84
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/88
1
Light curtains, type 4
)RU¿QJHURUKDQGSURWHFWLRQ
b
b
b
b
b
2SWLPXPOLJKWFXUWDLQVZLWKVROLGVWDWHRXWSXWW\SH;86/%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/92
8QLYHUVDOOLJKWFXUWDLQVZLWKVROLGVWDWHRXWSXWW\SH;86/' . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/93
Substitution table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/102
0XWLQJPRGXOHIRU;86/'0XQLYHUVDOOLJKWFXUWDLQVW\SH;36/&0 . . . . . . 3/106
Compact light curtains with solid-state output,
W\SH;86/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/111
For body protection
b Compact light curtains with solid-state output,
W\SH;86/3
v with connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/119
v with terminal block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/120
Light curtains, type 2
2
3
4
For hand protection
b Slim, compact light curtains with solid-state output,
W\SH;86/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/127
For body protection
b Preventa safety modules and single-beam photo-electric sensors,
type XPSCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/140
5
Accessories for light curtains types 2 and 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/130
6
7
8
9
10
3/1
3
Selection guide
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches
Applications
Protection of operators by stopping the machine when the actuating key (attached to
machine guard) is withdrawn from the head of the switch
1
All heavy industrial machines, with quick rundown time (1) All heavy and light industrial
machines, with slow
rundown time (2)
Device
Actuator operated safety interlock switches
811020
811019
811021
2
3
4
5
Conformity to standards
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n°14, JIS C4520
Machine assemblies
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV
UL, CSA
Enclosure
Metal
Degree of protection
IP 67
Dimensions
(w x h x d)
inches (mm)
6
Products
Switch
1.58 x 4.47 x 1.73
(40 x 113.5 x 44)
2.05 x 4.47 x 1.73
(52 x 113.5 x 44)
3.86 x 5.75 x 1.73
(98 x 146 x 44)
Mounting
1.18 x 2.36
(30 x 60)
1.18 x 2.36
(30 x 60)
3.47 x 3.74
(88 x 95)
Features
Without locking of actuator.
Turret head: 8 positions for
insertion of actuator.
Manual locking and unlocking
of actuator by pushbutton or
key operated lock (can be
mounted on left or right-hand
side of switch head).
Turret head: 8 positions for
insertion of actuator.
Locking and unlocking of
actuator by solenoid (either
locking without power or
locking with power). Manual
unlocking (using key lock) of
actuator in abnormal
conditions.
Turret head: 8 positions for
insertion of actuator.
Contact blocks
Safety contacts actuated by the actuator. Slow break with positive opening operation
7
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
8
9
Connection
Screw clamp terminals. Tapped entry for n° 13 cable gland, tapped ISO M20 x 1.5 or tapped
1/2” NPT
1 conduit entry
10
Type references
Page
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
+ N.C. + N.O. auxiliary contact
with positive opening
operation, controlled by
solenoid
XCSA
3/24
2 conduit entries
XCSB, XCSC
XCSE
3/25
(1) Stopping time of machine less than time taken for operator to access hazardous zone.
(2) Stopping time of machine greater than time taken for operator to access hazardous zone.
3/2
All light industrial machines, with quick rundown time (1)
All light industrial machines, with
slow rundown time (2)
811025
811022
540091
1
2
811024
All heavy and light industrial
machines, with slow rundown
time (2)
3
4
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, IEC 68-2-30, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14, JIS C4520
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100
UL, CSA
cULus, BG
Metal
Plastic
UL, CSA
5
IP 67
1.58 x 7.64 x 3.09
(40 x 194 x 78)
1.18 x 3.4 x 0.6
(30 x 87 x 15)
1.18 x 2.36
(30 x 60)
Centers: 0.79 x 0.87
(20 x 22)
Locking and unlocking of
actuating key by solenoid (either
locking without power or locking
with power versions). Manual
unlocking (using Ronis key lock)
of actuating key in abnormal
conditions. Turret head: 4
alternative access points for
insertion of actuating key.
Without locking of actuator.
Fixed head.
2 positions for insertion of
actuator.
1.18 x 3.68 x 1.18
(30 x 93.5 x 30)
2.05 x 4.51 x 1.18
(52 x 114.5 x 30)
4.33 x 3.68 x 1.30
(110 x 93.5 x 33)
Centers: 0.79 x 0.87 or 1.59 Centers: 0.79 x 0.87
(20 x 22 or 40.3)
(20 x 22)
Without locking of actuator.
Optional accessory: guard retaining device.
Turret head: 8 positions for insertion of actuator.
Locking and unlocking of actuator by
solenoid (either on energization or on
de-energization).
Turret head: 8 positions for insertion of
actuator.
6
7
Safety contacts actuated by the actuator. Slow break with positive opening operation
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
+ N.C. + N.O. auxiliary contact
with positive opening operation,
controlled by solenoid
N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C.
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
N.C. + N.O.
N.C.+N.O. (N.O. staggered)
N.O. + N.C. make before
break
N.C. + N.C.
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. +N.O.
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
Screw clamp terminals. Tapped
entry for n° 13 cable gland,
tapped ISO M20 x 1.5 or tapped
1/2” NPT
Pre-cabled,
4 or 6 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2),
L = 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2,
5, or 10 m)
Screw clamp terminals. Tapped entry for n° 11 cable gland, tapped ISO M16 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2”
NPT.
2 conduit entries
–
1 conduit entry
2 conduit entries
1 conduit entry
XCSL
XCS MP
XCSPA
XCSTA
XCS TE
3/40
3/44
3/26
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered)
N.O. + N.C. make before break
N.C. + N.C.
+ N.C. auxiliary contact with positive
opening operation, controlled by
solenoid
8
9
10
3/45
(1) Stopping time of machine less than time taken for operator to access hazardous zone.
(2) Stopping time of machine greater than time taken for operator to access hazardous zone.
3/3
Selection guide (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches
Applications
1
Protection of operators by stopping the machine when the
guard hinge rotates through 5°
$OOOLJKWLQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV¿WWHGZLWKKLQJHGRUURWDU\
protective covers with small opening radius
$OOOLJKWLQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV¿WWHGZLWKKLQJHGDFFHVV
doors
Safety interlock switches with rotary lever operating head
Rotary shaft operated safety interlock switches
540093
Device
Protection of operators by stopping the machine when the
operating lever (attached to hinged machine guard) is
displaced by 5°
540094
540095
540092
2
3
Conformity to Products
standards
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n°14, JIS C4520
4
Machine
assemblies
5
6
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV
UL, CSA
Enclosure
Plastic
Degree of protection
IP 67
Dimensions
Switch
(w x h x d or Ø)
inches (mm) Mounting
1.18 x 3.45 x 1.18
(30 x 87.5 x 30)
2.05 x 4.27 x 1.18
(52 x 108.4 x 30)
1.18 x 3.78 x 1.18
(30 x 96 x 30)
2.05 x 4.61 x 1.18
(52 x 117 x 30)
Centers: 0.79 x 0.87
(20 x 22)
Centers: 0.79 x 0.87 or 1.59
(20 x 22 or 40.3)
Centers: 0.79 x 0.87
(20 x 22)
Centers: 0.79 x 0.87 x 1.59
(20 x 22 or 40.3)
Features
W\SHVRIOHYHUVWUDLJKWRUHOERZHGÀXVKZLWKUHDURIVZLWFK
3 lever positions: to left, centered or to right
Turret head: 4 positions.
Contact blocks or outputs
Slow break safety contacts with positive opening operation
N.C. contacts open when lever displaced by more then 5°
7
N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered)
N.C. + N.C.
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
8
Connection
9
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
2 types of rotary shafts: length 1.18 or 3.15 in. (30 or 80 mm)
Turret head: 4 positions.
N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered)
N.C. + N.C.
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
Tapped entry for n° 11 cable gland, tapped ISO M16 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2” NPT
Screw
terminals
1 conduit entry
2 conduit entries
1 conduit entry
2 conduit entries
Pre-cabled
–
–
–
–
Connector
–
–
–
–
Type references
XCSPL
XCSTL
XCSPR
XCSTR
Page
3/52
10
3/4
Protection of operators by stopping the machine when the gate is opened
Protection of operators by stopping
the machine when the gate is opened
$OOOLJKWLQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV¿WWHGZLWKDFFHVVJDWHVZLWKLPSUHFLVHJXLGDQFHDQGRUVXEMHFWHGWRIUHTXHQW
washing
All machines with quick rundown time
Non-contact safety interlocks,
pre-cabled or with connector on pigtail
Limit switches
Non-contact safety interlock
system
1
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
107872-8-Q
540099
540098
540096
540097
525582
2
3
IEC 61508, EN/IEC 62601
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508,
(SIL 2 and SIL 3),
CSA C22-2 n° 14
EN 13849-1 (Category 3 and 4),
EN/IEC 60947-1,
EN/IEC 60947-2,
EN/IEC 60947-5-3
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100
EN 1088/ISO 14119
IEC/EN 60204-1,
EN 1088/ISO 14119
UL, CSA
BG combined with safety modules XPS AF, XPS DM, XPS MP
UL, CSA, TÜV
UL, CSA
Plastic
Plastic
Metal or plastic
IP 66 and IP 67 for pre-cabled version
IP 67 for connector on pigtail version
IP 66, IP 67 and IP69K for
pre-cabled version
IP 67 for connector version
IP 66, IP 67 and IP 68
4
5
0.63 x 2 x 0.27
(16 x 51 x 7)
0.98 x 3.46 x 0.51
(25 x 88 x 13)
Ø 30, L 1.51
(Ø 30, L 38.5)
1.33 x 3.94 x 1.26
(34 x 100 x 32)
1.18 x 1.97 x0.62
(30 x 50 x 16)
0.63
(16)
3.07
(78)
–
3.23
(82)
0.79
(20)
1 approach direction
9 approach directions
Plunger or rotary head
Head adjustable in 15° steps throughout
360°
3 approach directions
1.22 x 1.34 x 3.5
(31 x 34 x 89)
Independent Reed type contacts operated by coded magnet
Self-contained system not
Contacts change state from a distance of 0.31 in. (8mm) (0.20 in. (5 mm for XCSDMC) requiring use of safety module
Must be used with a Preventa™ safety module
or non-magnetic slim
N.C. contacts with positive opening
operation
N.C. + N.O. (N.C.
staggered)
N.O. + N.O. (1 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (N.O. staggered) slow
break
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. and N.C. +
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. snap action
N.C. + N.O. (N.C. staggered)
N.O. + N.O. (1 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (1 N.C.
staggered)
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (1 N.O.
staggered)
N.C. + N.O. (N.O.
staggered)
N.O. + N.O. (1 N.O.
staggered)
–
2 PNP type Solid-state outputs
XCSDM4 : EDM function +
1 alarm output
–
XCSD and XCS P:
tapped entry for Pg 13.5 cable gland,
tapped ISO M20 x 1.5
or tapped 1/2” NPT
–
–
–
–
–
2 contacts: 4 x 23 AWG
(0.25 mm2),
L = 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft.
(2, 5, or 10 m)
2 contacts: 4 x 22 AWG (0.25
mm2) 3 contacts: 6 x 23 AWG
(0.25 mm2)
L = 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5,
or 10 m)
2 contacts: 4 x 22 AWG
(0.25 mm2)
L = 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2,
5, or 10 m)
XCSDM3 : 6 x 23 AWG (0,25
mm2) XCSDM4 : 8 x 22 AWG
(0,25 mm2)
L = 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or
10 m)
XSC M: 7 x 21 AWG (0.5 mm2), or 9 x 22
AWG (0.34 mm2),
L = 3.3, 6.6, or 16.4 ft. (1, 2, or 5 m)
M8 on 0.15 m pigtail
M12 on 0.15 m pigtail
M12 on 0.15 m pigtail
M12 connector (A coding)
–
XCSDMC
XCSDMP
XCSDMR
;&6'0;&6'0
XCS M
;&6';&63
3/68
3/76
3/80
3/56
1 conduit entry
6
7
8
9
10
3/5
General
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches
1
2
Refer to standards
(1,62DQG(1,62
Removable or moveable protective guards for potentially dangerous machine
functions must be used in conjunction with locking or interlocking devices.
Application requiring an interlocking device: high inertia (long rundown time)
machines.
An interlocking device must be used when the rundown time is greater than the time
it takes for a person to reach the danger zone.
This device ensures that the guard remains locked until the potentially dangerous
movement has stopped.
Guard switches
7KHPHFKDQLFDODFWXDWRUJXDUGVZLWFKHVLHVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVVSHFL¿FDOO\
designed for machine guarding applications, provide an ideal solution for the locking or
interlocking of movable guards associated with industrial machinery. They meet the
requirements of standards
EN/ISO 12100, EN 294/ISO 13852, EN 1088/ISO 14119 and IEC/EN 60204-1.
They contribute to the protection of operators working on potentially dangerous
machines by breaking the start control circuit of the machine when a protective guard
is opened or removed, using positive opening operation contacts, thus stopping the
dangerous movement of the machine.
The removal/opening of the guard (after the dangerous movement has stopped) can
either be:
- at the time the machine is switched-off for low inertia machines (machines where
the rundown time is less than the time it takes for the operator to access the hazardous
zone), or
- delayed for high inertia machines (machines where the rundown time is greater
than the time it takes for the operator to access the hazardous zone).
Control circuit categories
Guard switches used in conjunction with a Preventa™ safety module enable
designers, with reference to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1, to establish category 4 control
systems.
Safety related parts of control systems should be developed taking into account the
results of an appropriate Risk Assessment (EN 1050/ISO 14121 - EN/ISO 12100 - 1
and 2).
Safety of personnel
The start command for the machine can only be initiated following correct operation
of the guard switch.
On its release, the N.C. safety contacts are opened by positive action or, for
non-contact safety interlocks, change state (must be monitored using a
Preventa™ safety relay module).
Safety of operation
Guard switches incorporate slow break or snap action contacts with positive
opening operation (except for non-contact safety interlocks where this is not
possible). For mechanical actuator guard switches, on closing of the guard the
DFWXDWRU¿WWHGWRLWHQWHUVWKHKHDGRIWKHVZLWFKRSHUDWHVWKHPXOWLSOHLQWHUORFN
device and closes the N.C. contacts. For non-contact safety interlocks, the presence
of the magnet causes the contacts to change state.
Safety in use
All guard switches are designed to accept a few millimetres of misalignment between
the actuator and the switch in order to compensate for mechanical play, vibration,
etc.
Design to minimize defeat
Both mechanically and magnetically actuated guard switches are designed to be
RSHUDWHGE\VSHFL¿FDFWXDWRUVVRWKDWWKH\FDQQRWEHGHIHDWHGLQDVLPSOHPDQQHU
using common tools, rods, metal plates, simple magnets, etc. When loosening the
mounting screws for re-orientation of the turret head on mechanical actuator guard
switches, the head itself remains attached to the switch body and the contact states
remain unchanged.
All guard switches and safety limit switches are designed in such a manner that it is
virtually impossible to adjust the head setting, remove the switch or gain access to the
contacts without using the appropriate tool.
7KHUHDUHYDULRXVPHWKRGVIRUREWDLQLQJDKLJKHUOHYHORIWDPSHUSURR¿QJIRUH[DPSOH
- using a cage device to prevent the insertion of a spare actuator or magnet, or any
other foreign body,
- mounting the actuator or coded magnet to the guard by means that make it very
GLI¿FXOWWRUHPRYHULYHWLQJRUZHOGLQJ
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/6
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches
Metal safety interlock switches
with mechanical actuator
Without locking of actuator
Metal safety interlock switches for use on machines
with low inertia and operating in normal conditions
(no vibration or shock and guard mounted vertically,
without risk of rebound on closing), thus eliminating
unintentional opening of the guard.
With locking of actuator and manual unlocking
Metal safety interlock switches for use on heavy
machines with low inertia and operating in arduous
conditions (shock or vibration exist), whereby the
guard could open unintentionally.
A key operated lock or a pushbutton enables the
positive locking of the guard and its subsequent
unlocking.
With interlocking and locking of actuator by solenoid
Metal safety interlock switches for use on machines
with high inertia or necessitating a controlled
opening of the protective guard.
The locking of the moving guard can either be on
de-energization or energization of the solenoid.
A key operated lock enables manual unlocking of the
guard in the event of an interlocking circuit
malfunction, and also provides extra safety for
maintenance personnel likely to be working on the
machine.
The switches incorporate 2 LEDs: one indicating
guard “open/closed” and the other, guard “locked/
unlocked”.
Plastic safety interlock switches
with mechanical actuator
Without locking of actuator
Plastic safety interlock switches for use on light
machines with low inertia.
For use in arduous conditions (shock or vibration exist,
guard not vertical or risk of rebound on closing) where
the guard could open unintentionally, a guard
retaining device (XCSPA or XCSTA) is available as
an accessory.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
With interlocking and locking of actuator by solenoid
Plastic safety interlock switches for use on machines
with high inertia or necessitating a controlled
opening of the protective guard.
The locking of the moving guard can either be on
de-energization or energization of the solenoid.
A special tool enables manual unlocking of the guard
in the event of an interlocking circuit malfunction, and
also provides extra safety for maintenance personnel
likely to be working on the machine.
8
9
10
3/7
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, safety limit switches
and non-contact safety interlock systems
1
Rotary lever and rotary shaft operated
guard switches for hinged guards
With head for rotary movement (lever or rotary shaft)
Plastic safety interlock switches with straight or
elbowed operating lever or rotary shaft operator.
6SHFL¿FDOO\GHVLJQHGIRUVPDOOLQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV
¿WWHGZLWKVPDOOVL]HGhinged doors, covers or
protective guards.
They protect the operator by stopping the dangerous
movement of the machine as soon as the rotary lever
or rotary shaft displacement reaches an angle of 5°.
Safety limit switches
With head for linear movement (plunger) or rotary movement (lever)
Metal or plastic limit switches.
For use on machines with low inertia and also on
machines with high inertia, when used in conjunction
with actuator operated guard switches, for monitoring
access doors and/or guards. When used on their own,
they are always installed in “positive mode” or
combined in pairs, with one switch being in “positive
mode” and the other in “negative mode”.
Non-contact safety interlocks
With an associated coded magnet
Plastic case guard switches for use on machines with
low inertia.
6SHFL¿FDOO\GHVLJQHGIRULQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV¿WWHG
with doors, covers or guards with imprecise
guiding.
They are ideally suited for machines subjected to
frequent washing or liquid spray.
They protect the operator by immediately stopping any
dangerous movement, as soon as the distance
between the switch and its magnet is greater than 0.31
or 0.20 in (8 or 5 mm), depending on the switch model.
Non-contact safety interlock systems
With dedicated transmitter
2
3
4
5
6
7
Plastic case system for use on machines with low
inertia.
6SHFL¿FDOO\GHVLJQHGIRULQGXVWULDOPDFKLQHV¿WWHG
with one or more doors, covers or guards with
imprecise guiding.
They are ideally suited for machines subjected to
frequent washing or liquid spray and that are not
necessarily equipped with an enclosure or control
cabinet.
These self-contained category 3 (SIL 2) or 4 (SIL 3)
(per IEC 61508 and EN/IEC 62061) systems protect
the operator by stopping any dangerous movement,
as soon as the distance between the transmitter and
receiver is greater than 0.39 in. (10 mm).
8
9
10
3/8
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Metal safety interlock switches
Actuating keys
The actuating keys are common to all XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE
Play
Play
10°
10°
Their oblong mounting holes enable
simple adjustment when mounting on
moving guards.
A pivoting actuator (both horizontally
and vertically) is available when using
guard switches in conjunction with
hinged guards or guards with imprecise
guiding.
Straight actuators are supplied with an
adaptor shank for simple replacement of
an XCK J guard switch by an XCS
switch, without the need to drill
additional mounting holes for the switch
or actuator.
Play
$OO;&6$;&6%;&6&DQG;&6(DUH¿WWHGZLWKDVTXDUHWXUUHWKHDGZKLFK
can be rotated through 360° in 90° steps
8 directions of actuation are possible for
the actuating key:
- 4 in the horizontal plane,
- 4 from above the switch (4
alternative positions of the actuator slot,
depending on the orientation of the
head).
When loosening the mounting screw for
re-orientation of the operating head, the
head itself remains attached to the body
and the contact states remain
unchanged.
33
34
4
5
6
7
31
14
13
13
14
21
22
32
32
11
12
22
LED indicators
31
21
22
XCSA, XCSB, XCSC and XCSE incorporate a 3-pole contact block with positive
opening operation, which is actuated by insertion or withdrawal of the actuating key
attached to the guard.
The withdrawal of the actuating key opens the N.C. safety contact(s),
even in the event of the contact sticking or welding.
The 3-pole contact block enables redundant safety circuits to be
established (for example: N.C. + N.C. or N.C. + N.O.) and also, to
provide signalling (for example: PLC, illuminated beacon, etc.).
21
Safety contacts
2
3
Play
Turret head
1
8
An orange LED (optional for type XCSA, XCSB and XCSC, standard for type XCSE)
indicates the position of the machine guard:
LED illuminated: actuating key not inserted in head of switch, N.C.
contact(s) open, guard open.
LED not illuminated: actuating key inserted in head of switch, N.C.
contact(s) closed, guard closed.
A green LED (incorporated on type XCSE) indicates the locking of the machine
guard:
LED not illuminated: actuating key not inserted in head of switch: the
machine cannot be operated,
LED illuminated: actuating key inserted in head of switch and
actuating key locked. The machine is either ready for starting,
running or decelerating to a standstill.
3/9
9
10
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Metal safety interlock switches
1
0DQXDOORFNLQJXQORFNLQJE\
pushbutton or key operated lock on
XCSB and XCSC
7KHSXVKEXWWRQRUNH\RSHUDWHGORFN¿WWHGWRW\SH;&6%DQG;&6&DOORZV
PDQXDOORFNLQJXQORFNLQJRIWKHPDFKLQHJXDUG
Their use is not necessary for
the normal operation of the
guard switch.
For ease of access, the
pushbutton or lock may be
mounted on the right or the left
of the guard switch head.
For type XCSC, when the
machine guard is locked (key in
position “LOCK”), the resistance
to forcible withdrawal of the
DFWXDWRU¿WWHGWRWKHJXDUGLV
337 lbs. (1500 N).
The key is removable from the
locking device in the “LOCK”
position.
/RFNLQJXQORFNLQJE\VROHQRLGRQ
XCSE
7\SH;&6(LQFRUSRUDWHDVROHQRLGIRUORFNLQJXQORFNLQJRIWKHPDFKLQH
guard
With the machine guard closed
and locked, the resistance to
forcible withdrawal of the
DFWXDWRU¿WWHGWRWKHJXDUGLV
450 lbs. (2000 N).
2
3
4
In addition to the 3-pole contact
block, positively operated by the
actuating key mounted to the
guard, XCSE guard switches
incorporate a 1&12RU
N.C. + N.C. contact block
mechanically linked to the
solenoid.
The N.C. contact(s) are for use
in the safety circuit of the
machine and the N.O. contact
for signalling the status of the
solenoid.
5
6
Key operated lock on XCSE
7\SH;&6(DUH¿WWHGZLWKDNH\RSHUDWHGORFNDOORZLQJWKHXQORFNLQJRIWKH
machine guard while being held in the lock position by the solenoid (for use
by authorized personnel only)
7
8
K
LOC
OCK
UNL
9
10
3/10
The manual unlocking of the
guard using the key operated lock
is useful in the following cases:
- while the machine is
undergoing maintenance (with
the key turned to the “UNLOCK”
position and then removed, the
level of protection is higher in
preventing an accidental machine
start. The safety for maintenance
personnel is thus improved),
- in the event of a power
failure,
- in the event of an interlocking
circuit malfunction (interlocked
condition maintained: positive
safety). The electrical supply
providing the unlocking via the
solenoid always takes priority
over manual unlocking using the
key operated lock.
7KHORFN¿WWHGWRVWDQGDUGJXDUG
switches has key withdrawal from
the “LOCK” and “UNLOCK”
positions.
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Metal safety interlock switches
type XCSE
Example of operation for an XCSE safety interlock switch: locking without power
Actuating key locks into the switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the door is secured, regardless of electrical power availability
or power failure. Applying power to the electromagnet will unlock the actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. Safety
contacts will not open until the actuating key is removed.
Locked
Free
“O”
(de-energized)
“1”
(energized)
“1”
(energized)
“O”
(de-energized)
“O”
(de-energized)
“1”
(energized)
33
21
33
21
33
21
33
21
33
21
14
34
22
14
34
22
14
34
22
14
34
22
14
34
22
14
34
31
13
21
31
13
21
31
13
21
31
13
21
31
13
21
31
13
32
14
22
32
14
22
32
14
22
32
14
22
32
14
22
32
14
21
22
21
22
13
Locked
4
43
51
43
51
43
51
43
51
43
51
52
44
52
44
52
44
52
44
52
Machine has
stopped.
The guard can be
opened.
44
Stop instruction
given, the machine
stops gradually
(deceleration then
complete stop of
motor).
51
Guard closed,
Start instruction
actuating key can
given, the machine
be locked. It will be is running.
locked as soon as
the start instruction
is given.
52
Contact states
1&12RI
solenoid
Machine cannot
be operated.
43
Machine in a
non-operational
state.
2
3
33
Solenoid status
Status
Free
13
Free
3-pole contact
state for
XCSE7ppp
Machine stopped,
power on
Closed
13
Free
3-pole contact
state for
XCSE5ppp
Closed
Stopping
sequence
Closed
13
Guard status
13
Machine stopped,
ready to start
Closed
13
Power on,
machine off
Open
Machine running
Guard position
Power off,
machine off
Open
44
Machine status
1
5
6
2UDQJH/('
Green LED
7
Safety circuit of
the machine
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
8
9
10
3/11
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches
type XCSE
Example of operation for an XCSE safety interlock switch: locking with power
“0”
(de-energized)
7
Green LED
Safety circuit of
the machine
8
9
10
3/12
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
14
32
14
31
13
34
21
22
21
22
2UDQJH/('
Open
43
51
52
51
52
Machine has
stopped.
The guard can be
opened.
44
13
14
34
21
14
31
32
22
21
22
13
14
51
52
43
31
32
43
44
51
52
Stop instruction
given, the machine
stops gradually
(deceleration then
complete stop of
motor).
44
21
22
34
14
21
13
14
22
14
31
32
34
21
22
21
22
Guard closed,
Start instruction
actuating key can
given, the machine
be locked. It will be is running.
locked as soon as
the start instruction
is given.
13
“1”
(energized)
33
“1”
(energized)
33
“0”
(de-energized)
13
Free
43
13
14
51
Locked
44
14
31
32
34
21
22
52
13
14
21
31
32
22
43
Machine cannot
be operated.
44
21
22
51
Contact states of
Electromagnet
Machine in a
non-operational
state.
52
6
Status
Locked
33
“0”
(de-energized)
43
5
Free
13
“0”
(de-energized)
3-pole contact
state for
XCSE7ppp
Machine Stopped,
Power On
Closed
13
Electromagnet
state
3-pole contact
state for
XCSE5ppp
44
4
Closed
Stopping
sequence
Closed
33
Free
13
Free
33
Guard status
13
Machine Stopped,
Ready to Start
Closed
33
Power On,
Machine Off
Open
Machine running
Guard position
Power Off,
Machine Off
Open
14
Machine status
22
3
Note: Locking with power devices does not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088 regarding guard
locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices
meet European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European
standards.
34
2
Actuating key is locked into switch only when actuating key is inserted and power is applied to the electromagnet. Door or guard is not locked
in the event of a power failure or when power is removed from the electromagnet. Removing power to the electromagnet will unlock the
actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will not open until the actuating key is removed.
21
1
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
XCSL safety interlock switches
type XCSL
([DPSOHRI2SHUDWLRQIRUDQ;&6/6DIHW\,QWHUORFN6ZLWFK/RFNLQJ:LWKRXW3RZHU
Actuating key locks into the switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the door is secured, regardless of electrical power availability
or power failure. Applying power to the electromagnet will unlock the actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. Applying power
to the electromagnet will open the N.C. safety contacts as well.
Status
Machine cannot
be started.
Stop instruction is
given, the machine
stops gradually
(deceleration then
complete stop of
motor).
Machine has
stopped. The guard
can be opened.
3
4
5
2UDQJH/('
Safety circuit of
the machine
2
33
13
14
13
14
34
31
32
22
21
22
34
13
14
14
31
32
22
21
22
34
13
14
14
31
32
22
21
22
14
13
14
34
31
22
21
32
Guard is closed,
Start instruction is
actuating key can
given, the machine
be locked. It will be is running.
locked as soon as
the start instruction
is given.
21
“1”
(energized)
33
“0”
(de-energized)
13
“0”
(de-energized)
21
“1”
(energized)
33
Free Movement
13
Locked
21
Locked
13
Free Movement
22
14
13
14
34
31
32
22
21
22
13
14
14
31
32
34
21
22
Machine is in
non-operational
state.
Machine Stopped,
Power On
Closed
33
“1”
(energized)
3-pole contact
state for
XCSL7ppp
Closed
Stopping
sequence
Closed
21
“0”
(de-energized)
13
Electromagnet
state
3-pole contact
state for
XCSL5ppp
33
Free Movement
21
Free Movement
13
Guard status
33
Machine Stopped,
Ready to Start
Closed
21
Power On,
Machine Off
Open
Machine running
Guard position
Power Off,
Machine Off
Open
22
Machine status
1
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
6
7
8
9
10
3/13
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
XCSL safety interlock switches
type XCSL
Example of operation for an XCSL safety interlock switch: locking with power
5
8
9
10
3/14
33
34
13
14
Machine cannot
be operated.
Guard closed,
Start instruction
actuating key can
given, the machine
be locked. It will be is running.
locked as soon as
the start instruction
is given.
Stop instruction
given, the machine
stops gradually
(deceleration then
complete stop of
motor).
Machine has
stopped.
The guard can be
opened.
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Open
6
7
13
Machine in a
non-operational
state.
2UDQJH/('
Safety circuit of
the machine
14
31
32
22
21
22
14
13
14
34
31
32
22
21
22
34
13
14
14
31
32
22
21
22
34
13
14
14
31
32
22
21
21
“0”
(de-energized)
13
“1”
(energized)
33
“1”
(energized)
21
“0”
(de-energized)
33
Free Movement
13
Locked
22
34
13
14
14
31
32
22
21
13
14
22
31
32
34
21
Locked
21
“0”
(de-energized)
Status
Free Movement
33
“0”
(de-energized)
3-pole contact
state for
XCSL7ppp
Machine stopped,
Power On
Closed
13
Electromagnet
state
3-pole contact
state for
XCSL5ppp
22
4
Closed
Stopping
sequence
Closed
21
Free Movement
33
Free Movement
13
Guard status
21
Machine Stopped,
Ready to Start
Closed
33
Power On,
Machine Off
Open
Machine running
Guard position
Power Off,
Machine Off
Open
13
Machine status
22
3
Note: Locking with power devices does not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088 regarding guard
locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices
meet European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European
standards.
14
2
Actuating key is locked into switch only when actuating key is inserted and power is applied to the electromagnet. Door or guard is not locked
in the event of a power failure or when power is removed from the electromagnet. Removing power to the electromagnet will unlock the
actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. Removing power to the electromagnet will open the N.C. safety contacts as well.
21
1
Closed
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Plastic safety interlock switches
Actuating keys
The actuating keys are common to all plastic XCSP and XCST switches
Their oblong mounting holes enable simple adjustment
when mounting on moving guards.
Play
A pivoting actuator (both horizontally and vertically) is
available when using guard switches in conjunction
with hinged guards or guards with imprecise guiding.
Play
10°
1
10°
Straight actuating keys are supplied with an adaptor for
simple replacement of an XCKP guard switch by an
XCSPA switch, or an XCKT switch by an XCSTA
switch, without the need to drill additional mounting
holes for the switch or the actuating key.
Play
2
Play
Turret head
6DIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV;&63$;&67$DQG;&67(DUH¿WWHGZLWKDVTXDUHWXUUHWKHDGZKLFKFDQEH
URWDWHGWKURXJKƒLQƒVWHSV*XDUGVZLWFKHV;&603KDYHD¿[HGKHDG
8 directions of actuation are possible for the actuator:
- 4 in the horizontal plane (1 for XCS MP),
- 4 from above the switch (1 for XCS MP)
(4 alternative positions of the actuator slot, depending
on the orientation of the head).
3
4
When loosening the 2 mounting screws for reorientation of the operating head, the head itself
remains attached to the body and the contact states
remain unchanged (XCSPA, XCSTA, XCS TE).
Safety contacts
5
The guard switches incorporate either a 2-pole contact block (XCS MP, XCSPA and XCS TE) or a
3-pole contact block (XCSMP and XCSTA), with positive opening operation, which is actuated by
insertion or withdrawal of the actuating key attached to the guard
21
11
12
14
22
22
13
21
21
14
22
13
21
22
14
13
XCSPA, XCS TE
21
13
33
21
31
13
11
21
31
22
14
34
22
32
14
12
22
32
XCSTA
OG
BN
BN/WH
OG/WH
BU
BU/WH
OG
OG/WH
BN
BN/WH
BU
BU/WH
OG
OG/WH
OG
BU
BU/WH
BU/WH
Guard retaining
device
OG/WH
BU
or XCS MP
In addition, guard switches type XCS TE incorporate a
N.C. contact block (with positive opening operation)
actuated by the solenoid. The N.C. contact is for use in
the safety circuit of the machine. The withdrawal of the
actuating key opens the N.C. safety contact(s), even in
the event of the contact sticking or welding.
The 2-pole N.C. + N.C. or 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. or
N.C. + N.C. + N.C. (XCSTA/MP only) contact block
enables category 3 control circuits to be established
conforming to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1 by using both
N.C. safety contacts in redundancy, or a category 1
control circuit by using one N.C. contact in the safety
circuit and the other N.C. contact for signalling (for
example: PLC, illuminated beacon, etc.). Alternatively,
these guard switches used in conjunction with a
Preventa™ XPS safety relay module establish a
category 4 control circuit.
Designers should follow the relevant recommendations
for validation of control systems.
The guard retaining device XCS Z21 can be used with all plastic switches type XCSPA and XCSTA that
DUHXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKHLWKHUWKHZLGH;&6=RUSLYRWLQJ;&6=DFWXDWLQJNH\
It assists in holding the guard closed by providing an
extra retaining force of 11.2 lbs. (50 N).
6
7
8
9
It is specially suited for use with light machines
operating in arduous conditions (vibration, mechanical
shock, guard not vertical, risk of guard rebound on
closing, etc.).
It can be used for horizontal actuator actuation
directions as well as those from above.
10
3/15
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Plastic safety interlock switches
1
2
/RFNLQJXQORFNLQJ
by solenoid on
XCS TE
7\SH;&67(LQFRUSRUDWHDVROHQRLGIRUORFNLQJXQORFNLQJRIWKHPDFKLQHJXDUG
Unlocking by
special tool for
XCS TE
Type XCS TE are supplied with a special tool 1 that enables unlocking of the machine guard while
being held in the locked position by the solenoid (for use by authorized personnel only)
With the machine guard closed and locked, the resistance to forcible withdrawal of
WKHDFWXDWRU¿WWHGWRWKHJXDUGLV112 lbs. (500 N).
In addition to the 2-pole contact block, positively operated by the actuator mounted
to the guard, XCS TE switches incorporate a N.C. contact block mechanically
linked to the solenoid.
The N.C. contact is for use in the safety circuit of the machine.
The manual unlocking of the guard using the tool 1 is useful in the following cases:
- while the machine is undergoing maintenance (with the tool turned to the
“UNLOCK” position and then removed, the level of protection is higher in preventing
an accidental machine start. The safety for maintenance personnel is thus
improved),
- in the event of a power failure,
- in the event of an interlocking circuit malfunction (interlocked condition maintained:
positive safety). The electrical supply providing the unlocking via the solenoid always
takes priority over manual unlocking using the special tool.
1
3
UNLOCK
4
Example of operation for an XCS TE safety interlock switch: locking without power
Actuating key locks into switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the door is secured regardless of electrical power availability or
failure. Applying power to the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will
not open until the actuating key is removed.
8
Safety circuit of the Open
machine
9
10
3/16
Open
Closed
13
14
11
12
22
21
22
14
21
22
11
21
12
22
31
32
Closed
32
11
12
31
32
32
Open
Stop instruction given, Machine has stopped.
the machine stops
The guard can be
gradually (deceleration opened.
then complete stop of
motor).
31
14
21
22
21
22
14
11
12
22
21
22
Guard closed, actuating Start instruction given,
key can be locked. It will the machine is
be locked as soon as
running.
the start instruction is
given.
21
“1”
(energized)
13
Free
“O”
(de-energized)
13
Locked
“O”
(de-energized)
13
Locked
“1”
(energized)
31
14
11
22
21
12
Machine cannot be
operated.
32
Contact state of
solenoid
22
14
21
22
Machine is in
non-operational
state.
Free
31
Status
Machine stopped,
power on
Closed
32
7
11
2-pole
contact state for
XCS TE7ppp
21
2-pole
contact state for
XCS TE5ppp
Closed
Stopping
sequence
Closed
21
“1”
(energized)
13
Free
“O”
(de-energized)
21
Free
Solenoid status
13
Guard status
12
6
Machine stopped,
ready to start
Closed
Running
Guard position
Power on,
machine off
Open
22
5
Power off,
machine off
Open
31
Machine status
Open
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches
Type XCSTE
Example of operation for an XCS TE safety interlock switch: locking with power
The actuating key is locked into switch only when the actuating key is inserted and power is applied to the electromagnet. The door or guard is
not locked in the event of a power failure or when power is removed from the electromagnet. Removing power to the electromagnet will unlock
the actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will not open until the actuating key is removed.
Note: Locking with power devices does not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088 regarding guard
locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices
meets European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European
standards.
Open
Open
Closed
22
14
21
11
13
3
4
12
22
14
21
22
11
12
21
22
33
34
Closed
5
34
11
12
33
34
34
Open
2
Stop instruction given, Machine has stopped.
the machine stops
The guard can be
gradually (deceleration opened.
then complete stop of
motor).
33
14
21
22
21
22
14
11
12
22
21
22
Guard closed, actuating Start instruction given,
key can be locked. It will the machine is
be locked as soon as
running.
the start instruction is
given.
21
“0”
(de-energized)
13
Free Movement
“1”
(energized)
33
14
11
12
22
21
22
34
Safety circuit
of the machine
Locked
“1”
(energized)
34
33
Contact state of
Electromagnet
Machine cannot be
operated.
Locked
“0”
(de-energized)
33
21
14
11
12
22
21
Machine is in
non-operational
state.
Free Movement
13
“0”
(de-energized)
Status
Machine Stopped,
Power On
Closed
13
Free Movement
“0”
(de-energized)
2-pole
contact state for
XCS TE7ppp
Closed
Stopping
Sequence
Closed
21
Free Movement
Electromagnet
State
2-pole
contact state for
XCS TE5ppp
13
Guard Status
21
Machine Stopped,
Ready to Start
Closed
13
Power On,
Machine Off
Open
Machine running
Guard Position
Power Off,
Machine Off
Open
22
Machine Status
1
Open
6
7
8
9
10
3/17
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Rotary lever and rotary shaft operated safety
interlock switches
Presentation
Turret head
Safety interlock switches for hinged covers or guards, featuring a
hinged lever or rotary shaft operator, incorporate a turret head that can
be rotated through 360° in 90° steps.
Two additional self-locking screws are included with each switch for
positive mounting of the head.
1
2
2 types of body
b Plastic body, narrow, with 1 conduit entry for XCSPL and XCSPR.
b Plastic body, wide, with 2 conduit entries for XCSTL and XCSTR.
3
4
XCSPL
Applications
9
10
3/18
21
13
14
22
31
32
11
12
21
22
22
13
33
14
34
21
7
22
14
13
6
21
2 types of operating lever, 2 rotary shaft lengths
b Levers
6WUDLJKWRUHOERZHGÀXVKZLWKUHDURIVZLWFKPDNLQJWKHOHYHU
switches suitable for use with all types of hinged guards, whether:
- ÀXVKZLWKWKHPDFKLQHIUDPHZRUNXVHDVZLWFKZLWKDQHOERZHG
ÀXVKOHYHU
- overhanging in relation to the machine framework (use a switch
with a straight lever).
3 alternative operating lever positions allow the switches to be used
with guards that open to the left, center or right.
b Rotary shaft operators
2 shaft lengths: 1.18 or 3.15 in. (30 or 80 mm).
Safety contacts
Types XCSPL and XCSPR incorporate a 2-pole contact block, with
positive opening operation. The contact arrangements can be: N.C. +
N.O. (N.O. staggered) or N.C. + N.C.
Types XCSTL and XCSTR incorporate a 3-pole contact, with positive
opening operation. The contact arrangements can be:
N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2 N.O. staggered) or N.C. + N.C. + N.O.) (N.O.
staggered).
Opening of the N.C. safety contact(s) occurs when the operating lever or
spindle is displaced by an angle equal to or greater than 5°.
5
8
XCSTR
These safety interlock switches provide a solution for monitoring hinged protective guards with small
opening radius on machines with low inertia (no rundown time).
They are specially suitable for existing machines which need to be brought in-line with the latest standards
and directives since they can be used in conjunction with existing covers, including those whose mounting is
somewhat imprecise.
Mounting of these switches improve the machine operator’s level of safety by limiting the opening of the
protective guard and reducing the risk of touching any moving parts before they have come to a stop.
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Non-contact safety interlocks and systems
Presentation
Non-contact safety interlocks
3 body types
b
b
b
b
b
b
PBT plastic body
Compact rectangular, XCSDMC
Standard rectangular, XCSDMP
Cylindrical Ø 30, XCSDMR
Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m)
Connector on pigtail connection:
- M8: DMC
- M12: DMP, DMR
Contacts
1RQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVDUH¿WWHGZLWKSROH
;&6'0&;&6'05;&6'03 or 3-pole (XCSDMP)
Reed type contacts and are available with or without a
“guard closed” LED indicator.
The N.C. and N.O. contacts change state as soon as
the magnet is at a distance from the sensor of
approximately 0.31 in. (8 mm) for types XCSDMP and
XCSDMR and approximately 0.20 in. (5mm) for
type XCSDMC.
Connection
When used in safety circuits, the Reed technology
contacts must always be used in conjunction with a
Preventa™ safety module.
Non-contact safety interlock systems with
dedicated transmitter
1
2
3
4
1 body type
b PBT plastic body
b Self-contained range: category 3 and SIL 2 XCSDM3 and category 4 and SIL 3 - XCSDM4 (SIL 2
and SIL 3 per IEC 61508 and EN/IEC 62061)
b Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m)
b Pigtail with M12 connector
Technology
Coded “Hall effect” detection
PNP safety outputs
Integrated self-monitoring using micro-processors.
Detection distance from 0 to 0.39 in. (0 to 10 mm)
obtained on approach of dedicated transmitter
XCSDMT.
Functions
b Dynamic EDM (External Device Monitoring) only for
XCSDM4,
b Fault and short-circuit detection,
b Output diagnostics (non safety related) only for
XCSDM4
b LED indicator
b Series wiring of up to a maximum of 32 systems for
XCSDM3 only.
Applications
These switches provide a solution for monitoring
moveable machine guards on machines with quick
rundown times.
They are particularly suitable for guards without
DFFXUDWHJXLGDQFHDQGIRUXVHLQGLI¿FXOWHQYLURQPHQWV
(dust, liquids, etc.).
Installing self-contained systems provides an optimum
solution (no control system required).
They enable
- monitoring of one or several guards (opening, closing)
on small machines,
- savings in space and the elimination of enclosures
and/or control cabinets.
3/19
5
6
7
8
9
10
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Safety limit switches
Presentation
1
With head for linear movement (plunger) or rotary movement (lever)
b Narrow metal body.
b Compact XCS M
b With protective cover, preventing both access to the
mounting screws or adjustment of the head by non
authorized personnel.
b Torx mounting screws.
b A removable cable entry to facilitate wiring.
2
Contacts
XCS M3OLPLWVZLWFKHVDUH¿WWHGZLWKSROHFRQWDFWV
and XCS M4VZLWFKHVDUH¿WWHGZLWKSROHFRQWDFWV
4 versions of complete switches are available
incorporating these contacts:
- metal end plunger,
- roller plunger,
- thermoplastic roller lever,
- 0.75 in. (19 mm) diameter steel roller lever.
3
4
Connection
Pre-cabled switches, either 7 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm²) or
9 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm²).
Applications
5
These switches provide a solution for monitoring covers, guards or grilles on machines with low inertia (quick
rundown time), either in conjunction with actuator operated guard switches or not.
When used on their own, they are always installed in “positive mode” or combined in pairs, with one switch
being in “positive mode” and the other in “negative mode”, and can, when connected to Preventa™ safety
relay modules, establish a category 4 safety control system.
6
7
XPS
8
9
10
3/20
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Safety limit switches
Presentation
With head for linear movement (plunger) or rotary movement (lever)
b Compact metal case XCSD and plastic body
XCS P.
b With protective cover, preventing both access to the
mounting screws or adjustment of the head by non
authorized personnel.
b Torx mounting screws.
b A removable cable entry to facilitate wiring.
Contacts
XCS P3pppp and XCSD3ppppOLPLWVZLWFKHVDUH¿WWHG
with 3-pole contacts.
4 versions of complete switches are available
incorporating these contacts:
- metal end plunger,
- roller plunger,
- thermoplastic roller lever,
- 0.75 in. (19 mm) diameter steel roller lever.
Applications
These switches provide a solution for monitoring covers, guards or grilles on machines with low inertia (quick
rundown time), either in conjunction with actuator operated guard switches or not.
When used on their own, they are always installed in “positive mode” or combined in pairs, with one switch
being in “positive mode” and the other in “negative mode”, and can, when connected to Preventa™ safety
relay modules, establish a category 4 safety control system.
1
2
3
4
5
XPS
Application
information for all
guard switches
2SHUDWLRQRI
solenoid locking
6
Application information for all safety interlock and safety limit switches
When designing a door or gate guarding system, these guidelines must be followed:
b The actuating key, coded magnet or lever alone must not be used as the sole means to hold the gate
or guard closed. A separate locking or latching mechanism must be used to hold the door closed.
b The safety interlock switch or safety limit switch must not be used as a mechanical stop for the moving
guard. A separate mechanical stop must be provided. (EN 1088 - 1995: 5.2.2)
b The actuating key must not be used as a gate guiding device. Install a guide for the guard to ensure proper
alignment.
b Actuating keys must be securely attached to gates, guards, and doors only. They should not be attached
to cables, cords or chains.
b Actuating keys for safety interlocks should not be inserted further than the maximum depth indicated for
that device.
b Levers or plungers on safety limit switches should not be operated in excess of the parameters indicated
for maximum travel.
b Non-Contact safety interlock switches or actuating keys should not be used as a mechanical stop.
Their operation is to be non-contact.
7
8
2SHUDWLRQRIVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVZLWKVROHQRLGORFNLQJ
Safety interlocks are available with two types of locking of the actuating key: locking with power and locking
without power. The operation of each is described below.
b Locking Without Power. Actuating key locks into switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the
door is secured regardless of electrical power availability or power failure. Applying power to the
electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety
contacts will not open until the actuating key is removed.
b Locking With Power. Actuating key locks into switch only when actuating key is inserted and power is
applied to the electromagnet. Door or guard is not locked in the event of a power failure or when power is
removed from the electro-magnet. Removing power from the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and
allow it to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will not open until the actuating key is
removed.
Note: Locking with power devices do not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery,
especially EN 1088 regarding guard locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function
for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices meets European requirements, and should
be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European standards.
3/21
9
10
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC, XCSE and XCSL
Plastic, double insulated, turret head,
types XCSMP, XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE
1
Metal, types XCS A, XCS B, XCS C,
XCSE
Safety interlock switches with or without locking of the actuating key
2
3
Pages 3/24 to 3/43
Plastic, types XCS MP, XCSPA
XCSTA, XCS TE
Safety interlock switches with or without locking of the actuating key
4
5
Pages 3/44 to 3/49
6
Environment characteristics
Safety interlock switch type
Conformity to standards
7
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV
Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature
Products
Machine assemblies
For operation
For storage
8
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Electric shock protection
Degree of protection
Cable entry
Connecting cable
9
Materials
10
3/22
XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE, XCSL
XCS MP, XCSPA, XCSTA, XCS TE
(metal)
(plastic)
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100
UL, CSA
UL, CSA (c UL for XCS MP)
Standard version: “TC”
- 13…+ 158 °F (- 25…+ 70 °C)
- 13…+ 104 °F (- 25…+ 40 °C) for XCSE
- 13…+ 140 °F (- 25…+ 60 °C) for XCS TE
- 40…+ 158 °F (- 40…+ 70 °C)
- 13…+ 176 °F (- 25…+ 80 °C) for XCS MP
5 gn (10…500 Hz) conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (6 gn (10…55 Hz) for XCS MP)
10 gn (duration 11 ms) conforming to IEC/EN 60068-2-27 (50 gn (duration 11 ms) for XCS MP)
Class I conforming to IEC/EN 60536
Class 2 conforming to IEC/EN 60536
,3FRQIRUPLQJWR,(&(1DQG,(&(1 (1)
1 entry (XCS A, XCS B, XCS C) or 2 entries
1 entry (XCSPA and XCS TE) or 2 entries
(XCSE) tapped for n° 13 (Pg 13.5) cable gland, (XCSTA) tapped for n° 11 (Pg 11) cable gland,
tapped M20 or tapped 1/2" NPT
tapped M16 or tapped 1/2" NPT (with adaptor)
for XCSTA and XCS TE
–
Pre-cabled, either 4 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) or 6 x
20 AWG (0.5 mm2) (XCS MP)
XCS A/B/C/E
XCS MP/PA/TA/TE/PL/TL/PR/TR
Zamak case
3RO\DPLGH3$¿EHUJODVVLPSUHJQDWHG
enclosure
Actuators (all types): steel XC60, surface treated
(1) Live parts of these switches are protected against the penetration of dust and water.
However, when installing take all necessary precautions to prevent the penetration of solid
bodies, or liquids with a high dust content, into the actuator aperture. Not recommended for
use in saline atmospheres.
Characteristics
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC, XCSE and XCSL
Plastic, double insulated, turret head,
types XCSMP, XCSPA, XCSTA and XCSTE
Contact block characteristics
Rated operational
characteristics
2 and 3 contact, slow break
Conventional thermal current
in enclosure
Rated insulation voltage
2 and 3 contact
Rated impulse withstand
voltage
Positive operation
Resistance across terminals
Short-circuit protection
2 and 3 contact
2 and 3 contact
3 contact
Connection
Pre-cabled
Screw
clamp
terminals
2 contact, snap action
2 and 3 contact
XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSTA, XCSPA: a AC-15, A300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A or
Ue = 120 V, Ie = 6 A
XCSE, XCS TE: a AC-15, B300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A or Ue = 120 V, Ie = 3 A
XCS MP: a AC-15, C300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 0.75 A or Ue = 120 V, Ie = 1.5 A
All models: c DC-13, Q300: Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A or Ue = 125 V, Ie = 0.55 A
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSPA (2 & 3 slow break contact and 2 snap action contact versions)
XCSE, XCS TE, XCSPA (3 snap action contact version): Ithe = 6 A
XCS MP: Ithe = 2.5 A
3 contacts (XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE, XCSTA), 2 contacts (XCSPA, XCS TE),
2 and 3 contacts (XCS MP):
Ui = 500 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1; Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
3 contacts (XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE, XCSTA), 2 contacts (XCSPA, XCS TE),
2 and 3 contacts (XCS MP): Uimp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
N.C. contact(s) with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1, Section 3
y 30 m1 conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-4
3 contacts (XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE, XCSTA), 2 contacts (XCSPA, XCS TE),
2 and 3 contacts (XCS MP): 10 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl)
XCSPA:
6 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl)
4 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) or 6 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) (XCS MP), PVC
1
2
3
XCSPA, XCSTA:
Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2), max: 2 x 14 AWG (1.5 mm2)
3 contacts (XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE, XCSTA), 2 contacts (XCSPA, XCS TE):
Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2), max: 2 x 14 AWG (1.5 mm2) with or without
cable end
Electrical life
4
Conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix C.
Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13.
Maximum operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour.
Load factor: 0.5
5
Millions of operating cycles
FRQWDFWYHUVLRQ;&6$%&(7$
and 2 slow break contact version
5
4
3
Ithe
230 V
2
12/24/48 V
110 V
1
6
0,5
0,2
0,1
0,5
1
2
3 4 5
10
Current in A
Voltage
o
V
W
24
13
48
9
120
7
7
Electrical Life The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual operating life will vary with conditions. The above
statements are not intended to nor shall they create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the limited warranty offered
on this product please refer to the Square D ® terms and conditions of sale found in the Square D ® Digest.
8
9
10
3/23
References,
characteristics
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, turret head (1), types XCSA, XCSB,
XCSC and XCSE
Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT
Type of switch
Without locking of actuator
With locking of actuator, manual unlocking (2)
1
2
LED indication on opening of N.C. contacts
Without
13
33
14
13
34
31
31
14
21
32
21
21
22
32
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
slow break (3)
22
4
11
SROH1&1&12
(N.O. staggered)
slow break (3)
12
3
22
References of switches without actuator (
SROH1&1212
(2 N.O. staggered)
slow break (3)
Weight oz (kg)
1 orange LED 1 orange LED Without
z 24/48 V
a 110/240 V
1 orange LED 1 orange LED Without
z 24/48 V
a 110/240 V
N.C. contact with positive opening operation)
XCSA503
–
XCSA523
XCSB503
–
–
–
XCSA703
XCSA713
XCSA723
XCSB703
XCSB713
XCSB723
XCSC703
XCSA803
–
–
XCSB803
–
–
XCSC803
15.521
(0.440)
15.521
(0.440)
15.521
(0.440)
16.755
(0.475)
16.755
(0.475)
16.755
(0.475)
16.932
(0.480)
Complementary characteristics not shown under General characteristics SDJHDQG
5
Actuation speed
Maximum: 19.7 in./s (0.5 m/s), minimum: 0.39 in./s (0.01 m/s)
Resistance to forcible withdrawal of
actuator
XCSB and XCSC: 337 lbs. (1500 N);; XCSE: 450 lbs. (2000 N)
Maximum operating rate
For maximum life: 600 operating cycles per hour
Minimum force for extraction of actuator u 4.5 lbs (20 N)
6
Cable entry
XCSA, XCSB, XCSC: 1 conduit entry
XCSE: 2 conduit entries
Entries tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit
Materials
Body: zamak. Head: zamak. Safety screws: 5-lobe torque. Protective plate: steel.
References of actuators
7
8
9
10
Description
Straight actuator
Actuator with wide mounting Pivoting actuator
Latch for sliding doors
(Padlockable in open
position)
For guard switches XCS A, B, C, E
XCS Z01
XCS Z02
XCS Z03
XCS Z05
Weight oz (kg)
0.705 (0.020)
0.705 (0.020)
3.351 (0.095)
21.164 (0.600)
(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch.
(2) Unlocking by pushbutton for XCS Bppp and by key operated lock for XCS Cppp.
(3) Schematic diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is inserted in the head of the switch.
The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2" NPT, and are available with metric conduit:
b To order devices tapped for 13 mm cable gland, conforming to NFC 68-300 (DIN PG 13.5): Change the last character in the part number to 1.
For example: XCSA723 is changed to XCSA721.
b To order devices tapped for M20 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland: Change the last character in the part number to 2.
For example: XCSA723 is changed to XCSA722.
Principle:
page 3/7
3/24
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/24
Dimensions:
page 3/33
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/35
References,
characteristics (continued)
Type of switch
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, turret head (1), types XCSA, XCSB,
XCSC and XCSE
Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT
With interlocking, locking by solenoid
1
2
Type of interlocking
Locking without power and unlocking on energization of solenoid (2).
To order a guard switch with locking with power and unlocking on de-energization of the
solenoid, replace the 2nd number (3) by 5 in the references shown below.
Example: XCSE5313 becomes XCSE5513
LED indication
Orange LED: “guard open” signalling.
Green LED: “guard closed and locked” signalling.
Supply voltage of solenoid
a or c 24 V
(50/60 Hz on a)
a or c 110/120 V (3)
(50/60 Hz on a)
Type of contact on solenoid
N.C. + N.O.
N.C. + N.O.
33
34
32
31
13
13
14
21
31
14
21
32
21
22
12
11
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
slow break (4)
22
SROH1&1&12
(N.O. staggered)
slow break (4)
22
References of switches without actuating key (
SROH1&1212
(2 N.O. staggered)
slow break (4)
Weight oz (kg)
3
4
N.C. contact with positive opening operation)
XCSE5313
XCSE5333
XCSE7313
XCSE7333
XCSE8313
XCSE8333
5
(5)
40.212 (1.140)
6
Solenoid characteristics
Load factor
100 %
Rated operational voltage
a or c 24 V
Voltage limits
- 20%, + 10% of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on c)
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Service life
20,000 hours
Power consumption
Inrush: 10 VA. Sealed: 10 VA
a or c9
7
LED indicator characteristics
Rated insulation voltage
50 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
250 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Current power consumption
7 mA
7 mA
Rated operational voltage
a or c9
a9
Voltage limits
a or c 20...52 V (including ripple)
a 95...264 V (including ripple)
Service life
100,000 hours
100,000 hours
Protection against overvoltages
Yes
Yes
8
(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch.
(2) A key operated lock enables forced opening of the interlocking mechanism, by authorized personnel, allowing withdrawal of the actuating key and subsequent
opening of the N.C. safety contacts.
(3) For use on c 110/120 V, remove the LED module.
(4) Wiring diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is inserted in the head of the switch.
(5) Switches supplied with a single green LED.
(6) The N.O. contacts will close after the N.C. contacts open. They do not change state simultaneously.
The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2" NPT, and are available with metric conduit:
b To order devices tapped for 13mm cable gland, conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 13.5): Change the last character in the part number to 1
For example: XCSE7333 is changed to XCSE7331
b To order devices tapped for M20 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland: Change the last character in the part number to 2
For example: XCSE7333 is changed to XCSE7332
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/25
Dimensions:
page 3/33
9
10
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/36
3/25
Selection
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/
Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT
XCS Safety Interlock; Type XCSL Selection
0HWDO7\SH;&6/&RQGXLW(QWU\7DSSHG137/RFNLQJ:LWKRXW3RZHU
Positive opening N.C. contacts meet the IEC and EN requirements for positive opening contacts per IEC/EN 60947-5-1; and NEMA
ICS-5, part 6 (positive opening action).
Standard devices are shown on pages 3/26 and 3/27. If these devices do not meet your application requirements, refer to page 3/28
to build a part number.
1
Type of Switch
:LWK,QWHUORFNLQJ/RFNLQJE\(OHFWURPDJQHW%
Locking Without Power. Actuating key locks into switch when inserted. This is typically preferred
as the door is secured regardless of electrical power availability or power failure. Applying power to
the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. Applying
power to the electromagnet will open the N.C. safety contacts as well.
Type of interlocking
2
XCSL764F3
3
Position of Head
(for actuating key)
To Right
To Left
Position of Electromagnet
Connector
To Left
To Right
Position of Ronis key release
lock
Front
Front
LED indication
Supply voltage of
electromagnet
Orange LED: “guard open” signaling
24 Vdc
120 Vac or
230 Vac or
Vdc 6
Vdc 6
24 Vdc
120 Vac or
Vdc 6
230 Vac or
Vdc 6
13
13
14
34
31
33
22
21
14
N.C. + N.C. + N.O.
(N.O. staggered)
slow break z¢
32
4
22
N.C. + N.O. + N.O.
(2 N.O. staggered)
slow break z¢
21
5HIHUHQFHVRIVZLWFKHVZLWKRXWDFWXDWLQJNH\VHOHFWDFWXDWLQJNH\IURPSDJH
Weight oz (kg)
%
XCSL766F3
6
z
5
¢
XCSL564B3
XCSL564F3
XCSL564M3
XCSL566B3
XCSL566F3
XCSL566M3
XCSL764B3
XCSL764F3
XCSL764M3
XCSL766B3
XCSL766F3
XCSL766M3
32 (0.920 kg)
32 (0.920 kg)
32 (0.920 kg)
32 (0.920 kg)
32 (0.920 kg)
32 (0.920 kg)
A Ronis key operated lock allows the forced opening of the guard in an emergency situation. When the Ronis key is turned to
the unlock position, the actuating key is unlocked and is free to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will open
when the Ronis key is turned to the unlock position as well.
For use on 110/120 Vdc or 220/240 Vdc, remove the LED indicator module.
Schematic diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is fully inserted and engaged in the head of
the switch.
The N.O. contacts will close after the N.C. contacts open. They do not change state simultaneously.
Only the N.C. contacts should be used in the safety control circuit. The N.O. contacts are provided solely for signalling – NOT for
safety functions.
$FWXDWLQJKHDGVROHQRLGDQGUHODWHGFRPSRQHQWVDUH127¿HOGFRQYHUWLEOHDQGVKRXOGQRWEHURWDWHGRUPRGL¿HG
The only replacement parts or components available are covers and LED indicator modules. These devices are not to be
UHSDLUHGRUDGMXVWHG The complete switch should be replaced.
6
Complementary Characteristics not shown under general characteristics
SDJHVDQG
7
Actuation speed
Resistance to Forcible Key
Withdrawal
0D[LPXP2SHUDWLQJ5DWH
Minimum Force for Positive
2SHQLQJ
Maximum: 19.7 in/s (0.5 m/s), Minimum: 0.39 in/s (0.01 m/s)
XCSL: 337 lbs. (1500 N)
Conduit Entry
XCSL: 1 entry. Conduit entry tapped for 1/2 NPT
For maximum life: 600 operating cycles per hour, i.e.: 10/min. (or once in 6 seconds)
4.5 lbs (20 N)
Electromagnet Characteristics
'&HOHFWURPDJQHWLVVXSSOLHGRQDOO;&6/PRGHOV)RUXVHZLWKDQ$&SRZHUVXSSO\DEULGJHUHFWL¿HULVVXSSOLHGLQWKHFRQQHFWRU
on all AC devices.
Load Factor
100%
5DWHG2SHUDWLRQDO9ROWDJH
24 Vac or Vdc
110/120 Vac or Vdc 220/240 Vac or Vdc
Voltage Limits
-10%, +10% of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on) conforming to IEC 60947-1
Power consumption
Inrush: 10 VA. Sealed: 10 VA
8
/(',QGLFDWRU&KDUDFWHULVWLFV
9
5DWHG2SHUDWLRQDO9ROWDJH
5DWHG,QVXODWLRQ9ROWDJH
Current Power consumption
Voltage Limits
24 Vac or Vdc
50 V conforming to IEC 60947-1
7 mA
20...30 Vac or Vdc (including ripple)
110 Vac
220 Vac
250 V conforming to IEC 60947-1
2.5 mA
5 mA
95...130 Vac
190...260 Vac
(including ripple)
(including ripple)
Yes
3URWHFWLRQ$JDLQVW2YHU
Yes
voltages
The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2” NPT, and are available with metric conduit:
‡ 7RRUGHUGHYLFHVWDSSHGIRUPPFDEOHJODQGFRQIRUPLQJWR1)&',13J&KDQJHWKHODVWFKDUDFWHULQWKHSDUW
number to 1
For example: XCSL764B3 is changed to XCSL764B1
‡ 7RRUGHUGHYLFHVWDSSHGIRU0[IRU,62FDEOHJODQG&KDQJHWKHODVWFKDUDFWHULQWKHSDUWQXPEHUWR
For example: XCSL764B3 is changed to XCSL764B2
10
Principle:
page 3/7
3/26
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/26
Dimensions:
page 3/38
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/38
Selection (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/
Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT
XCS Safety Interlock: Type XCSL Selection
0HWDO7\SH;&6/&RQGXLW(QWU\7DSSHG137/RFNLQJ:LWK3RZHU
Positive opening N.C. contacts meets the IEC and EN requirements for positive opening contacts per IEC/EN 60947-5-1; and NEMA
ICS-5, part 6 (positive opening action).
Standard devices are shown on pages 3/26 and 3/27. If these devices do not meet your application requirements, refer to page 3/28
to build a part number.
XCSL784F3
Type of Switch
:LWK,QWHUORFNLQJ/RFNLQJE\(OHFWURPDJQHW %
Type of interlocking
Locking With Power. Actuating key locks into switch only when actuating key is inserted and power is
applied to the electromagnet. Door or guard is not locked in the event of a power failure or when power is
removed from the electro-magnet. Removing power from the electromagnet will unlock actuating key
and allow it to be removed from the switch. Removing power to the electromagnet will open the N.C.
safety contacts as well.
2
Note: Locking with power devices do not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088
regarding guard locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking
without power devices meet European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where
machinery must meet European standards.
Position of Head
(for actuating key)
Position of Electromagnet
Connector
Position of Ronis key release lock
LED indication
Supply voltage of
electromagnet
To Right
To Left
To Left
To Right
Front
Orange LED: “guard open” signaling
Front
24 Vdc
24 Vdc
120 Vac or
Vdc 6
230 Vac or
Vdc 6
3
120 Vac or
Vdc 6
230 Vac or
Vdc 6
13
34
13
Weight oz (kg).
%
6
z
¢
4
33
14
31
14
22
21
32
N.C. + N.C. +
N.O.
(N.O. staggered)
slow break z¢
22
N.C. + N.O. +
N.O.
(2 N.O. staggered)
slow break z¢
21
5HIHUHQFHVRIVZLWFKHVZLWKRXWDFWXDWLQJNH\VHOHFWDFWXDWLQJNH\IURPSDJH
XCSL786F3
1
XCSL584B3
XCSL584F3
XCSL584M3
XCSL586B3
XCSL586F3
XCSL586M3
XCSL784B3
XCSL784F3
XCSL784M3
XCSL786B3
XCSL786F3
XCSL786M3
32 (0.920 kg)
32 (0.920 kg)
32 (0.920 kg)
32 (0.920 kg)
32 (0.920 kg)
5
32 (0.920 kg)
A Ronis key operated lock allows the forced opening of the guard in an emergency situation. When the Ronis key is turned to the unlock position,
the actuating key is unlocked and is free to be removed from the switch. The N.C. safety contacts will open when the Ronis key is turned to the
unlock position as well.
For use on 110/120 Vdc or 220/240 Vdc, remove the LED indicator module.
Schematic diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is fully inserted and engaged in the head of the switch.
The N.O. contacts will close after the N.C. contacts open. They do not change state simultaneously.
6
Only the N.C. contacts should be used in the safety control circuit. The N.O. contacts are provided solely for signalling – NOT for
safety functions.
$FWXDWLQJKHDGVROHQRLGDQGUHODWHGFRPSRQHQWVDUH127¿HOGFRQYHUWLEOHDQGVKRXOGQRWEHURWDWHGRUPRGL¿HG
The only replacement parts or components available are covers and LED indicator modules. These devices are not to be repaired
RUDGMXVWHG The complete switch should be replaced.
Complementary Characteristics not shown under general characteristics
SDJHVDQG
Actuation Speed
Resistance to Forcible Key Withdrawal
0D[LPXP2SHUDWLQJ5DWH
0LQLPXP)RUFHIRU3RVLWLYH2SHQLQJ
Maximum: 19.7 in/s (0.5 m/s), Minimum: 0.39 in/s (0.01 m/s)
XCSL: 337 lbs. (1500 N)
For maximum life: 600 operating cycles per hour, i.e.: 10/min. (or once in 6 seconds)
4.5 lbs (20 N)
Conduit Entry
XCSL: 1 entry. Conduit entry tapped for 1/2 NPT
7
Electromagnet Characteristics
8
'&HOHFWURPDJQHWLVVXSSOLHGRQDOO;&6/PRGHOV)RUXVHZLWKDQ$&SRZHUVXSSO\DEULGJHUHFWL¿HULVVXSSOLHGLQWKHFRQQHFWRURQDOO$&GHYLFHV
Load Factor
5DWHG2SHUDWLRQDO9ROWDJH
Voltage Limits
Power consumption
100%
24 Vac or Vdc
110/120 Vac or Vdc
220/240 Vac or Vdc
-10%, +10% of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on) conforming to IEC 60947-1
Inrush: 10 VA. Sealed: 10 VA
/(',QGLFDWRU&KDUDFWHULVWLFV
9
5DWHG2SHUDWLRQDO9ROWDJH
24 Vac or Vdc
5DWHG,QVXODWLRQ9ROWDJH
50 V conforming to IEC 60947-1
250 V conforming to IEC 60947-1
Current Power consumption
7 mA
7 mA
5 mA
Voltage Limits
20...30 Vac or Vdc (including ripple)
95...264 Vac
(including ripple)
190...260 Vac
(including ripple)
3URWHFWLRQ$JDLQVW2YHUYROWDJHV
Yes
Yes
110/240 Vac
220 Vac
10
The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2” NPT, and are available with metric conduit:
‡
7RRUGHUGHYLFHVWDSSHGIRUPPFDEOHJODQGFRQIRUPLQJWR1)&',13J&KDQJHWKHODVWFKDUDFWHULQWKHSDUWQXPEHUWR
For example: XCSL784B3 is changed to XCSL784B1
‡
7RRUGHUGHYLFHVWDSSHGIRU0[IRU,62FDEOHJODQG&KDQJHWKHODVWFKDUDFWHULQWKHSDUWQXPEHUWR
For example: XCSL784B3 is changed to XCSL784B2
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/28
Dimensions:
page 3/38
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/38
3/27
Selection (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/
Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT
XCS Safety Interlock: Type XCSL Selection
0HWDO7\SH;&6/&RQGXLW(QWU\7DSSHG137
Positive opening N.C. contacts meets the IEC and EN requirements for positive opening contacts per IEC/EN 60947-5-1; and NEMA
ICS-5, part 6 (positive opening action).
If the devices shown on pages 3/26 and 3/27 do not meet you application needs, use the table below to build a part number. A
complete part number requires a code character from each of the following columns: Base Number, Ronis Key Position, Actuating
Key and Connector, Electromagnet Voltage, and Conduit Connection. A code character column Connector is optional, and is only
used if a connector is required for the application.
1
All devices have an Orange LED as standard.
2
5HIHUHQFHVRIVZLWFKHVZLWKRXWDFWXDWLQJNH\VHOHFWDFWXDWLQJNH\IURPSDJH
Base
Number
Ronis Key
Position
Actuating
Key and
Connector
Electromagnet
voltage
Conduit
Connection
Connector
(Optional)
Contact Arrangement
3
N.C. + N.O. + N.O.
XCSL5
N.C. + N.C. + N.O.
XCSL7
Locking Without Power
Front
Ronis Key Position
4
6
Right
2
Left
0
Back
4
Locking With Power
Note: A Ronis key lock is
NOT provided on the
Locking With Power
devices.
8
Actuating Key and Connector Position
Actuating Key Position
5
Connector Position
Front
Right
Left
6
Back
Left
1
Right
2
Back
3
Left
4
Front
5
Right
6
Front
7
Left
8
Right
9
Front
0
Electromagnet Supply Voltage
24 Vdc
B
110 Vac
F
220 Vac
M
Conduit Connection
7
PG 13.5
1
M20 x 1.5
2
1/2 inch NPT
3
Connector (optional)
5 Pin Mini (LEDs not wired/powered)
CA
6 Pin Mini (use with LEDs)
DA
7\SHRI,QWHUORFNLQJ
8
Locking Without Power. Actuating key locks into switch when inserted. This is typically preferred as the door is secured regardless of
electrical power availability or power failure. Applying power to the electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from
the switch. Applying power to the electromagnet will open the N.C. safety contacts as well.
Locking With Power. Actuating key locks into switch only when actuating key is inserted and power is applied to the electromagnet. Door
or guard is not locked in the event of a power failure or when power is removed from the electromagnet. Removing power from the
electromagnet will unlock actuating key and allow it to be removed from the switch. Removing power to the electromagnet will open the
N.C. safety contacts as well.
Note: Locking with power devices do not meet European standards regarding the safety of machinery, especially EN 1088 regarding guard
locking. European standards do not allow a “locking with power” function for gate or door guarding/locking. Locking without power devices
meet European requirements, and should be used when machinery is to be shipped to Europe or where machinery must meet European
standards.
9
10
Principle:
page 3/7
3/28
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/26
Dimensions:
page 3/38
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/38
References
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC
and XCSE
Separate components
Description
8
1 orange LED
indicator module
with cover, seal
and 2 mounting screws
For use
with
XCSA
XCSB
XCSC
1 orange LED +
XCSE73pp
1 green LED indicator
module with cover +
lock (1), seal and 4
mounting screws (2
keys included for lock)
8
XCS Z3p
Supply
voltage
a or c 24/48 V
Reference
Weight
oz (kg)
1.41
(0.040)
XCS Z31
a 110/240 V
XCS Z32
1.41
(0.040)
a or c 24/48 V
XCS Z43
6.17
(0.175)
809848
(1) Lock incorporated as standard on safety interlock switches XCSE: key withdrawal in LOCK
and UNLOCK positions.
1
2
3
4
XCS Z4p
Description
Blanking plugs for
operating head slot
(Sold in lots of 10)
For use
with
XCSA,
XCSB, C,
XCSE
Key withdrawal
positions from lock
–
Tubular high security XCSC,
keys to manually
XCSE
unlock and open
guards
(Sold in lots of 10)
–
Padlocking
XCSA,
attachment
XCSB, C,
to prevent insertion
XCSE
of actuating key, for up
to 3 padlocks (padlocks
not included).
–
Unit reference
XCS Z27
XCS Z25
Weight
oz (kg)
1.76
(0.050)
5
3.53
(0.100)
8
6
XCS Z90
1.94
(0.055)
7
The padlock
attachment cannot be
used as a lock-out
tag-out means.
XCS Z90
Description
For use with
Unit reference
137FRQGXLW
adaptor
(Sold in lots of 5)
XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE
DE9 RA2012
M20 x 1.5 adaptor
(Sold in lots of 5)
XCS A, XCS B, XCS C, XCSE
DE9 RA13520
Weight
oz (kg)
1.69
(0.048)
8
0.35
(0.010)
9
10
Principle:
pages 3/7
Characteristics
page 3/22
References:
page 3/29
Dimensions:
page 3/33
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/35
3/29
References (continued)
;&66DIHW\,QWHUORFN6ZLWFKHV
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/
Actuating keys and accessories, for XCSL only
1
Description
Indicator light module,
1 orange LED with cover,
seal, and 2 mounting screws.
Type
Catalog Number
24/48 Vac or Vdc
XCSZ33
110/230 Vac
XCSZ34
DC
ZCKJ921
AC
&RQWDLQVDUHFWL¿HUEULGJHLQVLGHFRQQHFWRU
for use on AC
ZCKJ922
Cable 6.6 ft. (2m) length
XSZCA1501Y
Cable 13.1 ft. (4m) length
XSZCA1502Y
Cable 6.6 ft. (2m) length
XSZCA1601Y
Cable 13.1 ft. (4m) length
XSZCA1602Y
XCSZ33
2
Connector for electromagnet
(supplied with switches as standard)
BH206
ZCKJ921
Plug and cable assemblies
mini-style 5 pins ›
3
Plug and cable assemblies
mini-style 6 pins ›
ZCKY071
Straight actuating key
ZCKY071
Actuating key for perpendicular
mounting/mounting
ZCKY081
Adjustable actuating key for Horizontal movement
ZCKY091
Adjustable actuating key for Vertical movement
ZCKY061
Sliding bolt actuating key
ZCKY101
Overriding key:
Ronis 520 key (sold in lots of 2)
Q9990912
Padlock attachment to lock into actuating
key opening. Painted yellow.
Prevents actuating key from entering switch.
Note: Cannot be used as a lock-out tag-out means.
ZCKZ01
4
ZCKY081
5
ZCKY091
6
›
More varieties and lengths of connector cables are available. See Sensors catalog # 9006CT0101.
ZCKY061
7
ZCKY101
8
ZCKZ01
9
10
Principle:
page 3/7
3/30
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/26
Dimensions:
page 3/38
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/38
References (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC,
XCSE, XCSL
XCS Safety Interlock Pre-wired Mini Connectors
3UH:LUHG0LQL&RQQHFWRUVIRU;&66DIHW\,QWHUORFNV
3 pin
1
2
3
1-Green
2-Black
3-White
The XCS safety interlock switches are available with mini connectors in several different wiring schemes. Each wiring
option shown below has a notation of ZKLFKGHYLFHVDUHDYDLODEOHZLWKWKDWRSWLRQ$GGWKHIROORZLQJVXI¿[HVWRWKH
appropriate XCS catalog number. Only a small number of the pre-wired options available are listed here and on the next
page. Many other connectors and wiring schemes are available. New wiring schemes to meet your applications
are available upon request.
1
.
5 pin
1
5
2
4
3
1-White
2-Red
3-Green
4-Orange
5-Black
6 pin
1
5
6
2
4
3
1-Orange
2-Blue
3-Black
4-White
5-Red
6-Green
3LQIRUDOO;&6([FHSW;&6(;&603DQG;&6'06XI¿[$$
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
2
3LQIRUDOO;&6([FHSW;&6(;&603DQG;&6'06XI¿[&$9
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
3LQIRU;&6(6XI¿[&&9
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
3LQIRUDOO;&6([FHSW;&6(;&603DQG;&6'06XI¿[&%9
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
3LQIRU;&6(6XI¿[&'9
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
3LQIRUDOO;&6ZLWK/('H[FHSWIRU;&6(6XI¿['$
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
9
Not for XCSDevices with all N.C. contacts. Device must have at least 1 N.O. contact.
More connector versions are available on the next page
3
4
5
NOTE: View of
connectors shown
above are the male
views as it is installed
in the switch.
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/31
3/31
References (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC, XCSE,
and XCSL
3UH:LUHG0LQL&RQQHFWRUVIRU;&66DIHW\,QWHUORFNV (continued)
7 pin
1
1
2
6
7
3
5
4
1-White-Blk. Tr.
2-Black
3-White
4-Red
5-Orange
6-Blue
7-Green
3LQIRU;&6(6XI¿[($9
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe
2
9 pin
1
3
4
2
6
7
8
9
3
4
5
1 - Orange
2 - Blue
3 - Red-Blk. Tr.
4 - Green-Blk. Tr.
5 - White
6 - Red
7 - Green
8 - White-Blk. Tr.
9 - Black
NOTE: View of
connectors shown
above are the male
views as it is installed
in the switch.
5
The XCS safety interlock switches are available with mini connectors in several different wiring schemes. Each wiring option shown
EHORZDQGRQWKHSUHYLRXVSDJHKDVDQRWDWLRQRIZKLFKGHYLFHVDUHDYDLODEOHZLWKWKDWRSWLRQ$GGWKHIROORZLQJVXI¿[HVWRWKH
appropriate XCS catalog number. Only a small number of the pre-wired options available are listed here and on the previous page.
Many other connectors and wiring schemes are available. New wiring schemes to meet your applications are available
upon request.
3LQIRU;&6(6XI¿[(%9
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe
3LQIRU;&6(ORFNLQJZLWKRXWSRZHU6XI¿[(&9
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe
Jumper between 52 and 21 (installed by Schneider Electric)
Jumper between 22 and X2 (installed by Schneider Electric)
Jumper between 34 and X3 (installed by Schneider Electric)
3LQIRU;&6(ORFNLQJZLWKRXWSRZHU6XI¿[('9
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
X1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe
Jumper between 52 and 21 (installed by Schneider Electric)
Jumper between 22 and X2 (installed by Schneider Electric)
Jumper between 34 and X3 (installed by Schneider Electric)
3LQIRU;&6(6XI¿[((
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe
3LQIRU;&6(6XI¿[()
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe
3LQIRU;&6(6XI¿[*$9
3LQIRU;&6(6XI¿[*%9
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Red with Black tracer/stripe
51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Red with Black tracer/stripe
52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green with Black tracer/stripe
52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green with Black tracer/stripe
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe
3LQIRU;&6(/RFNLQJZLWK3RZHU6XI¿[*&
3LQIRU;&6(/RFNLQJZLWKRXW3RZHU6XI¿[*'
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
Switch Terminals
Wire Color
31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange
32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green
43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Red with Black tracer/stripe
51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Red with Black tracer/stripe
44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green with Black tracer/stripe
52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Green with Black tracer/stripe
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe
E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White with Black tracer/stripe
9
Not for XCSDevices with all N.C. contacts. Device must have at least 1 N.O. contact.
More connector versions are available on the the previous page.
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/7
3/32
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/31
Dimensions
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC
and XCSE
Dimensions
Safety interlock switches
XCSAppp
1
XCSBppp, XCSCppp
2
.28
7
1.46
.28
2.05
37
7
1.3
33
33
33
33
52
1.3
1.3
1.3
1.71
1.71
1.5
38
43.5
1.5
2xØ.21
43.5
3
2xØ.21
1.12
38
2xØ5.3
2xØ5.3
28.5
4.47
113.5
4.47
113.5
2.36
2.36
60
60
4
= 1.18
.63
(1)
1.73
1.57
44
40
40
(1) 1/2” NPT conduit entry
(1) 1/2” NPT conduit entry
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3
Safety interlock switches
M20 x 1.5 adaptor
DE9 RA13520
XCSEpppp
5
137FRQGXLWDGDSWRU
DE9 RA2012
1.89
(1)
48
.75
19
1.1
7
1.3
(1) Tapped entry for 1/2" NPT
conduit
(2) M20 x 1.5 threaded shank
.14
33
7
3.5
.47
1.71
12
1.5
6
Ø26
(1) M20 x 1.5 tapped entry
(2) Pg 13.5 threaded shank
33
(2)
Ø1.02
24
1.3
.84
21.3
28
.94
.28
=
30
16
1.73
1.57
44
= 1.18
.63
(1)
=
30
16
43.5
38
8
2xØ.21
2xØ5.3
5.75
3.74
146
(1)
95
4.45
113
9
1.02
26
(1)
=
.63
1.73
16
44
.24
6
=
3.46
3.86
98
88
(1)
Dual Dimensions:
1.02
INCHES
Millimieters
26
10
(1) 1/2” NPT conduit entry
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/24
Dimensions:
page 3/33
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/35
3/33
Dimensions (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC
and XCSE
Dimensions (continued)
XCS Z01
1
XCS Z02
0.1
3.21
0.1
.12
2.5
1.38
2.5
81.5
Adaptor shank (1)
35
.43
2.19
3
11
55.5
==
.98
20
33
25
==
14
1.38
2.01
35
.43
.79
0.3
11
20
7.5
51
=
.79
1.3
3
.55
15
==
2
.59
25
=
.98
1.3
33
0.1
2.5
(1) Adaptor (included with actuator XCS Z01) for replacing, without drilling
additional mounting hole, a safety interlock switch XCK J with actuating
key ZCK Y07 by an XCSA, B, C or E with actuating key XCS Z01.
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 10
XCS Z03
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 10
XCS Z05
0.1
.28
.2.99
2.5
41
4
1.89
1.18 48
1.57
1.02
40
26
30
1.18
30
7
1.61
76
1.18
30
.98
.98
1.65
25
25
.43
.43
11
11
42
4.53
2.4
115
64
.49
.28
7
12.5
1.57
.24
5.51
40
5
6
140
Ø.21
.43
Ø5.3
11
0.1
1.3
.67
33
17
.91
1.26
.71
32
.79
18
20
23
2.5
4xM5
6
Mounting axis % related to actuator.
Ø.39
.79
3.94
.79
20
100
20
Ø10
.24
6
Ø: 4 elongated holes Ø 5.3 x 7.3
2SHUDWLQJUDGLXVUHTXLUHGIRUDFWXDWRU
XCS Z01
XCS Z02
RR
RR
==
2708
20 0.70
7
20
00
00
3.35
85
RR
RR
==
=
7280
20 .070
.07
0
2708
0.70
20
00
00
3.35
85
85
8
=
728
0
2.28
58
85
58
2.28
58
58
XCS Z03
.65
2.17
55
16.5
0
.7
1
9
5. 50
9
15
40
=
22
=
R
.87
R
3.11
10
79
Dual Dimensions:
3.11
79
INCHES
Millimieters
R = minimum radius
Principle:
page 3/7
3/34
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/24
Dimensions:
page 3/34
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/35
Wiring diagrams
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, turret head, types XCSA, XCSB, XCSC
and XCSE
Functional diagrams
XCS p5ppp
XCS p7ppp
XCS p8ppp
Contact operation
1
G Contact closed
H Contact open
1.22
31
.91
1.22
.98
.98
25
.91
23
31
G Contact in transition
31
25
2
.91
23
21-22
.89
11-12
31-32
.83
21
.98
25
23
21-22
22.5
1.22
21-22
.87
13-14
.85
33-34
21.5
22
31-32
13-14
Dual Dimensions:
INCHES
Millimieters
3
Wiring diagrams Note: These diagrams are given as examples only, the designer must refer to the relevant safety standards for guidance
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1
,62
Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. contact and protection
fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contact, either by cable
damage or by tampering.
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62
Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the
associated control relays. To activate K1, it is necessary to remove and re-insert the actuating
key when the supply is switched on.
F1
F1
4
O
K1
33
21
K2
KM1
34
22
14
34
22
14
13
33
13
21
K1
5
(1)
O
I
K2
I
KM2
KM1
X
K1
K2
KM2
X
K1
K2
H1
M
(1) Signalling contact
6
M
H1: “actuating key not inserted” indicator
7
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62:LULQJPHWKRGXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWK3UHYHQWDŒVDIHW\PRGXOH
(The guard switch should be used in conjunction with a safety limit switch to give electrical/mechanical redundancy)
Method for machines with quick rundown time (low inertia)
Locking or interlocking device based on the principle of
redundancy and self-monitoring.
The safety modules ensure these functions.
Method for machines with long rundown time (high inertia)
8
XPS
VNE
XPS
Locking of actuating key and operation in positive mode
associated with a safety module.
9
XPS
Interlocking device for actuating key mounted on guard and zero speed detection.
10
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/24
Dimensions:
page 3/33
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/35
3/35
Wiring diagrams (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, turret head, type XCSE
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62
Wiring examples with protective fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contact, either by cable damage or by tampering.
1
/RFNLQJZLWKRXWSRZHU1&1212
XCSE53pp
/RFNLQJZLWKSRZHU1&1212
XCSE55pp
F1
F1
2
14
33
34
21
(2)
14
33
34
(1)
44
51
OG GN
X3
E1
X1
X1
O
5
X2
E2
43
X2
E2
43
OG GN
X3
E1
4
22
13
51
(1)
52
22
13
52
21
44
3
(2)
O
I
I
X
X
X
X
6
M
M
7
(1) Solenoid
(2) Auxiliary contact
E1-E2: Solenoid supply
43-44: Solenoid signalling contact
13-14: Safety contact, available for redundancy
33-X1: LED (orange): actuating key withdrawn
51-X1: LED (green): actuating key inserted and locked
21-52: Safety pre-wiring provided
(1) Solenoid
(2) Auxiliary contact
E1-E2: Solenoid supply
51-52: Solenoid signalling contact
13-14: Safety contact, available for redundancy
33-X1: LED (orange): actuating key withdrawn
43-X1: LED (green): actuating key inserted and locked
21-44: Safety pre-wiring provided
8
Note: These wiring diagrams are given as examples only, the designer must refer relevant safety standards for guidance.
9
10
Principle:
page 3/7
3/36
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/25
Dimensions:
page 3/33
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/36
Wiring diagrams (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Metal, turret head, type XCSE
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62
Wiring examples with redundancy for the switch contacts, without monitoring or redundancy in the power circuit
/RFNLQJZLWKRXWSRZHU1&1&12
XCSE73pp
1
/RFNLQJZLWKRXWSRZHU1&1&12
XCSE75pp
F1
F1
(1)
22
32
14
K1
I
KM1
E2 43
O
KM2
E1
X2
22
32
14
K2
X3
OG GN
X2
3
O
KM1
I
KM2
4
X1
X1
KM1
K1
K1
44 51
44 51
X3
OG GN
21
31
13
(1)
K2
E1
E2 43
(2)
52
21
31
13
52
(2)
2
F2
F2
K2
KM1
KM2
K1
K2
KM2
M
(1) Solenoid
(2) Auxiliary contact
E1-E2: Solenoid supply
43-44: Solenoid signalling contact
21-22 and 31-32: Safety contacts, available for redundancy
13-X1: LED (orange): actuating key withdrawn
51-X1: LED (green): actuating key inserted and locked
21-52: Safety pre-wiring provided
M
5
(1) Solenoid
(2) Auxiliary contact
E1-E2: Solenoid supply
51-52: Solenoid signalling contact
21-22 and 31-32: Safety contacts, available for redundancy
13-X1: LED (orange): actuating key withdrawn
43-X1: LED (green): actuating key inserted and locked
21-44: Safety pre-wiring provided
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/25
Dimensions:
page 3/33
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/36
3/37
Dimensions
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/
XCS Safety Interlock: Type XCSL Dimensions
Metal, turret head, type XCSL dimensions
XCSL%66%%
1
2.99
1.65
42
XCSL%64%%
2.99
1.65
76
1.38
42
1.38
35
35
1.38
1.38
35
35
4.89
4.89
2
76
124
124
0.24
7.64
7.64
6
194
194
1.38
2xØ 0.21
35
1.38
0.24
35
6
2xØ 0.21
5.3
3
5.3
2.36
2.36
60
60
(1)
(1)
1.18
=
1.32
1.73
Ø
=
33.5
1.58
1.73
40
44
1.18
=
1.32
30
33.5
1.58
Ø
=
30
40
44
4
5
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.21 x 0.29 (5.3 x 7.3)
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.21 x 0.29 (5.3 x 7.3)
(1) 1 tapped entry for 1/2” NPT conduit entry
(1) 1 tapped entry for 1/2” NPT conduit entry
Wiring Diagrams
:LULQJGLDJUDPH[DPSOHXVLQJDSROH1&1&12VDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFK
LED wiring
Shown with actuating key inserted
6
LED, 24 Vac
Recommended wiring diagram
Locking with and without power
LED, 110/120 Vac or 220/240 Vac
X3
21
22
X1
13
31
14
32
X3
21
22
7
X1
13
31
14
32
+ 24 V
X
0V
Contact Status Relative to Actuating Key Position
8
E1
22
21
32
31
14
13
X3
OG
10A
X1
Function Diagrams
1&1&12
1&1212
1.65
1.65
42
42
9
E2
1.5
1.5
38
38
21-22
21-22
N.C. + N.C. + N.O.
31-32
N.C. + N.O. + N.O.
13-14
33-34
13-14
Dual Dimensions:
10
INCHES
Millimieters
Contact closed (1)
Contact open (0)
Principle:
page 3/7
3/38
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/26
Dimensions:
page 3/38
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/38
Dimensions (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
0HWDO¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&6/
Actuating Keys for Metal, Turret Head, Type XCSL
Actuating Keys
ZCKY071
ZCKY081
1
ZCKY091
1.65
42
42
1.65
0.77
12
42
19.6
= =
1.65
0.47
1.58
0.2
0.2
0.1
5
2xØ 0.21
5
2.5
40
0.1
2
2.5
5.3
0.32
8
46
3.05
2.17
0.59
0.24
15
6
77.5
55
1.58
0.59
1.14
= =
15
1.58
40
2.01
0.33
29
1.18
40
30
3
51
8.3
2xØ 0.21
2xØ 0.21
=
1.81
75
=
2.96
5.3
5.3
ZCKY061
ZCKY101
10
7
4xØ 0.21
41
12
.39
4
0.28
1.62
0.47
5.3
1.65
1.89
42
48
1.58
1.02
40
26
1.54
39
1.77
.39
10
45
2xØ 0.21
0.49
5.3
4.53
2.52
115
64
5
0.28
7
12.5
0.24
1.30
3.05
33
77.5
0.99
5.51
Ø 0.43
140
11
6
1.26
0.79
32
20
6
25
4xØ M0.21
5.3
0.79
2xØ 0.21
20
5.3
3.94
0.79
100
20
0.71
18
0.24
6
2SHUDWLQJUDGLXVUHTXLUHGIRUDFWXDWLQJNH\
7
Horizontal mounting
ZCKY071
ZCKY081
ZCKY091
118.2
2.32
39.4
2.29
3000
59
1000
58
(1)
3.21
ZCKY101
5.91
2.80
150
71
81.5
(1)
(1)
8
Vertical mounting
ZCKY071
ZCKY081
98.5
1.65
42
2500
(1)
1.65
42
ZCKY061
ZCKY101
59.1
1.65
7.88
1500
42
200
(1)
2.48
63
9
(1)
10
(1) For mounting the actuating key on hinged guards (minimum radius)
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
Dual Dimensions:
References:
page 3/26
Dimensions:
page 3/38
INCHES
Millimieters
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/38
3/39
References,
characteristics
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
3ODVWLFGRXEOHLQVXODWHG¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&603
Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft (2, 5, or 10 m)
Type of switch
Without locking of actuating key
1
2
OG
OG/WH
OG
OG
OG/WH
OG/WH
OG
BN
BN/WH
OG/WH
BU
BU/WH
BU
BU/WH
BN
6
BN/WH
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
slow break (2)
6.6 ft (2m) cable (3)
BU
SROH1&1&12
break before make, slow break (2)
6.6 ft (2m) cable (3)
XCS MP79L2
BU/WH
5
2-pole N.C. + N.C.
slow break (2)
6.6 ft (2m) cable (3)
N.C. contact with positive opening operation) (1)
XCS MP59L2
BU
4
References of switches without actuating key (
SROH1&12
break before make, slow break (2)
6.6 ft (2m) cable (3)
BU/WH
3
Weight oz (kg)
XCS MP70L2
XCS MP80L2
3.880 (0.110)
Complementary characteristicsQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJHDQG
7
Actuation speed
Resistance to forcible withdrawal of actuating key
Connection
Maximum operating rate
Minimum force for extraction of key
Maximum: 59 in./s (1.5 m/s), minimum: 2 in./s (0.05 m/s)
1.8 lbs. (8 N)
Pre-cabled, 4 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) or 6 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2)
For maximum life: 1200 operating cycles per hour
1.8 lbs. (8 N)
References of actuating keys
Description
Straight key
Right-angled key
Pivoting key
For right-hand door
For left-hand door
8
9
For switches XCS MP
Weight oz (kg)
XCS Z81
0.529 (0.015)
XCS Z83
2.998 (0.085)
XCS Z85
2.998 (0.085)
Spare parts
Description
10
XCS Z84
0.882 (0.025)
Unit reference
Weight
oz (kg)
0.176
(0.005)
Blanking plugs
XCS Z29
(Sold in lots of 10)
(1) Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch
(2) Schematic diagrams shown represent the contact states while the operating key is inserted in the head of the switch.
(3). Part numbers shown have a 6.6 ft. (2 m) cable. Other cable lengths are available: replace the 2 at the end of the part number with 5 for a 16.4 ft. (5m) cable,
or with 10 for a 32.8 ft. (10 m) cable.
Example: XCSMP59L2 becomes XCSMP59L10 for a switch with a 32.8 ft. (10 m) long cable.
Principle:
page 3/7
3/40
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/40
Dimensions:
page 3/41
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/43
Dimensions
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
3ODVWLFGRXEOHLQVXODWHG¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&603
Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft (2, 5, or 10 m)
Dimensions
XCS MP
XCS Z81
1.18
.59
.04
.79
15
1
20
30
1.41
1.11
35.9
28.2
.55
.04
8.4
.53
.14
14
13.5
3.5
1
1
.33
1.38
2xØ.35
35
2xØ9
2xØ.17
2
2xØ4.3
.22
3.07
Ø.17
5.6
.14
2.44
3.5
62
78
Ø4.4
3
XCS Z84
2.28
58
.20
.55
5
2xØ.17
.35
14
2xØ4.3
9
2xØ.35
.14
2xØ9
3.5
1.34
.55
34
14
4
.46
11.6
(1)
(1) Ø 0.29 in (7.6 mm);
length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft (2, 5, or 10 m).
1.33
.33
33.8
8.4
5
XCS Z83
.14
=
3.5
.98
25
=
1.34
6
34
=
=
(1)
.59
15
.51
1.11
13
28.2
.33
8.4
7
(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.2 x 6.
XCS Z85
=
.14
3.5
8
.33
9
.98
=
25
1.34
34
=
=
(1)
.59
15
.51
1.11
13
28.2
8.4
(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4.2 x 6.
Dual Dimensions:
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/40
Dimensions:
page 3/41
INCHES
Millimieters
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/43
3/41
10
Dimensions,
Functional diagrams
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
3ODVWLFGRXEOHLQVXODWHG¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&603
Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft (2, 5, or 10 m)
2SHUDWLQJUDGLXVUHTXLUHGIRUNH\
1
XCS Z81
XCS Z84
1
0m
60.3m
60
6m
9.0m
230230
30 m
6.0 m
60
16 1
.6 m
306 m
30
93 9
16
=
=
R=
R=
R
R
2
2.63
66,8
2.63
66,8
66.8
66.8
1.43
36,4
1.43
36,4
36.4
36.4
XCS Z83
XCS Z85
R
R
=
=
50
43.8
43.8
4
501.
9
50m7
m
97 m
1. m
50
97 m
1. m0
50 5
1.72
43,8
1.72
43,8
43.8
43.8
R
=
5
=
501.
97
50mm
1.72
43,8
1.72
43,8
R
3
Functional diagrams
XCS MP59p
XCS MP79p
XCS MP70p
XCS MP80p
6
1.11
28.2
0.22
5.5
7
8
1.11
0.20
0.20
5.2
5.2
5.5
1.11
1.11
28.2
28.2
0.20
5.2
BU-BU/WH
BN-BN/WH
OG-OG/WH
BU-BU/WH
OG-OG/WH
BU-BU/WH
OG-OG/WH
Contact operation
28.2
0.22
Contact closed
Contact open
0.20
5.2
BU-BU/WH
BN-BN/WH
OG-OG/WH
Dual Dimensions:
INCHES
Millimieters
9
10
Principle:
page 3/7
3/42
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/40
Dimensions:
page 3/41
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/43
Wiring diagrams
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
3ODVWLFGRXEOHLQVXODWHG¿[HGKHDGW\SH;&603
Pre-cabled, length 6.6, 16.4, or 32.8 ft (2, 5, or 10 m)
Wiring diagrams
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1
,62
Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. contact and protective
fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contact, either by cable
damage or by tampering.
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62
1
Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the
associated control relays.
Actuating key withdrawal and re-insertion necessary on power-up, in order to activate K1.
F1
F1
O
BU
K2
BU/WH
OG
OG/WH
2
K1
OG
BN
BN/WH
K1
OG/WH
BU
BU/WH
(1)
KM1
I
O
K2
K1
KM1
K1
I
3
KM2
K2
KM2
K1
K1
K2
4
M
M
(1) Signalling contact
5
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62:LULQJPHWKRGXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWK3UHYHQWDŒVDIHW\UHOD\
WKHNH\HGVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKLVJHQHUDOO\XVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKDVDIHW\OLPLWVZLWFK
Method for machines with quick rundown time (low inertia)
Locking or interlocking mechanism uses the principles of redundancy and autocheck.
The safety relays help to ensure these functions.
6
XCS MP
7
XCS M
8
XPS
Locking by actuating key and actuation in positive mode associated with a safety relay module
9
10
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/40
Dimensions:
page 3/41
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/43
3/43
References,
characteristics
Safety detection solution
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Plastic, turret head (1), types XCSPA,
XCSTA and XCSTE
Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT
Type of switch
Without locking of actuator
1
21
13
14
13
22
21
33
13
31
14
34
21
22
11
22
13
14
12
21
22
31
32
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.C. (2)
slow break
21
SROH1&1&12 (2)
(N.O. staggered)
slow break
32
4
22
SROH1&1212 (2)
(2 N.O. staggered)
slow break
21
2-pole N.C. + N.C. (2)
slow break
11
3
22
SROH121& (2)
make before break
slow break
14
References of switches without actuating key (
SROH1&12 (2)
break before make
slow break
12
2
Weight oz (kg)
5
6
N.C. contact with positive opening operation)
XCSPA593
–
XCSPA693
–
XCSPA793
–
–
XCSTA593
–
XCSTA793
–
XCSTA893
3.880 (0.110)
5.644 (0.160)
Complementary characteristics not shown under General characteristics SDJHVDQG
Actuation speed
Maximum: .19.6 in./s(0.5 m/s), minimum: 0.39 in./s (0.01 m/s)
Resistance to forcible withdrawal of actuator
XCSPA, XCSTA: 2.3 lbs (10 N) (11.3 lbs (50 N) using actuators XCSZ12 or XCSZ13 together
with guard retaining device XCSZ21)
XCSTE: 112 lbs (500 N)
Maximum operating rate
For maximum life: 600 operating cycles per hour
Minimum force for positive opening
3.4 lbs (15 N)
Cable entry
XCSPA: 1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit.
XCSTEHQWU\WDSSHGPPDQG¿WWHGZLWKPHWDODGDSWRU'(5$IRU” NPT
(USAS B2-1) conduit.
XCSTAHQWULHVWDSSHGPP¿WWHGZLWKPHWDODGDSWRU'(5$IRU” NPT
(USAS B2-1) conduit. 6HFRQGHQWU\¿WWHGZLWKEODQNLQJSOXJ
Materials
Body: zamak. Head: zamak. Safety screws: 5-lobe torque. Protective plate: steel.
XCSZ91
Description
DF523736
7
809927
References of accessories
XCSZ200
8
For use with
Unit reference
Weight
oz (kg)
Blanking plugs for operating head slot
(Sold in lots of 10)
XCSPA,
XCSTA, XCSTE
XCSZ28
1.764
(0.050)
Tool for forced opening of interlocking
device (Sold in lots of 10)
XCSTE
XCSZ100
1.764
(0.050)
Padlocking device
to prevent insertion of actuator, for up to
3 padlocks (padlocks not included)
XCSPA,
XCSTA, XCSTE
XCSZ91
1.870
(0.053)
Actuator centering device (3)
(Mounting screws included)
XCSPA,
XCSTA, XCSTE
XCSZ200
0.776
(0.022)
(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch.
(2) Wiring diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is inserted in the head of the switch.
(3) Do not use with XCSZ91.
9
The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2" NPT (using the supplied adaptor on the XCSTA), and are available with metric conduit:
b To order devices tapped for 11 mm cable gland, conforming to NFC 68-300 (DIN Pg 11): Change the last character in the part number to 1.
For example: XCSPA593 is changed to XCSPA591
b To order devices tapped for M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland: Change the last character in the part number to 2. For example: XCSPA593 is changed to XCSPA592
10
Principle:
page 3/7
3/44
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/44
Dimensions:
page 3/46
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/48
References,
characteristics (continued)
Type of switch
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Plastic, turret head (1), types XCSPA,
XCSTA and XCSTE
Conduit entries tapped for 1/2” NPT
With interlocking, locking by solenoid
1
Type of interlocking
Locking without power and unlocking on energization of solenoid (2).
To order a guard switch with locking with power and unlocking on de-energization of the
solenoid, replace the 2nd number (3) by 5 in the references shown below.
Example: XCSTE5313 becomes XCSTE5513.
Supply voltage of solenoid
a or c 24 V
(50/60 Hz on a)
21
13
14
13
22
21
21
22
11
22
2-pole N.C. + N.C. (3)
slow break
12
SROH121& (3)
make before break
slow break
14
References of switches without actuating key (
SROH1&12 (3)
break before make
slow break
Weight oz (kg)
a or c 120 V
(50/60 Hz on a)
2
a or c 230 V
(50/60 Hz on a)
N.C. contact with positive opening operation)
XCSTE5313
XCSTE5333
XCSTE5343
XCSTE6313
XCSTE6333
XCSTE6343
XCSTE7313
XCSTE7333
XCSTE7343
3
4
12.7 (0.360)
12.7 (0.360)
12.7 (0.360)
a or c 120 V
a or c 230 V
Solenoid characteristics
Load factor
100 %
Rated operational voltage
a or c 24 V
Voltage limits
- 20%, + 10% of the rated operational voltage (including ripple on c)
conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1
Service life
20,000 hours
Power power consumption
10 VA max.
5
References of actuating keys and guard retaining device
6
Description
Straight actuator Actuator with wide mounting
(5)
Pivoting
actuator
Right-angled Guard retaining
actuator
device (4)
For interlock switches XCSPA, TA, TE
XCSZ11
XCSZ12
XCSZ15
XCSZ13
XCSZ14
XCSZ21
Weight oz (kg)
0.5 (0.015)
0.5 (0.015)
0.4 (0.012)
3.0 (0.085)
0.9 (0.025)
2.8 (0.080)
(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Blanking plug for operating head slot included with switch.
(2) A special tool included with the guard switch enables forced opening of the interlocking mechanism, by authorized personnel, allowing withdrawal of the
actuating key and subsequent opening of the N.C. safety contacts.
(3) Wiring diagrams shown represent the contact states while the actuating key is inserted in the head of the switch.
(4) Only for use with guard interlock switches XCSPA and XCSTA (without the actuator centering device XCSZ200), used in conjunction with actuators XCSZ12,
XCSZ13 or XCSZ15.
(5) 2 actuator lengths, XCSZ12: L = 1.57 in (40 mm), XCSZ15: L = 1.14 in (29 mm).
7
8
The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2" NPT (using the supplied adaptor on the XCSTA), and are available with metric conduit:
b To order devices tapped for 11 mm cable gland, conforming to NFC 68-300 (DIN Pg 11): Change the last character in the part number to 1.
For example: XCSTE5313 is changed to XCSTE5311
b To order devices tapped for M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland: Change the last character in the part number to 2. For example: XCSTE5313 is changed to XCSTE5312.
9
10
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/44
Dimensions:
page 3/46
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/48
3/45
Dimensions
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Plastic, turret head, types XCSPA,
XCSTA and XCSTE
Dimensions
1
XCSPAp91, XCSPAp92
XCSPAp93
0.28
7
0.28
1.18
30
1.18
30
2
1.18
30
7
1.18
30
1.54
1.34
39
34
1.54
1.34
39
34
3.68
93.5
3.68
93.5
0.53
3
13.5
0.79/0.87
0.79/0.87
20/22
(1)
0.52
=
=
1.18
4
1.18
30
XCSTAp9p
INCHES
Dual Dimensions:
1.18
30
(1) 1 tapped entry for cable gland
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm)
centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers
20/22
=
13.2
(1)
1.18
30
=
0.52
13.2
Millimieters
30
(1) 1 tapped entry for 1/2" NPT conduit
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm)
centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers
XCSTEpppp
0.28
5
7
0.28
1.18
7
30
0.59
1.18
15
30
1.34
1.54
(3)
34
39
1.70
1.50
43
38
6
3.68
4.51
93.5
114.5
0.49
12.5
7
14.5
20/22
0.49
(1)
0.57
0.79/0.87
(1)
1.59
1.18
0.16
4
4.33
110
40.3
30
40
20/22
33
12.5
1.57
0.79/0.87
1.30
2.05
52
8
(1) 2 tapped entries for cable gland or 1/2" NPT conduit adaptor
(2) 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm)
centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers
(3) 2 elongated holes Ø 0.21 x 0.52 in (5.3 x 13.3 mm)
137FRQGXLWDGDSWRU
M16 x 1.5 adaptor
Actuator centering device
DE9 RA1012
DE9 RA1016
XCSZ200
0.83
0.51
(1)
21
9
(1) 1 tapped entry for cable gland or 1/2" NPT conduit adaptor
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm)
centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers
13
0.71
0.94
26
17.4
0.25
24
1.18
(1) Tapped entry for 1/2" NPT conduit
(2) Pg 11 threaded shank
(1) M16 x 1.5 tapped entry
(2) Pg 11 threaded shank
18
0.16
4
0.23
0.69
1.02
0.22
5.8
6.4
1.39
5.5
35.35
29.85
0.25
2 x Ø 0.22
6.4
2 x Ø 5.5
0.69
17.4
10
1.18
29.85
2 x Ø 0.12
2xØ3
Dual Dimensions:
Principle:
page 3/7
3/46
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/44
Dimensions:
page 3/46
INCHES
Millimieters
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/48
Dimensions (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Plastic, turret head, types XCSPA,
XCSTA and XCSTE
Dimensions (continued)
XCSZ11
XCSZ12, XCSZ15
Adaptor shank (1)
1
0.43
11
2.56
0.87
0.19
L
2
==
5
0.87
0.08
6
0.20
37
2
22
4.7
1.02
=
22
0.24
1.46
0.08
65
0.51
26
13
0.47
0.59
0.47
12
0.51
1.57
12
15
2
2.17
13
40
0.19
0.59
55
4.7
=
15
(1) Adaptor (included with actuating key XCSZ11) for replacing, without drilling
additional mounting hole, an XCK T with actuating key XCK Y01 by a safety
interlock switch XCSTA with actuating key XCSZ11.
Ø a: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.19 x 0.39 in (4.7 x 10 mm)
Ø b: 1 elongated hole for M4 or M4.5 screw
XCSZ13
0.08
2
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.19 x 0.39 in (4.7 x 10 mm)
L = 1.57 in (40 mm) (XCSZ12) or 1.14 in (29 mm) (XCSZ15)
XCSZ14
0.47
3
1.67
12
42.5
2.05
0.08
0.59
52
15
2
0.24
1.06
1.67
0.20
6
27
=
0.19
13
1.02
4.7
1.38
26
2.17
35
4
2
22
0.51
42.5
0.08
0.87
5
0.47
0.51
55
12
13
1.02
=
26
5
0.91
23
1.26
1.12
32
28.5
2.60
66
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.19 x 0.39 in (4.7 x 10 mm)
Ø: 1 elongated hole Ø 0.19 x 0.39 in (4.7 x 10 mm)
2SHUDWLQJUDGLXVUHTXLUHGIRUDFWXDWRU
XCSZ11
6
XCSZ12, XCSZ15
471200
.24
06
591.500
6
.0 0
59150
4
.2 0
47120
=
2.80
71
R=
=
R=
R
R
2.80
7
d
71
d
8
d = 1.81 in (46 mm) (XCSZ12) or 1.38 in (35 mm) (XCSZ15)
XCSZ14
XCSZ13
R=
06
591.500
.24
471200
R=
1
.8
11 300
91
5. 150
=
=
R
R
9
1.89
2.83
72
10
48
2.83
1.89
72
48
R = minimum radius
Principle:
page 3/7
Dual Dimensions:
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/44
Dimensions:
page 3/46
INCHES
Millimieters
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/48
3/47
Setting-up,
Wiring diagrams
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Plastic, turret head, types XCSPA,
XCSTA and XCSTE
Setting-up
1
2
Functional diagrams
XCSPA5pp,
XCSTE5ppp
XCSPA6pp,
XCSTE6ppp
XCSPA7pp,
XCSTE7ppp
XCSTA5pp,
XCSTA7pp,
0.94
0.94
0.94
0.94
0.94
24
0.73
0.67
18.5
24
0.59
17
0.67
17
15
0.63
3
0.67
18.5
0.73
17.5
0.67
16
0.73
17
21-22
21-22
0.69
24
Contact operation
G Contact closed
H Contact open
Setting-up
0.67
24
0.75
19
0.75
0.67
19
17
17
21-22
31-32
21-22
11-12
21-22
0.75
18.5
17
13-14
24
0.63
19
16
13-14
0.69
0.63
13-14
33-34
17.5
16
13-14
Dual Dimensions:
G Contacts in transition
INCHES
Millimieters
Wiring diagrams Note: These wiring diagrams are given as examples only, the designer must refer to the relevant safety
standards for guidance
Functional diagrams
XCSTA8pp
Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. contact and protection
fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contact, either by cable
damage or by tampering.
0.94
24
Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. contact with mixed redundancy
of the contacts and the associated control relays. To activate K1,
it is necessary to remove and re-insert the actuator when the
supply is switched on.
F1
O
17
Contact operation
G Contact closed
H Contact open
G Contact in transition
K1
21
13
(1)
K2
KM1
22
33
K1
14
13
34
11-12
21-22
14
16.5
31-32
6
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1
,62
F1
0.67
21
5
0.65
22
4
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1
,62
I
O
K2
KM2
KM1
X
I
K1
K2
KM2
X
7
K1
K2
M
M
(1) Signalling contact
8
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62
:LULQJPHWKRGXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKVDIHW\UHOD\PRGXOH
(The guard interlock switch should be used in conjunction with a safety limit switch to give electrical/mechanical redundancy)
Method for machines with quick rundown time (low inertia)
Locking or interlocking device based on the principle of redundancy and self-monitoring.
Method for machines with long rundown time (high inertia)
9
XPS
XPS
VNE
XPS
10
Locking of actuator and operation in positive mode associated with a safety relay module.
Principle:
page 3/7
3/48
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/44
,QWHUORFNLQJGHYLFHIRUDFWXDWRU¿WWHGRQJXDUGDQG]HURVSHHG
detection.
Dimensions:
page 3/46
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/48
Wiring diagrams (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches, actuator operated
Plastic, turret head, type XCSTE
Wiring diagrams (continued)
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62
Wiring examples with protection fuse to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contact, either by cable damage or by tampering
Locking without power
1&12
XCSTE53pp
Locking with power
1&12
XCSTE55pp
F1
F1
2
(1)
(1)
(2)
E1
E2
1
(32)
21
22
13
14
(2)
E1
31 33
E2
31
(34)
21
22
13
14
3
33
4
O
O
I
X
I
X
M
M
X
X
(1) Solenoid
(2) Auxiliary contact
E1-E2: Solenoid supply
13-14: Safety contact, available for redundancy or signalling
(1) Solenoid
(2) Auxiliary contact
E1-E2: Solenoid supply
13-14: Safety contact, available for redundancy or signalling
5
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62
Wiring examples with redundancy for the guard switch contacts, without monitoring
Locking without power
N.C. + N.C.
XCSTE73pp
Locking with power
N.C. + N.C.
XCSTE75pp
F1
6
F1
F2
F2
(1)
K2
K2
(2) (34)
21
22
11
12
O
(2)
(32)
21
22
11
12
O
E2 31
33
E1
I
E2
31 33
I
KM2
KM2
KM1
KM1
KM2
KM2
M
M
K1
K1
K2
(1) Solenoid
(2) Solenoid auxiliary contact
E1-E2: Solenoid supply
11-12: Safety contact, available for redundancy
Principle:
page 3/7
Characteristics:
page 3/22
8
KM1
KM1
E1
7
K1
K1
(1)
K2
(1) Solenoid
(2) Solenoid auxiliary contact
E1-E2: Solenoid supply
11-12: Safety contact, available for redundancy
References:
page 3/45
Dimensions:
page 3/46
9
10
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/49
3/49
Presentation
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches with lever
or shaft operator
Plastic, double insulated, turret head,
types XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR and XCSTR
XCSPL with 1 conduit entry
:LWKURWDU\RSHUDWLQJKHDGZLWKHOERZHGOHYHUÀXVKZLWKUHDURIVZLWFKRU
straight lever, for hinged covers and guards
1
2
Page 3/52
3
XCSPR with 1 conduit entry
With rotary operating head, with rotary shaft, for hinged covers and guards
4
5
Page 3/52
XCSTL with 2 conduit entries
:LWKURWDU\RSHUDWLQJKHDGZLWKHOERZHGOHYHUÀXVKZLWKUHDURIVZLWFKRU
straight lever, for hinged covers and guards
6
7
8
Page 3/52
XCSTR with 2 conduit entries
With rotary operating head, with rotary shaft, for hinged covers and guards
9
10
Page 3/52
3/50
Characteristics
Safety detection solutions
Safety interlock switches with lever
or shaft operator
Plastic, double insulated, turret head,
types XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR and XCSTR
Environment characteristics
Conformity to standards
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV
Protective treatment
Ambient air temperature
Products
Machine assemblies
For operation
For storage
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Electric shock protection
Degree of protection
Cable entry
Materials
EN/IEC 60947-5-1, EN/IEC 60947-5-4, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
EN/IEC 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/ISO 12100
UL, CSA, BG
Standard version: “TC” and “TH”
-13…+158 °F (- 25…+70 °C)
-40…+158 °F (- 40…+70 °C)
50 gn (10…500 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
50 gn (duration 11 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Class 2 conforming to IEC 60536
,3FRQIRUPLQJWR,(&
Depending on model, either: 1 tapped entry for n° 11 (Pg 11) cable gland, tapped M16 x 1.5 or
tapped 1/2" NPT
3RO\DPLGH3$¿EHUJODVVLPSUHJQDWHGFDVH
Stainless steel lever and mountings
2 and 3 contact versions
slow break
Rated insulation voltage
2 and 3 contact versions
Rated impulse withstand voltage
2 and 3 contact versions
Positive operation
2
3
Contact block characteristics
Rated operational characteristics
1
XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR, XCSTR: a AC-15, A300: Ue = 240 V, Ie = 3 A or Ue = 120 V,
Ie = 6 A
All models: c DC-13, Q300: Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.27 A or Ue = 125 V, Ie = 0.55 A
conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR, XCSTR :
Ui = 500 V conforming to IEC/EN 60947-1
Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR, XCSTR:
Uimp = 6 kV conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
4
N.C. contacts with positive opening operation conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 Section 3
y 30 m1 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-4
Resistance across terminals
Short-circuit protection
2 and 3 contact versions
Connection
2 contact version
Minimum actuation speed
3 contact version
XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR, XCSTR:
10 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl)
XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR, XCSTR:
Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 21 AWG (0.5 mm2), max: 2 x 15 AWG (1.5 mm2) with or without
cable end
0.39 in./s (0.01 m/s)
5
Electrical life
Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix C.
Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13.
Maximum operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour.
Load factor: 0.5
6
Millions of operating cycles
2 and 3 slow break contact versions
a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz
o inductive circuit
5
4
3
Ithe
230 V
2
12/24/48 V
7
110 V
1
0,5
0,2
0,1
0,5
1
2
3 4 5
10
Current in A
8
d.c. supply c
Power broken in W for 1 million operating cycles
Voltage
o
V
W
24
13
48
9
120
7
Electrical Life
The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual
operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they
create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the
limited warranty offered on this product please refer to the Square D ® terms and conditions of
sale found in the Square D ® Digest.
9
10
3/51
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
References,
characteristics
Safety interlock switches with lever or shaft operator
Plastic, double insulated, turret head,
types XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR and XCSTR
Conduit entries tapped 1/2” NPT
Type
(OERZHGOHYHUÀXVKZLWKUHDURIVZLWFK
6WUDLJKWOHYHU
6SLQGOH
To left
To right
To right OR
to left
Centered
Length 1.18 in
(30 mm) (2)
1
2
2SHUDWRU
13
21
XCSPL553
XCSPR553
XCSPL793
XCSPL783
XCSPL773
XCSPL763
XCSPL753
XCSPR753
:HLJKWR]NJ
3.351 (0.095)
3.351 (0.095)
3.351 (0.095)
3.351 (0.095)
3.351 (0.095)
3.704 (0.105)
2SHUDWRU
To left
Centered
To right
To right OR
to left
Centered
Length 1.18 in
(30 mm) (2)
2-pole N.C. + N.C.
slow break
4
22
XCSPL563
21
XCSPL573
11
XCSPL583
12
XCSPL593
22
3
1&FRQWDFWZLWKSRVLWLYHRSHQLQJRSHUDWLRQ
2-pole N.C. + N.O.
break before make
slow break
14
5HIHUHQFHV(
Centered
5
:HLJKWR]NJ
8
33
34
31
13
13
14
21
31
32
14
21
22
32
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.C.
slow break
21
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O.
(N.O. staggered)
slow break
11
7
22
1&FRQWDFWZLWKSRVLWLYHRSHQLQJRSHUDWLRQ
12
5HIHUHQFHV(
3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O.
(2 N.O. staggered)
slow break
22
6
–
XCSTL583
–
XCSTL563
XCSTL553
XCSTR553
XCSTL793
XCSTL783
XCSTL773
XCSTL763
XCSTL753
XCSTR753
–
XCSTL883
XCSTL873
XCSTL863
–
XCSTR853
5.115 (0.145)
5.115 (0.145)
5.115 (0.145)
5.115 (0.145)
5.115 (0.145)
5.467 (0.155)
&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHU*HQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJHVDQG
7ULSSLQJDQJOH
5°
0HFKDQLFDOOLIH
PLOOLRQRSHUDWLQJF\FOHV
0LQLPXPWRUTXH
For tripping: 0.07 lb-ft; for positive opening: 0.18 lb-ft (XCSPL and XCSPR),
0.33 lb-ft (XCSTL and XCSTR)
XCSPp: 1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT conduit
XCSTp: 2 entries tapped for n° 11 cable gland conforming to NF C 68-300 (DIN Pg 11).
with one DE9RA1012 conduit adaptor for 1/2” NPT
&DEOHHQWU\
9
(1) Head adjustable in 90° steps throughout 360°. Switches supplied with 2 additional self-locking screws for positive mounting of the head.
(2) For switches with 3.15 in. (80 mm) spindle: replace the 2nd number in the reference (5) by 6. Example: XCSPR553 becomes XCSPR563.. The weight increases
by 1.1 oz. (0.032 kg.)
10
The devices listed above are threaded for 1/2" NPT, (using the supplied adaptor on the XCST) and are available with metric conduit:
b To order devices tapped for 11 mm cable gland, conforming to NFC 68-300 (DIN Pg 11): Change the last character in the part number to 1.
For example: XCSPL593 is changed to XCSPL591.
b To order devices tapped for M16 x 1.5 for ISO cable gland: Change the last character in the part number to 2.For example: XCSPL593 is changed to XCSPL592.
Principle:
page 3/7
3/52
Characteristics:
page 3/22
References:
page 3/52
Dimensions:
page 3/53
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/53
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Operation,
dimensions,
wiring diagrams
Safety interlock switches with lever or shaft operator
Plastic, double insulated, turret head,
types XCSPL, XCSTL, XCSPR and XCSTR
Conduit entries tapped for 1/2” NPT conduit
2SHUDWLRQ
2SHUDWRUGLVSODFHPHQW
XCSPLp93, PLp73,
PLp63
XCSPLp83, PLp53
XCSTLp93, TLp73,
TLp63
XCSTLp83, TLp53
XCSPRp53
XCSTRp53
XCSTL583, TL553
XCSPR553
XCSTR553
1
or
or
)XQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV
XCSPL593, PL573,
PL563
-5˚+5˚
-90˚ 0 +90˚
180˚
XCSTL563
5˚
0
180˚
21-22
13-14
21-22
13-14
XCSPL793, PL773,
PL763
180°
-5°+5°
0 +90°
-90°
11-12
21-22
XCSTL793, TL773,
TL763
5˚
0
XCSTL783, TL753
-90˚
180˚
11-12
21-22
-5˚ +5˚
0 +90˚
XCSTL873, TL863
G contact closed
H contact open
5°
0
180°
XCSPR753
-270°
XCSTL883, TL853
10˚
4
-5°+5°
-270° 0 +270°
11-12
21-22
31-32
11-12
21-22
31-32
:LULQJGLDJUDPV
XCSTLpp3
&DWHJRU\WR(1,62
70
0.10
16
0.10
2.5
0.21
2.5
2.85
72.5
1.69
5.3
2.5
4.27
(3)
108,35
1.30
1.10
(2)
0.49
0.92
33
28
33
28
72.5
70
21
2.85
2.76
1.30
1.10
22
43
5.3
12.5
23.35
0.53
13.5
0.92
(1)
23.35
12.5
0.79/0.87
13.2
20/22
30
30
30
(1) 1 tapped entry for 1/2” NPT conduit
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm)
on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3
mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers
INCHES
M4
0.47
32.1
0.31
5
M4
28
1.10
2x
41.75
0.13
3.79
0.51
0.87
2x
0.13
0.33
8.5
0.51
13
0.87
(3)
22
4.61
117
0.49
0.33
96.25
K2
12.5
8.5
0.53
13.5
13
41.75
K1
(2)
K1
22
0.49
(1)
0.52
0.79/0.87
13.2
20/22
12.5
1.18
1.18
30
0.79/0.87
20/22
1.59
40.3
2.05
52
30
(1) 1 tapped entry for 1/2” NPT conduit
Ø: 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm)
on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3
mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers
L = 1.18 in (30 mm) (XCSPRp53)
or 3.15 in (80 mm) (XCSPRp63)
Principle:
page 3/7
I
1.64
Characteristics:
page 3/22
(1) 2 tapped entries for n° 11 cable gland
(2) 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3
mm) on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17
in (4.3 mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers
(3) 2 elongated holes Ø 0.21 x 0.52 in (5.3 x 13.3 mm)
L = 1.18 in (30 mm) (XCSTRp53)
or 3.15 in (80 mm) (XCSTRp63)
References:
page 3/52
K2
K2
8
KM1
1.10
5
1.64
K1
K2
0.31
0.20
1.26
KM2
KM1
H1
M
KM2
To activate K1, the lever or spindle must be rotated
when the supply is switched on. H1: “lever or
spindle displaced from initial position” indicator.
When used in conjunction with an XPSsafety relay
module and another safety switch, the rotary lever
or spindle operator guard switch can provide a
category 3 or 4 control and monitoring system for
moving guards to EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1.
Dimensions:
page 3/53
7
O
13
0.47
28
30
F1
K1
L
0.20
1.18
([DPSOHZLWKSROH1&1212FRQWDFW
ZLWKPL[HGUHGXQGDQF\RIWKHFRQWDFWVDQGWKH
DVVRFLDWHGFRQWUROUHOD\V
(1) 2 tapped entries for n° 11 cable gland
(2) 2 elongated holes Ø 0.17 x 0.33 in (4.3 x 8.3 mm)
on 0.87 in (22 mm) centers, 2 holes Ø 0.17 in (4.3
mm) on 0.79 in (20 mm) centers
(3) 22 elongated holes Ø 0.21 x 0.52 in (5.3 x 13.3 mm)
30
(1)
&DWHJRU\WR(1,62
Millimieters
XCSTRpp3
1.18
M
X
14
XCSPRpp3
X
52
Dual Dimensions:
1.18
1.18
I
0.79/0.87
20/22
1.59
40.3
2.05
0.49
1.18
0.52
6
O
3.44
87.5
5
F1
43
1.69
0.21
33
0.10
([DPSOHZLWKFDEOHVKRUWFLUFXLWSURWHFWLRQ
IXVH
34
27.4
16
13
27.4
0.63
1.08
0.63
2.76
14
1.08
32.1
21-22
31-32
13-14
XCSTR853
-5°+5°
0 +90°
-90°
3
+5˚ -5˚
0 +270˚
10˚
11-12
21-22
31-32
XCSPLpp3
1.26
-270˚
11-12
21-22
'LPHQVLRQV
(1)
XCSTR753
+5° -5°
0 +270°
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
10˚
&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ
10˚
21
5°
0
XCSPL783, PL753
21-22
13-14
33-34
21-22
13-14
10˚
10˚
10˚
2
+5˚+5˚
-5˚
+270˚
-270˚ 0 +270˚
-5˚+5˚
-270˚ 0 +270˚
21-22
13-14
33-34
21-22
13-14
33-34
10˚
10˚
-5˚+5˚
-90˚ 0 +90˚
22
5˚
0
XCSPL583, PL553
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/53
3/53
9
10
Presentation
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic
XCSDMC
5HFWDQJXODUFRPSDFW[[LQ[[PP
3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
1
&RQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ
2
3
3/56 and 3/57
XCSDMP
5HFWDQJXODUVWDQGDUG[[LQ[[PP
3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
4
&RQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ
5
6
3/56 and 3/57
7
XCSDMR
&\OLQGULFDOGLDPHWHULQPPOHQJWKLQPP
3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
8
9
3/56 and 3/57
10
3/54
&RQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Characteristics
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic
(QYLURQPHQW
&RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV
Products
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22 2 n° 14
Machine assemblies
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN/ISO 12100, EN 1088/ISO 14119 (XCSDMp5pp only)
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV
UL-CSA, BG
3URWHFWLYHWUHDWPHQW
Standard version: “TH”
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
For operation
ƒ)ƒ&
-13…+185 (- 25…+ 85)
For storage
ƒ)ƒ&
-40…+185 (- 40…+ 85)
2
9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH
10 gn (10…150 Hz) conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH
30 gn (11 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-7
6HQVLWLYLW\WRPDJQHWLF¿HOGV
mT
(OHFWULFVKRFNSURWHFWLRQ
1
3
* 0.3
Class II conforming to IEC 60536
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
Conforming to
IEC 60529
IP 66 and IP 67 for non-contact safety interlock switches with pre-cabled connection
IP 67 for non-contact safety interlock switches with connector on pigtail connection
Thermoplastic case (PBT)
PVC cable (ROHS)
0DWHULDOV
&RQWDFWEORFNFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
Ue: c 24 V, Ie: 100 mA max.
5DWHGLQVXODWLRQYROWDJH(Ui)
Ui: c 100 V
5DWHGLPSXOVHZLWKVWDQGYROWDJH(U imp)
5HVLVWDQFHDFURVVWHUPLQDOV
N9
2.5 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1
Contact with LED
1
57
Contact without LED
1
10
5
3URWHFWLRQ(not using safety module)
External cartridge fuse: 500 mA gG (gl)
&RQQHFWLRQ
&RQWDFWPDWHULDO
Pre-cabled, 4 x 22 AWG, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model
or M8 connector on 5.95 in. (0.15 m) pigtail
Pre-cabled, 4 x 22 AWG, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model
or M12 connector on 5.95 in. (0.15 m) pigtail
Pre-cabled, 6 x 22 AWG, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model
or M12 connector on 5.95 in. (0.15 m) pigtail
Pre-cabled, 4 x 22 AWG, length: 2, 5 or 10 m depending on model
or M12 connector on 5.95 in. (0.15 m) pigtail
Rhodium
(OHFWULFDOOLIH
1.2 million operating cycles
XCSDMC
XCSDMP 2 contact model
3 contact model
XCSDMR
V
c 100
Contact with LED
mA
5…100
Contact without LED
mA
0.1…100
MW
1000
Contact with LED
VA
3
Contact without LED
VA
10
+]
150
0D[LPXPVZLWFKLQJYROWDJH
6ZLWFKLQJFDSDFLW\
,QVXODWLRQUHVLVWDQFH
0D[LPXPEUHDNLQJFDSDFLW\
0D[LPXPVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\
4
6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
Page 3/55
References:
Page 3/56
Accessories:
Page 3/58
Dimensions:
Page 3/60
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/61
3/55
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
References,
characteristics
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic, pre-cabled
5HFWDQJXODU
Type
Compact
2.01 x 0.63 x 0.28 in
(51 x 16 x 7 mm)
1
&\OLQGULFDO
Standard
3.46 x 0.98 x 0.51 in
(88 x 25 x 13 mm)
Diameter: 1.18 in (30 mm)
Length: 1.51 in (38.5 mm)
2
3
5HIHUHQFHVRIVZLWFKHV(1)PXVWEHXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWK;36VDIHW\UHOD\PRGXOHVVHHSDJHVWR
8
9
BN
XCSDMC7902
XCSDMP7902
XCSDMR7902
–
XCSDMP5002
–
–
XCSDMP7002
–
XCSDMC5912
XCSDMP5912
XCSDMR5912
XCSDMC7912
XCSDMP7912
XCSDMR7912
–
XCSDMP5012
–
–
XCSDMP7012
–
BN BU
XCSDMR5902
WH BK
BN BU
WH PK
BN BK
BU
BU
BU
BN
+
BN
+
Weight oz (kg)
3.563 (0.101)
6.349 (0.180)
5.150 (0.146)
(1) Magnetic switch + coded magnet (XCSZCpppp).
Switch pre-cabled with 6.6 ft.(2m) long cable. For other cable lengths, replace the last number of the reference (2) by 5 for a 16.4 ft. (5 m) long cable or by 10 for a
32.8 ft. (10 m) long cable.
Example: XCSDMC5902 rectangular, compact switch with N.C. + N.O. contacts and 10 m cable becomes XCSDMC59010.
(2) Only to be wired in conjunction with an XPSAF module (see pages 3/63 and 3/65).
(3) The green LED is lit when the coded magnet is positioned in front of the switch (guard closed).
·N.O. contact PK-GY is to be used as an indicator of the device state, typically to a PLC. It is not to be used for the safety function.
&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHU*HQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH
2SHUDWLQJ]RQH
Sao: 0.20 in (5 mm)
Sar: 0.59 in. (15 mm)
3 directions
$SSURDFKGLUHFWLRQV
10
BN BU
GY PK
3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2) (3)
(1 N.O. staggered)
With LED
BK
7
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (3)
(1 N.C. staggered)
With LED
XCSDMP5902
+
WH BU
2-pole N.O. + N.O. (2) (3)
(1 N.O. staggered)
With LED
+
GY BK
2-pole N.C. + N.O. (3)
(N.C. staggered)
With LED
WH BK
3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2)
(1 N.O. staggered)
6
WH BK
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O.
(1 N.C. staggered)
GY PK
5
GY BK
2-pole N.O. + N.O. (2)
(1 N.O. staggered)
XCSDMC5902
BN
WH BK
2-pole N.C. + N.O.
(N.C. staggered)
PK
4
WH BU
WH
&RQWDFWVWDWHVVKRZQDUHZLWKWKHPDJQHWSRVLWLRQHGLQIURQWRIWKHVZLWFK
Sao: 0.31 in. (8 mm)
Sar: 0.79 in. (20 mm)
3 directions
Sao: 0.31 in. (8 mm)
0.79 in. (20 mm)
1 direction
$FFHVVRULHVSDJH
Characteristics:
Page 3/55
3/56
References:
Page 3/56
Accessories:
Page 3/58
Dimensions:
Page 3/60
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/61
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
References,
characteristics
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic, connector on 5.9 in (151 mm) pigtail
(continued)
5HFWDQJXODU
Type
&\OLQGULFDO
Compact
2.01 x 0.63 x 0.28 in
(51 x 16 x 7 mm)
Standard
3.46 x 0.98 x 0.51 in
(88 x 25 x 13 mm)
Diameter: 1.18 in (30 mm)
Length: 1.51 in (38.5 mm)
0FRQQHFWRU
0FRQQHFWRU
0FRQQHFWRU
1
2
3
5HIHUHQFHVRIVZLWFKHV(1)PXVWEHXVHGLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWK;36VDIHW\UHOD\PRGXOHVVHHSDJHVWR
1
3
1
XCSDMC790L01M8
XCSDMP790L01M12
XCSDMR790L01M12
–
XCSDMP500L01M12
–
–
XCSDMP700L01M12
–
XCSDMC591L01M8
XCSDMP591L01M12
XCSDMR591L01M12
XCSDMC791L01M8
XCSDMP791L01M12
XCSDMR791L01M12
–
XCSDMP501L01M12
–
–
XCSDMP701L01M12
–
4
3
5
3
1
3
XCSDMR590L01M12
4
3
1
1
3
1
6
7
3
7
7
3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2) (3)
(1 N.O. staggered)
With LED
2
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (3)
(1 N.C. staggered)
With LED
6
6
4
2-pole N.O. + N.O. (2) (3)
(1 N.O. staggered)
With LED
XCSDMP590L01M12
1
4
4
2
4
2
6
7
6
2
4
2-pole N.C. + N.O. (3)
(N.C. staggered)
With LED
1 4
2 7
3-pole N.C. + N.O. + N.O. (2)
(1 N.O. staggered)
XCSDMC590L01M8
3
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O.
(1 N.C. staggered)
2
2-pole N.O. + N.O. (2)
(1 N.O. staggered)
4
2-pole N.C. + N.O.
(N.C. staggered)
2
2
&RQWDFWVWDWHVVKRZQDUHZLWKWKHPDJQHWSRVLWLRQHGLQIURQWRIWKHVZLWFK
Weight oz (kg)
3.563 (0.101)
6.349 (0.180)
(1) Magnetic switch + coded magnet (XCSZCpppp).
(2) Only to be wired in conjunction with an XPSAF module (see pages 3/63 and 3/65).
(3) The green LED is lit when the coded magnet is positioned in front of the switch (guard closed).
N.O. contact PK-GY is to be used as an indicator of the device state, typically to a PLC. It is not to be used for the safety function.
5.150 (0.146)
8
&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHU*HQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH
2SHUDWLQJ]RQH
Sao: 0.20 in (5 mm)
Sar: 0.59 in. (15 mm)
3 directions
$SSURDFKGLUHFWLRQV
Sao: 0.31 in. (8 mm)
Sar: 0.79 in. (20 mm)
3 directions
9
Sao: 0.31 in. (8 mm)
Sar: 0.79 in. (20 mm)
1 direction
$FFHVVRULHVSDJH
Characteristics:
Page 3/55
References:
Page 3/56
10
Accessories:
Page 3/58
Dimensions:
Page 3/60
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/61
3/57
References,
characteristics
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
(continued)
Accessories
Non-contact safety interlock switches
$FFHVVRULHV
1
2
$FFHVVRULHVIRUQRQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFN
VZLWFKHV
XCSDMCppp2
XCSDMCpppL
XCSDMPppp2
XCSDMPpppL
XCSDMRppp2
XCSDMRpppL
0RXQWLQJFODPS
:HLJKWR]NJ
–
–
$GGLWLRQDOFRGHGPDJQHW
:HLJKWR]NJ
XCSZC1
0.317 (0.009)
XCSZP1
1.764 (0.050)
XCSZR1
0.635 (0.018)
1RQPDJQHWLFVKLPV
:HLJKWR]NJ
XCSZCC (lot of 2)
0.282 (0.008)
XCSZCP (lot of 2)
0.423 (0.012)
XCSZCR
0.071 (0.002)
XSZ B130
2.822 (0.080)
3UHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUVIRUFRQQHFWRUYHUVLRQVZLWFKHV
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
3
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUW\SH
7\SHRIFRQQHFWLRQ
1XPEHURIFRQGXFWRUVSLQV
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
4
5
Static
Dynamic
&DEOLQJ
/('VLJQDOOLQJ
1RPLQDOYROWDJH
1RPLQDOFXUUHQW
,QVXODWLRQUHVLVWDQFH
&RQWDFWUHVLVWDQFH
XZCP0941Lp, XZCP1041Lp
XZCP29P11Lp
Screw threaded (metal
Screw threaded (metal
clamping ring)
clamping ring)
4
8
IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened)
- 31…+ 194 °F (- 35…+ 90 °C) - 31…+ 194 °F (- 35…+ 90 °C)
+ 23…+ 194 °F (- 5…+ 90 °C) + 23…+ 194 °F (- 5…+ 90 °C)
Ø 0.205” (5.2 mm) cable,
Ø 0.205” (5.2 mm) cable,
wire c.s.a.:
wire c.s.a.:
2
8 x 24 AWG (0.25 mm2)
4 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm )
XZCP1141Lp, XZCP1241Lp
Screw threaded (metal
clamping ring)
4
–
a 60 V, c 75 V
4A
> 109 1
y 5 m1
–
a 250 V, c 300 V
4A
> 109 1
y 5 m1
–
a 250 V, c 300 V
2A
> 109 1
y 5 m1
- 31…+ 194 °F (- 35…+ 90 °C)
+ 23…+ 194 °F (- 5…+ 90 °C)
Ø 0.205” (5.2 mm) cable,
wire c.s.a.:
4 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2)
5HIHUHQFHVRISUHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUV
7\SHRI
FRQQHFWRU
6
Female, M8
1XPEHU )RUXVHZLWK
RISLQV
4
XCSDMCpppL
&DEOH
OHQJWK
IWP
Straight 6.56 (2)
Type
16.40 (5)
5HIHUHQFH
XZCP0941L2
XZCP0941L5
32.81 (10) XZCP0941L10
XZ CP0941Lp
Elbowed 6.56 (2)
7
16.40 (5)
XZCP1041L2
XZCP1041L5
32.81 (10) XZCP1041L10
XZ CP1041Lp
Female, M12
8
XCSDMPpppL
Straight 6.56 (2)
16.40 (5)
8
XZCP29P11L2
XZCP29P11L5
32.81 (10) XZCP29P11L10
Female, M12
XZ CP29P11Lp
4
XCSDMRpppL/
XCSDMPpppL
Straight 6.56 (2)
16.40 (5)
9
XZCP1141L2
XZCP1141L5
32.81 (10) XZCP1141L10
Elbowed 6.56 (2)
16.40 (5)
XZCP1241L5
6.702
(0.190)
XZ CP1241Lp
3/58
References:
Page 3/56
Accessories:
Page 3/58
Dimensions:
Page 3/60
12.699
(0.360)
2.822
(0.080)
6.349
(0.180)
12.699
(0.360)
3.527
(0.100)
10.229
(0.290)
16.579
(0.470)
3.175
(0.090)
6.702
(0.190)
13.051
(0.370)
3.175
(0.090)
XZ CP1141Lp
Characteristics:
Page 3/55
R]NJ
2.822
(0.080)
6.349
(0.180)
XZCP1241L2
32.81 (10) XZCP1241L10
10
:HLJKW
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/61
13.051
(0.370)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Function diagrams
Non-contact safety interlock switches
)XQFWLRQGLDJUDPVZLWKPDJQHWSUHVHQWSUHFDEOHGYHUVLRQ
XCSDMC59pp
0
Color
(N.O.): BN/BU
(N.C.): BK/WH
0.55
0.20
14
5
XCSDMC79pp
Sao
F
O
0.55
0 0.20
5
14
Sao
F
F
Sar
8
0.79
0.55
20
Color
0
0.79
0.31
8
0.55
20
0
20
14
F
O
O
8
Sao
Color
Sar (N.O.): BN/BU
(N.O.): BK/WH
(N.C.): GY/PK
0.79
0.31
0.55
1
20
14
F
F
O
2
Color
Sar (N.O.): BN/BU
14
Sao
(N.C.): BK/WH
F
O
Sao
0.55
XCSDMR79pp;&6'03pp
Sar (N.O.): BN/BU
14
8
Color
Sar (N.O.): BN/BU
(N.C.): BK/WH
(N.C.): GY/PK
0.79
0.31
15
XCSDMR59pp;&6'03pp
0.31
0
XCSDMP70pp
0.59
15
Sao
Color
(N.O.): BN/BU
(N.O.): BK/WH
Sar
0.59
0
XCSDMP50pp
(N.O.): BK/WH
F
F
3
)XQFWLRQGLDJUDPVZLWKPDJQHWSUHVHQWFRQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOYHUVLRQ
XCSDMC59pp
0
Pin
(N.O.): 1/3
(N.C.): 4/2
0.55
0.20
14
5
XCSDMC79pp
Sao
F
O
0
0.55
0.20
14
5
Sao
F
F
Sar
8
0.79
0.55
14
20
8
0.55
14
20
Pin
0
Sar (N.O.): 1/3
(N.C.): 4/2
(N.C.): 6/7
F
F
O
0.79
0.31
8
Sao
0.55
14
20
Pin
Sar (N.O.): 1/3
4
(N.O.): 4/2
(N.C.): 6/7
XCSDMR79pp;&6'03pp
Pin
0
Sar (N.O.): 1/3
(N.C.): 4/2
F
O
F
O
O
0.79
0.31
Sao
15
XCSDMR59pp;&6'03pp
0.31
0
XCSDMP70pp
0.59
15
Sao
Pin
(N.O.): 1/3
(N.O.): 4/2
Sar
0.59
0
XCSDMP50pp
Contact closed
Contact open
F
F
0.79
0.31
8
Sao
0.55
14
20
5
Pin
Sar (N.O.): 1/3
(N.O.): 4/2
6
6DRVSHFL¿HGRSHUDWLQJGLVWDQFH
6DUVSHFL¿HGWULSSLQJGLVWDQFH
Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-3.
Contact in transition
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
Page 3/55
References:
Page 3/56
Accessories:
Page 3/58
Dimensions:
Page 3/60
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/61
3/59
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Dimensions
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic
1RQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV
1
&RGHGPDJQHWfor XCSDMC
XCSDMC
PUHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
CRQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ
0.63
0.28
7
(1)
0.63
0.28
16
0.49
7
(1)
0.63
0.28
16
0.49
7
(1)
12.5
0.31
0.31
8
8
0.63
0.63
16
2.01
51
2xØ1.34
0.31
8
0.63
16
16
2.01
2.01
51
51
2xØ1.34
2xØ1.34
2xØ 3.5
2xØ 3.5
3
16
0.49
12.5
12.5
2
XCSZC1
5.94
2xØ 3.5
(2)
151
Dual Dimensions:
(1) Counterbored: 0.24 x 0.14 in. (Ø 6 x 3.5 mm.)
4
(1) Counterbored: 0.24 x 0.14 in. (Ø 6 x 3.5 mm.)
(2) M8 4-pin connector.
INCHES
Millimieters
(1) Counterbored: 0.24 x 0.14 in.
(Ø 6 x 3.5 mm.)
&RGHGPDJQHWfor XCSDMP
XCSDMP
3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
&RQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ
5
XCSZP1
(1)
5.94
151
2x Ø0.17
2x Ø4.5
6
3.07
3.46
78
88
3.07
3.07
78
78
3.46
3.07
88
78
7
0.31
0.14
0.26
3.5
6.5
8
8
0.26
3.5
0.14
0.31 3.5
6.5
0.51
0.98
8
13
25
0.98
25
8
0.14
0.31
0.26
6.5
0.98
25
(1) 4 or 6-pin M12 connector.
&RGHGPDJQHWfor XCSDMR
XCSDMR
3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
&RQQHFWRURQSLJWDLOFRQQHFWLRQ
XCSZR1
M30 x 0.06
M30 x 1.5
0.28
9
7
(1)
M30 x 0.06
0.63
M30 x 1.5
1.52
38.5
10
1.52
5.94
38.5
151
0.51
13
(1) M12 4-pin connector.
Characteristics:
Page 3/55
3/60
1.18
16
References:
Page 3/56
Accessories:
Page 3/58
(1)
(1) 0.08 x Ø 0.17 (2 x Ø 4.3),
countersunk: Ø 7.5 at 45°.
Dimensions:
Page 3/60
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/61
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Dimensions (continued),
wiring diagrams,
mounting
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic
$FFHVVRULHV
0RXQWLQJFODPS
1RQPDJQHWLFVKLPV
XSZ B130
XCSZCC
XCSZCP
1.51
13
Ø1.18
38.3
16
0.49
25
0.47
=
12
12.5
Ø30
0.85
0.47
=
Ø1.18
12
Ø30
21.6
0.63
0.63
1.40
35.5
16
1.2
31
0.73
16
2.01
51
2.56
0.85
3.07
65
4xØ1.34
78
0.31
8
4xØ 3.5
21.7
1.54
(1)
2xØ4.3
88
0.14
2
2xØ0.17
3.46
18.5
3.5
1
XCSZCR
0.98
0.63
0.51
39
3
Ø0.17
Ø4.5
0.16
0.87
0.31
4
22
8
0.45
11.5
(1) 2 elongated holes Ø 4 x 8.
3UHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUV
XZ CP0941Lp
XZ CP1041Lp
0.39
Ø10
XZ CP1141Lp
Ø0.57
27.4
M12x0.04
Ø14.8
19.7
XZ CP29P11Lp
1.08
Ø0.58
0.78
M8x0.04
XZ CP1241Lp
M12x1
M12x1
M8x1
Ø0.58
Ø0.39
Ø14.8
Ø10
1.36
M8x0.04
34.5
M12x0.04
M8x1
1.36
M12x1
1.73
1.65
44
42
L
L
L
Ø0.43
Ø0.30
Ø7.5
Ø7.5
5
L
L
34.6
Ø0.30
4
M12x0.04
Ø14.5
Ø11
Ø0.43
Ø11
Ø0.43
Ø11
:LULQJGLDJUDPV
0SUHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
0SUHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
XZ CP0941Lp
XZ CP1141Lp, XZ CP1241Lp
BK
4
3
WH
BU
2
6
XZ CP29P11Lp
GY
5
BK
3
4
YE
2
1
GN
4
PK
6
1
BN
BU
WH
BN
3
7
7
BU
1
2
BN
WH
8
RD
0RXQWLQJ
XCSDMC
XCSDMP
XCSDMR
d
d
b
B
9
XCS
DMC
DMP
D
b
F
1.57 (40) 0.51 (13) min. –
3.94 (100) 0.39 (10) min. –
d
3.19 x 2.17 (81 x 55)
4.65 x 2.17 (118 x 55)
e
–
–
1RQPDJQHWLFVKLPV
A
XCSZCC
B
XCSZCP
DMR
1.57 (40)
Ø 1.77 (45)
Ø 1.77 (45)
–
–
0.79 (20)
0.51 (13)
0.79 (20)
0.67 (17)
C
Characteristics:
Page 3/55
0.47 (12) min.
–
0.47 (12) min.
–
> 0.39 (10 )
> 0.39 (10 )
< 0.39 (10)
< 0.39 (10)
References:
Page 3/56
Accessories:
Page 3/58
C
a
A
Ød
a
a
b
B
b
A
8
c
e
10
XCSZCR
Dual Dimensions:
Dimensions:
Page 3/60
INCHES
Millimieters
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/61
3/61
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic, pre-cabled
XCSDMP5pppZLWK;36'0%
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62 Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (1 N.C. staggered) contact.
1
F1
+ 24 V
To PLC
Guard 1 closed
+ 24 V
Start
GY
WH
BN+
BK
BU
2
PK
S1
F
S3
K3
ESC
XCS DM
A1
K4
S11
S12
S13
Y1
Y2
13
23
14
24
XPS DMB
Supply A1/A2
3
K1
Fault
Fault
K1/K2
Logic
K2
F
BK
BU
BN+
4
S23
WH
S21
S2
S22
PK
A2
GY
K1/K2
Y34
Y44
To PLC
XCS DM
K3
+ 24 V
K4
To PLC
0V
Guard 2 closed
Channel 1
5
2 solid-state outputs
Channel 2
Safety outputs
ESC: External start conditions.
‡,QSXWV666RU666
‡8QXVHGLQSXWVPXVWEHMXPSHUHGIURP6BWR6B)RUH[DPSOH6WR6
‡7KHRUGHULQZKLFKWKHLQSXWVDUHZLUHGRUMXPSHUHGZLOOQRWDIIHFWGHYLFHRSHUDWLRQ
XCSDMC5ppp, XCSDMP5ppp, XCSDMR5pppZLWK;36'0(
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. (N.C. staggered) contact.
6
+ 24 V
F1
S1
S5
S7
XCS DM
BN+
WH
BN+
WH
BN+
BK
BU
BK
BU
S12
S13
S32
S33
S52
S53
S31
S51
Start
ESC
BU
S11
Guard 5 closed
XCS DM
WH
A1
S3
XCS DM
BK
7
Guard 3 closed
Guard 1 closed
K3
K4
Y1
Y2
13
23
14
24
XPS DME
Supply A1/A2
S13
S33
S53
Fault
S12
S32
S52
S23
S43
S63
S22
S42
S62
0V
Guard 2 closed
S62
S6
BK
XCS DM
S61
WH
S4
S43
Guard 4 closed
K2
S63
Y34
To PLC
K3
Chnl. 1 Chnl. 2
Safety outputs
ESC: External start conditions.
‡,QSXWV6B6B6B
‡8QXVHGLQSXWVPXVWEHMXPSHUHGIURP6BWR6B)RUH[DPSOHLILQSXW666LVQRWXVHGWKHQWHUPLQDOV6DQG6PXVWEHMXPSHUHG
‡7KHRUGHULQZKLFKWKHLQSXWVDUHZLUHGRUMXPSHUHGZLOOQRWDIIHFWGHYLFHRSHUDWLRQ
Characteristics:
Page 3/55
3/62
References:
Page 3/56
Accessories:
Page 3/58
K4
Guard 6 closed
2 solid-state outputs
10
Y44
XCS DM
BU
S42
BU
WH
9
XCS DM
S41
BK
BK
S2
S23
BN+
S22
WH
S21
BU
A2
BN+
8
K1/K2
BN+
Logic
K1/K2
K1
Fault
Dimensions:
Page 3/60
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/61
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams (continued)
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic, pre-cabled
&RQQHFWLRQRIXSWRQRQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVZLWKDQ/('RQRQHLQSXWZLWK;36'0p (1)
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62
Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. contact
1
Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. contact
+ 24 V
F
XCS DM
BU
BN+
BU
BN+
BK
WH
BK
PK
GY
2
S1.2
BN+
XCS DM
BU
3
S1.3
S22
S23
BN+
S21
BU
S13
WH
S12
BK
BN+
BU
S11
4
GY
WH
BK
XCS DM
S12
S13
To PLC
XCS DM
PK
WH
BK
S1.3
PK
GY
BN+
BK
XCS DM
S1.2
WH
S1.1
XCS DM
BU
WH
S1.1
S11
S21
S22
S23
5
(1) Input: S11, S12, S13 or S21, S22, S23.
XCSDMp7ppp ZLWK;36$)
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.C. contact (not conforming to standard EN 1088/ISO 14119)
6
F1
L ( +)
K3
S2
Start
K4
(1)
ESC
A1
S33
7
(2)
S34
S39
13
23
33
XPS AF
K1
T
8
Logic
K2
S21
S22
WH
BK
S1
S12
14
24
34
XCS DM
BU
S11
9
BN+
A2
K3
K4
N( )
10
(1) With start button monitoring.
(2) Without start button monitoring.
ESC: External start conditions.
Characteristics:
Page 3/55
References:
Page 3/56
Accessories:
Page 3/58
Dimensions:
Page 3/60
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/61
3/63
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams (continued)
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic, connector on pigtail
XCSDMP5ppp ZLWK;36'0%
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62 Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. (1 N.C. staggered) contact.
1
F1
+ 24 V
To PLC
Guard 1 closed
+ 24 V
Start
S1
F
6
2
1
4
3
2
7
S3
K3
ESC
XCS DM
A1
K4
S11
S12
S13
Y1
Y2
13
23
14
24
XPS DMB
Supply A1/A2
3
K1
Fault
Fault
K1/K2
Logic
K2
S22
S23
7
4
3
2
1
A2
6
K1/K2
S21
Y34
Y44
S2
4
F
To PLC
XCS DM
K3
+ 24 V
K4
To PLC
0V
Guard 2 closed
Channel 1
5
2 solid-state outputs
Channel 2
Safety outputs
ESC: External start conditions.
‡,QSXWV666RU666
‡8QXVHGLQSXWVPXVWEHMXPSHUHGIURP6BWR6B)RUH[DPSOH6WR6
‡7KHRUGHULQZKLFKWKHLQSXWVDUHZLUHGRUMXPSHUHGZLOOQRWDIIHFWGHYLFHRSHUDWLRQ
XCSDMC5ppp, XCSDMP5ppp, XCSDMR5pppZLWK;36'0(
6
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. (N.C. staggered) contact.
+ 24 V
F1
Guard 3 closed
Guard 1 closed
S1
S3
XCS DM
Guard 5 closed
S5
XCS DM
S7
XCS DM
Start
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
4
3
4
3
7
4
ESC
K3
K4
A1
S11
S12
S13
S31
S32
S33
S51
S52
S53
Y1
Y2
13
23
14
24
XPS DME
8
Supply A1/A2
S13
S33
S53
Fault
S12
S32
S52
S23
S43
S63
S22
S42
S62
Logic
K1/K2
A2
S21
S22
S2
S42
S4
S43
S62
S6
S63
Y34
Y44
3
4
3
4
3
2
1
2
1
XCS DM
1
XCS DM
S61
K2
4
XCS DM
S41
K1/K2
2
9
S23
K1
Fault
To PLC
K3
0V
Guard 2 closed
Guard 4 closed
Guard 6 closed
2 solid-state outputs
10
K4
Chnl. 1 Chnl. 2
Safety outputs
ESC: External start conditions.
‡,QSXWV6B6B6B
‡8QXVHGLQSXWVPXVWEHMXPSHUHGIURP6BWR6B)RUH[DPSOHLILQSXW666LVQRWXVHGWKHQWHUPLQDOV6DQG6PXVWEHMXPSHUHG
‡7KHRUGHULQZKLFKWKHLQSXWVDUHZLUHGRUMXPSHUHGZLOOQRWDIIHFWGHYLFHRSHUDWLRQ
Characteristics:
Page 3/55
3/64
References:
Page 3/56
Accessories:
Page 3/58
Dimensions:
Page 3/60
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/61
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams (continued)
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic, connector on pigtail
&RQQHFWLRQRIXSWRQRQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVZLWKDQ/('RQRQHLQSXWZLWK;36'0p (1)
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62
Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.O. contact
1
Example with 3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O. contact
+ 24 V
F
XCS DM
S1.1
S1.1
1
2
3
2
6
XCS DM
S1.2
4
4
3
7
1
2
XCS DM
S1.2
6
2
1
7
4
3
3
S1.3
XCS DM
4
S22
S23
S12
S13
To PLC
S21
1
S13
3
S12
2
1
3
S11
4
2
4
XCS DM
6
S1.3
7
4
3
1
2
XCS DM
S11
S21
S22
S23
5
(1) Input: S11, S12, S13 or S21, S22, S23.
XCSDMp7pppZLWK;36$)
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,62Example with 2-pole N.C. + N.C. contact (not conforming to standard EN 1088/ISO 14119)
6
F1
L ( +)
K3
Start
S2
K4
(1)
ESC
A1
S33
7
(2)
S34
S39
13
23
33
XPS AF
K1
8
Logic
T
K2
A2
S11
S21
S22
S1
S12
14
24
34
4
3
2
1
XCS DM
9
K3
K4
10
N( )
(1) With start button monitoring.
(2) Without start button monitoring.
ESC: External start conditions.
Characteristics:
Page 55
References:
Page 56
Accessories:
Page 58
Dimensions:
Page 60
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 61
3/65
Presentation
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Non-Contact safety interlock switches
1
1RQ&RQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV
3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
6,/DQG&DWHJRULHVDQG
XCSDM3791pp ;&6'0pp
2
3
page 6
4
1RQ&RQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV
0FRQQHFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
6,/DQG&DWHJRULHVDQG
;&6'00;&6'00
5
6
page 18
7
8
9
10
3/66
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Characteristics
Non-Contact safety interlock switches
1RQ&RQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNW\SH
6,/&DWHJRU\
XCSDM3
6,/&DWHJRU\
XCSDM4
1
(QYLURQPHQW
&RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV
IEC 61508, EN/IEC 62061( SIL2 and SIL3), EN 13849-1 (Category 3 and
Category 4), EN 1088/ISO 14119, EN/IEC 60947-5-1; EN/IEC 60947-5-2 ;
EN/IEC 60947-5-3
e, UL, CSA, TÜV
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
For operation
ƒ)ƒ&
-13...+158 (-25...+70)
For storage
ƒ)ƒ&
+ 40 ...+ 185 (-40...+85)
9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH
Conforming to
IEC 60068-2-6
10 gn (10…500 Hz)
6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH
Conforming to
IEC 60068-2-7
30 gn, 11 ms
6HQVLWLYLW\WRPDJQHWLF¿HOGV
mT
y 0,5
(OHFWULFVKRFNSURWHFWLRQ
Conforming to
IEC 61140
Class III
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
Conforming to
IEC 60529
Pre-cabled version: IP 66, IP 67
Connector version: IP 67
Conforming to
DIN 40050
Pre-cabled version: IP 69K
0DWHULDOV
2
3
Thermoplastic case (PBT); PVC cable
&KDUDFWHULVWLFV
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
Ub : c 24 V + 10% - 20%
5DWHGLQVXODWLRQYROWDJH(Ui)
Ui : c 36V
5DWHGLPSXOVHZLWKVWDQGYROWDJH
(U imp)
Conforming to
EN 60947-5-1
kV
,QWHJUDWHGRXWSXWSURWHFWLRQ
4
2,5
Overload and short-circuit protection
&RQQHFWLRQ
Conforming to
IEC 60947-5-2-A3
and IEC 61076
Pre-cabled, 6 x 22 AWG (0.25 mm²),
length: 6.6, 16.4 or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m)
depending on model
or M12 connector (A coding)
&DEOHGLDPHWHU
LQ
PP
0.24 (6.1 +/- 0.3)
&DEOHUHVLVWDQFH
m1P
90
Pre-cabled, 8 x 22 AWG (0.25 mm²),
length: 6.6, 16.4 or 32.8 ft. (2, 5, or 10 m)
depending on model
or M12 connector (A coding)
6DIHW\RXWSXWV266'
2XWSXW6LJQDO6ZLWFKLQJ'HYLFHV
2 PNP type (NO) solid-state outputs, 1.5 A (2 A up to 140 °F (60°C)), c 24 V
(short-circuit protected)
$ODUPRXWSXW
–
6LJQDOOLQJ
LED (green/red/orange)
0D[LPXPVZLWFKLQJIUHTXHQF\
+]
3
$FWLYDWLRQGHOD\
PV
100
'LVFRUGDQFHWLPH
V
2
+)7+DUGZDUH)DXOW7ROHUDQFH
1 solid-state output, 0.5 A, c 24 V, PNP
OEIW
1P
0D[LPXPVHULHVPRXQWLQJ
6
1
7
Test interval: 12 months
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH
5
1.327 (1.8) maximum
32 maximum with 6.6 ft. (2 m) long cable
–
- LED status signalling
- Auto/Manual start via “Start”input
- Monitoring of external switching devices
(EDM: External Devices Monitoring)
- Display of operating modes (LED)
- Monitoring of the function (open or
closed) as well as the response time of
the power components.
)XQFWLRQV
)XQFWLRQV
8
9
10
Characteristics:
Page 3/67
References:
Page 3/68
Accessories:
Page 3/70
Dimensions:
Page 3/71
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/73
3/67
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
References,
characteristics
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic, solid-state PNP type output
1RQ&RQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVZLWKGHGLFDWHGWUDQVPLWWHU
3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
Type
1
2
3
5HIHUHQFHV
'HVFULSWLRQ
4
0DJQHWLFV\VWHPZLWKGHGLFDWHG
WUDQVPLWWHU(1)
7\SHRIFRQQHFWLRQ
6,/&DWHJRU\
6,/&DWHJRU\
:HLJKW
R]NJ
Pre-cabled, L = 6.6 ft
(2 m)
XCSDM379102
XCSDM480102
11.288
(0.320)
Pre-cabled, L = 16.4
ft. (5 m)
XCSDM379105
XCSDM480105
16.932
(0.480)
Pre-cabled, L = 32.8
ft. (10 m)
XCSDM379110
XCSDM480110
26.279
(0,745)
(1) Self-contained system not requiring use of safety module or non-magnetic shim.
5
6
'HWHFWLRQFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
$VVXUHGRSHUDWLQJGLVWDQFH
Sao : 0.39 in. (10 mm)
$VVXUHGWULSSLQJGLVWDQFH
Sar : 0.79 in. (20 mm)
$SSURDFKGLUHFWLRQV
9
$SSURDFKVSHHG
0.03 ft./s (0.01 m/s) mini
2XWSXWVWDWXVSUHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
Output states shown are with the dedicated transmitter positioned in front of the receiver.
XCSDM3791pp
XCSDM4801pp
0.55
0.55
14
7
0
0.39
Sao
10
14
0.79
0
20
Sao
10
0.79
20
I1/O1 - GY/BK (NO)
I2/O2 - PK/WH (NO)
I1/O1 - GY/BK (NO)
I2/O2 - PK/WH (NO)
Sar
Sar
8
0.39
Er - VT(NC)
ON
OFF
“OFF” = Error
6DR6SHFL¿HGRSHUDWLQJGLVWDQFH
6DU6SHFL¿HGWULSSLQJGLVWDQFH
Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-3
Output closed
Output open
Transitional state
$SSURDFKGLUHFWLRQV
9
10
Characteristics:
Page 3/67
3/68
References:
Page 3/68
Accessories:
Page 3/70
Dimensions:
Page 3/71
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/73
References,
characteristics (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic, solid-state PNP type output
1RQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNZLWKGHGLFDWHGWUDQVPLWWHU
0FRQQHFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ
Type
1
2
3
5HIHUHQFHV
'HVFULSWLRQ
7\SHRI
FRQQHFWLRQ
1RQ&RQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHVZLWK M12 connector
GHGLFDWHGWUDQVPLWWHU(1)
6,/&DWHJRU\
6,/&DWHJRU\
XCSDM3791M12
XCSDM4801M12
:HLJKW
R]NJ
7.584
(0.215)
4
1) Self-contained system not requiring use of safety module or non-magnetic shim.
'HWHFWLRQFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
5
$VVXUHGRSHUDWLQJGLVWDQFH
Sao : 0.39 in. (10 mm)
$VVXUHGWULSSLQJGLVWDQFH
Sar : 0.79 in. (20 mm)
$SSURDFKGLUHFWLRQV
9
$SSURDFKVSHHG
0.03 ft./s (0.01 m/s) mini
2XWSXWVWDWXVSUHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
Output states shown are with the dedicated transmitter positioned in front of the receiver.
XCSDM3791M12
0.55
0.55
14
0
0.39
Sao
10
6
XCSDM4801M12
14
0.79
0
20
0.39
Sao
10
0.79
20
I1/O1 - 5/4 (NO)
I2/O2 - 6/4 (NO)
I1/O1 - 7/4 (NO)
I2/O2 - 6/2 (NO)
Sar
Sar
Er- 7(NC)
ON
“OFF” = Error
7
OFF
6DR6SHFL¿HGRSHUDWLQJGLVWDQFH
6DU6SHFL¿HGWULSSLQJGLVWDQFH
Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-3
Output closed
Output open
Transitional state
8
9
10
Characteristics:
Page 3/67
References:
Page 3/68
Accessories:
Page 3/70
Dimensions:
Page 3/71
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/73
3/69
References,
characteristics (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Accessories
$FFHVVRULHV
'HVFULSWLRQ
1
2
)RUXVHZLWK
5HIHUHQFH
:HLJKW
R]NJ
5HSODFHPHQWGHGLFDWHG
WUDQVPLWWHU
XCSDM3/4ppp02/05/10
XCSDM3/4pppM12
XCSDMT
3.527
(0.100)
$UFVXSSUHVVRU(pair)
XCSDM3/4ppp02/05/10
XCSDM3/4pppM12
XUSLZ500
0.705
(0.020)
3UHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUVIRUFRQQHFWRUYHUVLRQ1RQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUW\SH
3
XZ CP29P12Lp
7\SHRIFRQQHFWLRQ
Screw threaded (metal clamping ring)
1XPEHURIFRQWDFWV
8
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
&DEOLQJ
IP 67 (with clamping ring correctly tightened)
Operation
ƒ)ƒ&
- 13 ...+ 158 (- 25 ...+ 70)
Storage
ƒ)ƒ&
- 40 ...+ 185 (- 40…+ 85)
Conforming to
IEC 60947-5-2
Ø 6.1 mm PUR cable,
wire c.s.a.: 8 x 22 AWG (0.25 mm2)
/('VLJQDOOLQJ
4
–
1RPLQDOFXUUHQW
A
2
,QVXODWLRQUHVLVWDQFH
1
> 109
&RQWDFWUHVLVWDQFH
m1
y5
5HIHUHQFHVRISUHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUV
5
DF536653
7\SHRI
FRQQHFWRU
1RRI )RUXVHZLWK
FRQWDFWV
)HPDOH0 8
&RGLQJ$
Type
&DEOH
OHQJWK
IWP
XCSDM3/4ppp02 Straight 6.6 (2)
XCSDM3/4ppp05
XCSDM3/4ppp10
16.4 (5)
32.8 (10)
XZ CP29P12Lp
5HIHUHQFH
XZCP29P12L2
3.527
(0.100)
XZCP29P12L5
10.229
(0.290)
XZCP29P12L10
16.579
(0.470)
6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
Page 3/67
3/70
References:
Page 3/68
Accessories:
Page 3/70
Dimensions:
Page 3/71
:HLJKW
R]NJ
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/73
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Dimensions
Non-contact safety interlock switches
Plastic
1RQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFN
VZLWFKHV
3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
;&6'0ppp
$FFHVVRU\
0FRQQHFWRU&RGLQJ$FRQQHFWLRQ
;&6'0pppM12
1.26
5HSODFHPHQWGHGLFDWHGWUDQVPLWWHU
XCSDMT
1.26
32
0.31
0.47
12
34
32
0.31
1.34
8
1.34
8
0.20
0.47
12
5
34
0.20
0.20
5
5
3.23
8
3
0.24
6
4
4.6
3.23
3.23
82
27
0.18
4.6
4.6
0.31
1.06
0.18
0.18
2
1.26
32
1
82
82
3.94
3.94
3.94
100
100
5
100
0.35
9
6
Ø 0.16
Ø 0.16
Ø4
Ø4
Ø 0.16
Ø4
Dual Dimensions:
INCHES
3UHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUV
8
XZ CP29P12Lp
Ø0.57
Ø14.5
7
Millimieters
M12x0.04
M12x1
9
1.65
L
42
10
Ø0.43
Ø11
Characteristics:
Page 3/67
References:
Page 3/68
Accessories:
Page 3/70
Dimensions:
Page 3/71
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/73
3/71
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams,
mounting
Non-contact safety interlock switches
:LULQJGLDJUDP
1
0SUHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRU
XZ CP29P12Lp
GY
BK
2
PK
5
4
6
3
BU
7
2
8
WH
VT
1
BN
OG
0RXQWLQJ
3
;&6'0'0
u 0.79
u 0.79
u 20
u 0.79
u 20
u 20
u 0.79
u 20
4
u 20
u 0.79
u 0.79
u 0.79
u 20
u 20
u 0.79
u 20
u 0.79
u 20
5
Dual Dimensions:
6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
Page 3/67
3/72
References:
Page 3/68
Accessories:
Page 3/70
Dimensions:
Page 3/71
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/73
INCHES
Millimieters
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams
Non-contact safety interlock switches
:LULQJGLDJUDPV
&DWHJRU\(this Category 3 wiring can attain SIL2)
3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
0FRQQHFWRU$FRGLQJFRQQHFWLRQ
XCSDM3791pp
XCSDM3791M12
N
F1
L
BN +
1
F1
2A
I1 GY
I1 7
1
+
2A
+
NO
NO
GND
L
2
O1 4
I2 PK
I2 6
+
O2 2
K2
Supply
ABL8 pppp
O2 WH
NO
N
O1 BK
K2
NO
K1
GND
BU
0V
K1
6
4
1
2
7
24V
3
(1)
(1)
–
3
3
–
6,/&DWHJRU\
3UHFDEOHGFRQQHFWLRQ
0FRQQHFWRU$FRGLQJFRQQHFWLRQ
XCSDM4801pp
XCSDM4801M12
F1
N
F1
2A
BN +
+
Diag
L
Er VT
I1 GY
To
+ PLC
O1 BK
I2 PK
+
GND
1
+
Diag
N
K2
Supply
ABL8pppp
K1
GND
0V
Start
+
(1)
O2 2
5
6
K2
K1
3
(1)
4
7
3
1
Start
input
8
–
8
5
2
–
+
K2
+
K2
4
24V
BU
OG input
+
O1 4
I2 6
L
NO
NO
Er 7
I1 5
NO
NO
O2 WH
2A +
To
PLC
K1
K1
6HULHVPRXQWLQJQRQFRQWDFWVDIHW\LQWHUORFNVZLWFKHV(2)
6
:LULQJWR6,/&DWHJRU\ZLWKVDIHW\UHOD\PRGXOH
XCSDM3791pp
([DPSOH;&6'0ppppp + XPSAFL5130
F1
F1
+
2A
I1
NO
2A
+
NO
O1
I2
NO
7
O1
+
I2
O2
N
–
+
L
NO
O2
F2
(3)
I1
NO
A1
GND
O1
N
L
13
23
14
24
8
XPS Apppp
Supply
ABL8pppp
I2
NO
I1
K1
Logic
T
O2
K2
–
GND
+
NO
0V
24V
A2
I1
O1
S33
9
K1
K1
I2
S3
K1
NO
S34
K2
O2
K2
10
K2
–
(1) Mechanically linked contacts
(2) Maximum series mounting: 32 maximum with 6.6 ft. (2 m) long cable.
(3) 2A maximum
3/73
Presentation
2
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety limit switches
Miniature design, metal, type XCS M
XCS M
520576
1
:LWKKHDGIRUOLQHDUPRYHPHQWSOXQJHU0RXQWLQJE\WKHERG\
SUHFDEOHG
2
page 3/76
520577
:LWKKHDGIRUURWDU\PRYHPHQWOHYHU0RXQWLQJE\WKHERG\
3
4
page 3/76
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/74
Characteristics
2
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety limit switches
Miniature design, metal, type XCS M
(QYLURQPHQW
&RQIRUPLQJWRVWDQGDUGV
Products
Machine assemblies
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV
3URWHFWLYHWUHDWPHQW
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH
6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH
(OHFWULFVKRFNSURWHFWLRQ
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
0DWHULDOV
5HSHDWDFFXUDF\
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088
UL, CSA
Standard version: “TC”
Operation: - 13…+ 158 °F(- 25...+ 70 °C). Storage: - 40…+ 158 °F (- 40…+ 70 °C)
XCS M snap action: 5 gn. XCS M slow break: 25 gn (10…500 Hz)
conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
25 gn, (18 ms) conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Class I, conforming to IEC 6140 and NF C 20-030
,3,3DQG,3(1)FRQIRUPLQJWR,(&,.FRQIRUPLQJWR(1
Body: zamak. Head: zamak. Protective cover: steel.
0.002 in. (0.05 mm) on the tripping points with 1 million operating cycles for head with end plunger
1
2
&RQWDFWEORFNFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
5DWHGLQVXODWLRQYROWDJH
5DWHGLPSXOVHZLWKVWDQGYROWDJH
3RVLWLYHRSHUDWLRQ(depending on model)
5HVLVWDQFHDFURVVWHUPLQDOV
6KRUWFLUFXLWSURWHFWLRQ
0LQLPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG
(OHFWULFDOOLIH
Millions of operating cycles
a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz
o inductive circuit
a$&%8H 9,H $
c'&58H 9,H $FRQIRUPLQJWR,(&$SSHQGL[$
EN 60947-5-1
Ui = 400 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to IEC 60947-5-1
Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 No. 14
U imp = 4 kV conforming to IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664
N.C. contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix K
)25 m1 conforming to IEC 60255-7 category 3
6 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl)
Snap action contact: 0.01 m/minute
Break before make, slow break: 6 m/minute
b Conforming to 60947-5-1 Appendix C
b Utilisation category AC-15 and DC-13
b Maximum frequency: 3600 operating cycles/hour
b Load factor: 0.5
;&60VQDSDFWLRQ
;&60VORZEUHDN
(N.C.+ N.C. + N.O., N.C.+ N.C. + N.O. + N.O. 1&1&12FRQWDFW
FRQWDFWV
5
4
3
2
1
Millions of operating cycles
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
Ithe
48 V
110 V
0,5
5
4
3
3
4
5
Ithe
12/24/48 V
2
230 V
1
110 V
6
0,5
12/24 V
230 V
0,1
0,1
0,5
d.c. supply c
0,5
1
2
3
Power broken in W for
5 million operating cycles
Voltage
V
24
o
W
3
(OHFWULFDO/LIH
1
2
4 56
10
Current in A
48
2
120
1
3
4 56
10
Current in A
Power broken in W for
5 million operating cycles
Voltage
V
24
o
W
4
7
48
3
120
3
The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual
operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they
create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the
limited warranty offered on this product please refer to the Square D ® terms and conditions of
sale found in the Square D ® Digest.
8
9
10
Characteristics:
Page 3/75
References:
Page 3/76
Accessories:
Page 3/76
Dimensions:
Page 3/77
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/77
3/75
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
References,
characteristics
2
Safety limit switches
Miniature design, metal, type XCS M
Pre-cabled
7\SHRIKHDG
3OXQJHUPRXQWLQJE\WKHERG\
5RWDU\PRXQWLQJE\WKHERG\
Metal end plunger
Thermoplastic roller
lever
1
2
7\SHRIRSHUDWRU
Roller plunger
Steel roller lever
3-pole N.C.+N.C.+N.O.
VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW
BU
BK
RD
5HIHUHQFHVZLWKIWPFDEOH
XCS M3910L2
BN
RD-WH
3
BK-WH
GN-YE
XCS M3902L2
1,8 4,2(P)
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
5 mm
0
BU
BK
RD
0,8
3-pole N.C.+N.C.+N.O.
EUHDNEHIRUHPDNH
VORZEUHDNFRQWDFW
VT
BU
BK
RD
4-pole N.C.+N.C.+N.O.+N.O.
VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW
BN
VT-WH
RD-WH
BK-WH
2,6
5 mm
XCS M4110L2
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
RD-RD-WH
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
1,8
0,8
5.820 (0.165)
closed
open
XCS M3916L2
25˚ 70˚(P)
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
0
90˚
12˚
XCS M3715L2
3,1(A) 5,6(P)
25˚
4,6 mm
0
4,2(P)
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
BK-BK
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
45˚(P)
0
36˚ 90˚
XCS M4115L2
mm
1,4
5.997 (0.170)
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
RD-RD-WH
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH
0
90˚
25˚
45˚(P)
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
0
3,1(A) 7(P)
25˚ 70˚(P)
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
12˚
XCS M3716L2
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
XCS M4102L2
5 mm
0
:HLJKWR]NJ
&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ
mm
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
GN-YE
6
0
1,8 3,1(P)
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
0
5
3,1(A) 7(P)
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
1,4
XCS M3702L2
XCS M3710L2
BN
RD-WH
4
BK-WH
GN-YE
XCS M3915L2
90˚
12˚
36˚ 90˚
XCS M4116L2
25˚ 70˚(P)
0
0
BK-BK-WH
RD-RD-WH
BN-BU
VT-VT-WH
RD-RD-WH
BK-BK-WH
BN-BU
RD-RD-WH
25˚ 70˚(P)
0
90˚
12˚
7.231 (0.205)
7.408 (0.210)
(A) = cam displacement
(P) = positive opening point
N.C. contact with opening positive operation
&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH
6ZLWFKDFWXDWLRQ
7\SHRIDFWXDWLRQ
On end
By 30° cam
7
0D[LPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG
0LQLPXPIRUFHRUWRUTXH
8
&DEOLQJ
Tripping
Positive opening
3-pole contacts
4-pole contacts
1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s)
1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s)
4.9 ft/s (1.5 m/s)
1.9 lb (8.5 N)
1.6 lb (7 N)
OELQ1‡P
9.6 lb (42.4 N)
7.9 lb (35 N)
OELQ1‡P
PVR pre-cabled, 7 x 20 AWG (0.5 mm2)
PVR pre-cabled, 9 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2),
(1) Devices shown have a 6.6 ft (2 m) cable, and are available with other lengths of cable:
For a 3.3 ft (1 m) long cable, replace L2 with L1.
For a 16.4 ft (5 m) long cable, replace L2 with L5.
9
10
Characteristics:
Page 3/75
3/76
References:
Page 3/76
Accessories:
Page 3/76
Dimensions:
Page 3/77
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/77
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Dimensions,
Wiring diagrams
2
Safety limit switches
Miniature design, metal, type XCS M
Pre-cabled
'LPHQVLRQV
XCSM pp10L1
XCSM pp02L1
.14
Ø.28
Ø7
1
Ø.46
Ø11.6
3.5
.79
20
Ø.16
Ø4
Ø.16
Ø4
1.20
(1)
1.57
30.4
2.77
70.4
2.36
60
(1)
1.97
1.97
1.57
40
50
20
.63
20
1.18
16
1.18
16
2
.79
.79
.63
40
50
30
30
(1) Protective cover mounted with 5-lobe torque safety screws.
XCSM pp15L1
XCSM pp16L1
1.22
1.22
31
31
.94
3
.94
24
24
Ø.63
Ø16
.22
5.5
Ø.63
Ø16
.22
5.5
1.35
1.35
34.4
2.13
(1)
1.57
54
3.70
Ø.16
Ø4
2.13
(1)
1.57
54
3.70
94
94
40
40
.79
.79
20
.63
1.28
4
34.4
Ø.16
Ø4
30
1.18
16
1.28
32.4
5
20
.63
1.18
16
30
32.4
Dual Dimensions:
INCHES
Millimieters
(1) Protective cover mounted with 5-lobe torque safety screws.
:LULQJGLDJUDPV
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1
,(&
Example with 3-pole N.C.+N.C.+N.O. contact and protective fuse
to prevent jumpering of the N.C. contacts, either by cable damage
or by tampering.
BU
BK
RD
O
BU
BK
RD
Example with 3-pole N.C.+N.C.+N.O. contact with mixed redundancy of the contacts and the
associated control relyas. Opening and closing of the guard necessary to activate K1.
F1
(1)
F1
K2
BN
BK-WH
RD-WH
KM1
K2
O
7
K1
K1
GN-YE
BN
BK-WH
GN-YE
RD-WH
6
:LULQJWRFDWHJRU\FRQIRUPLQJWR(1,(&
I
KM2
KM1
KM2
I
K
K1
M
K
M
K2
(1) Signalling contact
8
K2
H1
K1
H1: “guard closed” indicator light
([DPSOHRIJXDUGPRQLWRULQJXVLQJVZLWFKHVDQGVDIHW\UHOD\PRGXOHFDWHJRU\
2SHUDWLRQLQSRVLWLYHDQGQHJDWLYHFRPELQHGPRGH
9
10
XPS
Characteristics:
Page 3/75
References:
Page 3/76
Accessories:
Page 3/76
Dimensions:
Page 3/77
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/77
3/77
Presentation
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
2
Safety limit switches
Compact design, metal, type XCSD
Compact design, plastic, type XCS P
b XCSD, XCS P
5629
5629
5629
562943
1
:LWKKHDGIRUOLQHDUPRYHPHQWSOXQJHU
XCSD
XCS P
ZLWKFRQGXLWHQWU\
FRQIRUPLQJWR(1
2
XCS P
5
5
:LWKKHDGIRUURWDU\PRYHPHQWOHYHU
XCSD
5
Pages 3/82 and 3/83
5
3
Pages 3/80 and 3/81
4
5
Pages 3/80 and 3/81
6
7
8
9
10
3/78
Pages 3/82 and 3/83
Characteristics
2
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety limit switches
Compact design, metal, type XCSD
Compact design, plastic, type XCS P
(QYLURQPHQWDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
&RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV
3URWHFWLYHWUHDWPHQW
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH
6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH
(OHFWULFVKRFNSURWHFWLRQ
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
Products
Machine assemblies
Standard version
For operation
For storage
Conforming to IEC 60068-2-6
Conforming to IEC 60068-2-27
Conforming to IEC 60529
Conforming to EN 50102
5HSHDWDFFXUDF\
&DEOHHQWU\
0DWHULDOV
Depending on model
IEC/EN 60947-5-1, UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
IEC/EN 60204-1, EN 1088/ISO 14119
UL, CSA
“TC”
- 13…+ 158 °F (- 25…+ 70 °C)
- 40…+ 158 °F (- 40…+ 70 °C)
25 gn (10…500 Hz)
50 gn (11 ms)
Class I conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 for XCSD
Class II conforming to IEC 61140 and NF C 20-030 for XCS P
,3DQG,3
,.IRU;&6'
,.IRU;&63
0.004 in (0.1 mm) on the tripping points, with 1 million operating cycles for head with
end plunger
Tapped entry for 13.5 cable gland, tapped ISO M20 x 1.5 or tapped 1/2” NPT
XCSD zamak bodies and heads, XCS P plastic bodies, zamak heads
Plastic protective cover, secured by 5-lobe socket head safety screw
1
2
3
&RQWDFWEORFNFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
a AC-15; B300 (Ue = 240 V, Ie = 1.5 A); Ithe = 6 A
c DC-13; R300 (Ue = 250 V, Ie = 0.1 A), conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix A
Ui = 400 V degree of pollution 3 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1
Ui = 300 V conforming to UL 508, CSA C22-2 n° 14
U imp = 4 kV conforming to EN/IEC 60947-1, IEC 60664
5DWHGRSHUDWLRQDO
FKDUDFWHULVWLFV
5DWHGLQVXODWLRQYROWDJH
Snap action
Slow break
N.C. contacts with positive opening operation conforming to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Appendix K
y 25 m1 conforming to IEC 60255-7 category 3
6 A cartridge fuse type gG (gl)
Clamping capacity, min: 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2),
max: 1 x 18 AWG (1 mm2) or 2 x 18 AWG (0.75 mm2)
0.39 in/ (0.01 m) per minute
19.7 ft/ (6 m) per minute
a.c. supply
a 50/60 Hz
o inductive circuit
Ithe
5
1
0,5
110 V
230/400 V
24 V
Millions of operating cycles
b Conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 Appendix C
b Utilisation categories AC-15 and DC-13
b Maximum operating rate: 3600 operating cycles/hour
b Load factor: 0.5
6QDSDFWLRQFRQWDFWV
6ORZEUHDNFRQWDFWV
(OHFWULFDOOLIH
Millions of operating cycles
5DWHGLPSXOVHZLWKVWDQG
YROWDJH
3RVLWLYHRSHUDWLRQ
5HVLVWDQFHDFURVVWHUPLQDOV
6KRUWFLUFXLWSURWHFWLRQ
&RQQHFWLRQ
(screw clamp terminals)
0LQLPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG
(for head with end plunger)
4
5
6
Ithe
5
4
3
2
230 V
1
12/24/48 V
110 V
7
0,5
0,2
48 V
0,1
0,5
d.c. supply c
1
2
3 4 5
10
Current in A
Power broken in W for 5 million operating
cycles.
Voltage
V
24
48
120
o
W
3
2
1
0,1
0,5
1
2
3 4 5
10
Current in A
8
Power broken in W for 5 million operating
cycles.
Voltage
V
24
48
120
o
W
4
3
2
(OHFWULFDO/LIH
The product life expressed is based on average usage and normal operating conditions. Actual
operating life will vary with conditions. The above statements are not intended to nor shall they
create any express or implied warranties as to product operation or life. For information on the
limited warranty offered on this product please refer to the Square D ® terms and conditions of
sale found in the Square D ® Digest.
9
10
Characteristics:
Page 3/79
References:
Page 3/80
Accessories:
Page 3/80
Dimensions:
Page 3/80
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/80
3/79
References,
characteristics,
dimensions
7\SHRIKHDG
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety limit switches
Compact design, metal, type XCSD
2
3OXQJHU
5RWDU\
1
2
7\SHRIRSHUDWRU
Metal end plunger
Steel roller plunger
Thermoplastic roller
lever
Steel roller lever
5HIHUHQFHVRIFRPSOHWHVZLWFKHVZLWKSROH1&1&12VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW
:LWK´137FDEOHHQWU\
3
XCSD3910N12
XCSD3902N12
XCSD3918N12
XCSD3919N12
XCSD3910P20
XCSD3902P20
XCSD3918P20
XCSD3919P20
;&6'*
;&6'*
;&6'*
;&6'*
7.585 (0.215)
7.760 (0.220)
8.995 (0.255)
8.995 (0.255)
:LWK,620[FDEOHHQWU\
:LWK3JFDEOHHQWU\
:HLJKWR]NJ
31
21
13
22
14
&RQWDFWIXQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV
32
4
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O.
VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW
1,8 4,5(P)
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
5
3,1(A) 7,8(P)
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
5mm
0,9
&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ
25˚ 70˚(P)
25˚ 70˚(P)
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
mm
1,5
0
90˚
12˚
90˚
12˚
contact closed (A) = cam displacement
(P) = positive opening point
contact open
N.C. contact with positive opening operation
&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH
6ZLWFKDFWXDWLRQ
7\SHRIDFWXDWLRQ
On end
By 30° cam
6
0D[LPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG
0LQLPXPIRUFHRUWRUTXH
For tripping
For positive opening
&RQGXLWHQWU\
7
1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s)
4.9 ft/s (1.5 m/s)
3.72 lb (15 N)
2.70 lb (12 N)
OELQ1‡P
10.12 lb (45 N)
8.09 lb (36 N)
OELQ1‡P
1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm
1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm
1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit
'LPHQVLRQV
XCSD3p10ppp
XCSD3p02ppp
.49
12.5
.14
.49
8
12.5
.08
Ø.46
Ø11.6
3.5
Ø.28
Ø7
.08
2
2
1.20
.79
30.5
20
2.01
2.56
51
65
9
2.01
2.56
51
65
19
(2)
.75
19
(3)
(3)
.55
1.18
30
10
(2)
.75
(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland
or 1/2” NPT conduit.
(2) 2 elongated holes Ø.17 x .25 in. (Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm) on .87 in.
(22 mm) centers or 2 holes Ø.17 in. ( Ø 4.3 mm) on .79 in.
(20 mm) centers.
(3) .08 x Ø.12 in. (2 x Ø 3 mm) holes for studs, depth .
16 in. (4 mm).
1.36
34.5
14
(1)
=
.79/.87
20/22
.55
=
1.18
30
1.36
1.34
14
=
(1)
20/22
34
15°
15°
.49
12.5
Dual Dimensions:
Characteristics:
Page 3/79
3/80
References:
Page 3/80
=
1.34
34.5
34
.79/.87
Accessories:
Page 3/80
Dimensions:
Page 3/80
INCHES
Millimieters
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/80
References,
characteristics,
dimensions (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety limit switches
Compact design, metal, type XCSD
2
7\SHRIKHDG
3OXQJHU
5RWDU\
1
7\SHRIRSHUDWRU
Metal end plunger
Steel roller plunger
Thermoplastic roller
lever
2
Steel roller lever
5HIHUHQFHVRIFRPSOHWHVZLWFKHVZLWKSROH1&1&12EUHDNEHIRUHPDNHVORZEUHDNFRQWDFW
:LWK´137FDEOHHQWU\
XCSD3710N12
XCSD3702N12
XCSD3718N12
XCSD3719N12
XCSD3710P20
XCSD3702P20
XCSD3718P20
XCSD3719P20
;&6'*
;&6'*
;&6'*
;&6'*
7.585 (0.215)
7.760 (0.220)
8.995 (0.255)
8.995 (0.255)
:LWK,620[FDEOHHQWU\
3
:LWK3JFDEOHHQWU\
:HLJKWR]NJ
4
13
14
21
22
32
31
&RQWDFWIXQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O.
EUHDNEHIRUHPDNH
VORZEUHDNFRQWDFW
&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ
1,8 3,2(P)
3,1(A) 5,6(P)
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
3
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
5mm
25˚ 70˚(P)
25˚ 70˚(P)
5,2 mm
0
42˚
90˚
0
42˚
90˚
contact closed (A) = cam displacement
(P) = positive opening point
contact open
N.C. contact with positive opening operation
5
&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH
6ZLWFKDFWXDWLRQ
7\SHRIDFWXDWLRQ
On end
0D[LPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG
0LQLPXPIRUFHRUWRUTXH
1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s)
4.9 ft/s (1.5 m/s)
3.72 lb (15 N)
2.70 lb (12 N)
OELQ1‡P
10.12 lb (45 N)
8.09 lb (36 N)
OELQ1‡P
1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm
1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm
1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit
For tripping
For positive opening
&RQGXLWHQWU\
By 30° cam
6
7
'LPHQVLRQV
XCSD3p18ppp, XCSD3p19ppp
1.57
40
.22
5.5
.94
.75
24
Ø19
8
.49
1.30
12.5
33
.08
2.07
2
2.56
65
52.5
2.01
51
(2)
.75
19
9
(3)
.55
1.18
30
(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland
or 1/2” NPT conduit.
(2) 2 elongated holes Ø.17 x .25 in. (Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm) on .87 in.
(22 mm) centers or 2 holes Ø.17 in. ( Ø 4.3 mm) on .79 in. (20
mm) centers.
(3) .08 x Ø.12 in. (2 x Ø 3 mm) holes for studs, depth .
16 in. (4 mm).
Characteristics:
Page 3/79
References:
Page 3/80
1.36
14
=
(1)
.79/.87
20/22
=
1.34
34
34.5
15°
15°
10
.49
12.5
Dual Dimensions:
Accessories:
Page 3/80
Dimensions:
Page 3/80
INCHES
Millimieters
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/80
3/81
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
References,
characteristics,
dimensions
(continued)
Safety limit switches
Compact design, plastic, type XCS P
2
7\SHRIKHDG
3OXQJHU
5RWDU\
1
2
7\SHRIRSHUDWRU
Metal end plunger
Steel roller plunger
Thermoplastic roller
lever
Steel roller lever
5HIHUHQFHVRIFRPSOHWHVZLWFKHVZLWKSROH1&1&12VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW
:LWK´137FDEOHHQWU\
3
XCS P3910N12
XCS P3902N12
XCS P3918N12
XCS P3919N12
XCS P3910P20
XCS P3902P20
XCS P3918P20
XCS P3919P20
;&63*
;&63*
;&63*
;&63*
7.585 (0.215)
7.760 (0.220)
8.995 (0.255)
8.995 (0.255)
:LWK,620[FDEOHHQWU\
:LWK3JFDEOHHQWU\
:HLJKWR]NJ
13
21
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O.
VQDSDFWLRQFRQWDFW
14
32
31
&RQWDFWIXQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV
22
4
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
5
3,1(A) 7,8(P)
1,8 4,5(P)
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
5mm
25˚ 70˚(P)
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
mm
1,5
0,9
&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ
25˚ 70˚(P)
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
90˚
12˚
90˚
12˚
contact closed (A) = cam displacement
(P) = positive opening point
contact open
N.C. contact with positive opening operation
&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH
6ZLWFKDFWXDWLRQ
7\SHRIDFWXDWLRQ
On end
By 30° cam
6
0D[LPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG
0LQLPXPIRUFHRUWRUTXH
For tripping
For positive opening
&RQGXLWHQWU\
7
1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s)
4.9 ft/s (1.5 m/s)
3.72 lb (15 N)
2.70 lb (12 N)
OELQ1‡P
10.12 lb (45 N)
8.09 lb (36 N)
OELQ1‡P
1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm
1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm
1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit
'LPHQVLRQV
XCS P3p10ppp
XCS P3p02ppp
.49
12.5
.14
.49
8
12.5
.08
Ø.46
Ø11.6
3.5
Ø.28
Ø7
.08
2
2
1.20
.79
30.5
20
2.01
2.56
51
65
9
2.01
2.56
51
65
19
(2)
.75
19
(3)
(3)
.55
1.18
30
10
(2)
.75
(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland
or 1/2” NPT conduit.
(2) 2 elongated holes Ø.17 x .25 in. (Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm) on .87 in.
(22 mm) centers or 2 holes Ø.17 in. ( Ø 4.3 mm) on .79 in.
(20 mm) centers.
(3) .08 x Ø.12 in. (2 x Ø 3 mm) holes for studs, depth .
16 in. (4 mm).
1.36
34.5
14
(1)
=
.79/.87
20/22
.55
=
1.18
30
1.36
1.34
14
=
(1)
20/22
34
15°
15°
.49
12.5
Dual Dimensions:
Characteristics:
Page 3/79
3/82
References:
Page 3/82
=
1.34
34.5
34
.79/.87
Accessories:
Page 3/82
Dimensions:
Page 3/82
INCHES
Millimieters
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/82
References,
characteristics,
dimensions (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety limit switches
Compact design, plastic, type XCS P
2
7\SHRIKHDG
3OXQJHU
5RWDU\
1
7\SHRIRSHUDWRU
Metal end plunger
Steel roller plunger
Thermoplastic roller
lever
2
Steel roller lever
5HIHUHQFHVRIFRPSOHWHVZLWFKHVZLWKSROH1&1&12EUHDNEHIRUHPDNHVORZEUHDNFRQWDFW
:LWK´137FDEOHHQWU\
XCS P3710N12
XCS P3702N12
XCS P3718N12
XCS P3719N12
XCS P3710P20
XCS P3702P20
XCS P3718P20
XCS P3719P20
;&63*
;&63*
;&63*
;&63*
7.585 (0.215)
7.760 (0.220)
8.995 (0.255)
8.995 (0.255)
3
:LWK,620[FDEOHHQWU\
:LWK3JFDEOHHQWU\
:HLJKWR]NJ
4
13
14
21
22
32
31
&RQWDFWIXQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV
3-pole N.C. + N.C. + N.O.
EUHDNEHIRUHPDNH
VORZEUHDNFRQWDFW
&RQWDFWRSHUDWLRQ
1,8 3,2(P)
3,1(A) 5,6(P)
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
0
3
0
5mm
25˚ 70˚(P)
25˚ 70˚(P)
21-22
31-32
13-14
21-22
31-32
13-14
5,2 mm
0
42˚
90˚
0
42˚
90˚
5
contact closed (A) = cam displacement
(P) = positive opening point
contact open
N.C. contact with positive opening operation
&RPSOHPHQWDU\FKDUDFWHULVWLFVQRWVKRZQXQGHUJHQHUDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVSDJH
6ZLWFKDFWXDWLRQ
7\SHRIDFWXDWLRQ
On end
By 30° cam
6
0D[LPXPDFWXDWLRQVSHHG
0LQLPXPIRUFHRUWRUTXH
For tripping
For positive opening
&RQGXLWHQWU\
1.64 ft/s (0.5 m/s)
4.9 ft/s (1.5 m/s)
3.72 lb (15 N)
2.70 lb (12 N)
OELQ1‡P
10.12 lb (45 N)
8.09 lb (36 N)
OELQ1‡P
1 entry tapped M20 x 1.5 mm for ISO cable gland, clamping capacity 7 to 13 mm
1 entry tapped Pg 13.5 for cable gland, clamping capacity 9 to 12 mm
1 entry tapped for 1/2” NPT (USAS B2-1) conduit
7
'LPHQVLRQV
XCS P3p18ppp, XCS P3p19ppp
1.57
40
.22
5.5
.94
8
.75
24
Ø19
.49
1.30
12.5
33
.08
2.07
2
2.56
65
52.5
2.01
51
(2)
.75
9
19
(3)
.55
1.18
(1) Tapped entry for ISO M20 x 1.5 or Pg 13.5 cable gland
or 1/2” NPT conduit.
(2) 2 elongated holes Ø.17 x .25 in. (Ø 4.3 x 6.3 mm) on .87 in.
(22 mm) centers or 2 holes Ø.17 in. ( Ø 4.3 mm) on .79 in. (20
mm) centers.
(3) .08 x Ø.12 in. (2 x Ø 3 mm) holes for studs, depth .
16 in. (4 mm).
Characteristics:
Page 3/79
References:
Page 3/82
30
1.36
14
=
(1)
.79/.87
20/22
=
1.34
34
34.5
10
15°
15°
.49
Dual Dimensions:
12.5
Accessories:
Page 3/82
Dimensions:
Page 3/82
INCHES
Millimieters
Wiring Diagrams:
Page 3/82
3/83
Selection guide
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Light curtains
1
$SSOLFDWLRQV
)XQFWLRQV
0DFKLQHWRROPDWHULDOKDQGOLQJDXWRPRWLYHHWF
)LQJHUSURWHFWLRQLQPPRUKDQGSURWHFWLRQLQPP
'HYLFH
Light curtains, type 4
Multi-beam, infrared transmission, light curtains
(1 transmitter-receiver pair)
Optimum Type
Universal Type
2
3
4
5
6
7
&RQIRUPLW\
Product standards
ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212, EN/IEC 61496-1
and EN/IEC 61496-2 and IEC 61508-1, 2 (Type 4 ESPE)
European directives
Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive
89/336 EEC
ROHS directive 2002/95/EC
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV
CE, TUV, UL, CSA
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
IP 65
&URVVVHFWLRQ
1.50 x 1.97 in. (38 x 50 mm)
3URWHFWHGKHLJKW
Conforming to EN 999
WRLQWRPP¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ
12.6 to 83.5 in (320 to 2120 mm) (hand protection)
1RPLQDOVHQVLQJGLVWDQFH
WRIW¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ
1 to 65 ft (hand protection)
5HVSRQVHWLPH
'HSHQGLQJRQKHLJKWSURWHFWHGWRPV¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ
Depending on height protected: 23 to 32 ms (hand protection)
7\SHRIRXWSXWV
Safety
2 solid-state PNP outputs (N.O.)
c 24 V, ) 625 mA
Short-circuit protection
Auxiliary
1 solid-state 100 mA, c 24 V, PNP or NPN output depending on model
8
0DLQIXQFWLRQV
9
-
Auto/manual
Test
EDM (External Devices Monitoring)
Light beam coding
³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ
(inhibition of the light curtain “detection” function)
10
-
Auto/manual
Test
EDM (External Devices Monitoring)
Light beam coding
%ODQNLQJ¿[HGDQGÀRDWLQJ
Cascadable (up to 4 segments)
Muting
6XSSO\YROWDJH
c 24 V ± 20%, 2 A
7\SHUHIHUHQFHV
XUSLB
XUSLD
3DJHV
3/92
3/93
3/84
0DFKLQHWRROPDWHULDOKDQGOLQJDXWRPRWLYHHWF
)LQJHUSURWHFWLRQLQPPRUKDQGSURWHFWLRQLQPP
1
Light curtains, type 4
Multi-beam, infrared transmission, light curtains
(1 transmitter-receiver pair)
Compact model, solid-state safety outputs (PNP)
2
3
4
ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212,
type 4 (ESPE) conforming to IEC 61496-1 and 2
Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive
89/336 EEC
5
CE, TUV, UL, CSA
IP 65 (IP 67 with protection tube)
1.38 x 1.97 in. (35 x 50 mm)
WRLQWRPP¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ
13.8 to 82.5 in. (351 to 2095 mm) (hand protection)
6
WRIWWRP¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ
0.98 to 29.5 ft (0.3 to 9 m) or 0.98 to 65.7 ft (0.3 to 20 m) (hand protection)
'HSHQGLQJRQKHLJKWSURWHFWHG«PV¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ
Depending on height protected: 20…35 ms (hand protection)
7
2 solid-state PNP outputs (N.O.)
c 24 V, ) 500 mA
Short-circuit protection
8
1 solid-state 100 mA, c 24 V, PNP or NPN output depending on model
Functions integrated in the light curtain:
Auto/Manual start and manual 1st cycle,
- EDM (external devices monitoring),
- test input,
- Blanking (ECS/B), Floating Blanking (FB) and Blanking + Floating Blanking,
- Muting via external module
9
c 24 V ± 20%, 2 A
10
XUSLT
3/111
3/85
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Selection guide (continued)
Light curtains
1
$SSOLFDWLRQV
)XQFWLRQV
3DFNDJLQJFRQYH\RUV\VWHPVPDWHULDOVKDQGOLQJZDUHKRXVLQJVWRFNLQJHWF
%RG\SURWHFWLRQDQGPP
+DQGSURWHFWLRQLQPP
'HYLFH
Light curtains, type 4
Light curtains, type 2
1 to 6 beam light curtains with infrared
transmission
(1 transmitter-receiver pair)
Multi-beam light curtains with infrared
transmission
(1 transmitter-receiver pair)
Type 4 model, solid-state output
Slim, compact model, solid-state output
Automatic or manual start
ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA
1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212,
type 4 (ESPE) conforming to IEC 61496-1 and 2
Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment
directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive 89/336/
EEC
IEC 61496-1 and IEC 61496-2 type 2 (ESPE)
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQV
CE, TUV, UL, CSA
CE, TUV. UL, CSA
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
IP 67
IP 65
&URVVVHFWLRQ
2.05 x 2.17 in. (52 x 55 mm)
1.12 x 1.26 in. (28.5 x 32 mm)
29.53 to 70.87 in. (750 to 1800 mm) (1 to 6 light
beams)
5.91 to 59.06 in. (150 to 1500 mm) (hand
protection)
1RPLQDOVHQVLQJGLVWDQFH
«PRU«PGSJRQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
0.8…8 m for light curtains with passive receiver
0.98 to 49.21 ft (0.3 to 15 m)
5HVSRQVHWLPH
< 16…< 24 ms depending on light beam coding
selected
14…24 ms
Safety
2 solid-state PNP outputs (N.O.)
c 24 V, ) 650 mA
Short-circuit protection
2 solid-state PNP outputs (N.O.)
c 24 V, ) 500 mA
Short-circuit protection
Auxiliary
1 solid-state 100 mA, c 24 V PNP output
1 x 100 mA, c 24 V PNP alarm output
Functions integrated in the light curtain:
Functions integrated in the light curtain:
- automatic or manual start depending on
version
2
3
4
&RQIRUPLW\
Product standards
European directives
5
6
7
3URWHFWHGKHLJKW
7\SHRIRXWSXWV
Conforming to EN 999
Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work
equipment
directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive 89/336/
EEC
8
0DLQIXQFWLRQV
Auto/Manual start and manual 1st cycle,
9
³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ
(inhibition of the light curtain “detection” function)
- EDM (external devices monitoring),
- test input,
- 3 light beam codings available,
- Muting via external module
- Muting via external module
6XSSO\YROWDJH
c 24 V ± 20%, 2 A
c 24 V ± 20%, 2 A
7\SHUHIHUHQFHV
XUS LPpppp
;86/1*&pppp;86/1*'pppp
3DJHV
3/119
3/127
10
3/86
3DFNDJLQJFRQYH\RUV\VWHPVPDWHULDOVKDQGOLQJZDUHKRXVLQJVWRFNLQJHWF
%RG\SURWHFWLRQ
1
Light curtains, type 2
Single-beam, infrared transmission, light curtains (Preventa™ safety monitoring module + 1 to 4
thru-beam photo-electric sensors)
Type 2 model, relay outputs (N.O.)
2
3
4
IEC 60947-1, EN 61496-1, EN 60825-1, UL 508,
type 2 (ESPE) conforming to IEC 61496-1 and 2
Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment
directive 89/655/EEC and EMC directive 89/336/EEC
EN 60825-1 (emission class 1)
5
CE type approval BIA/Cologne. UL, CSA
IP 67
Ø of sensors: 18 mm
29.5 to 47.2 in. (750 to 1200 mm) (1 to 4 light beams)
6
26.2 ft (8 m)
< 20 ms (sensors + safety module)
7
Solid-state PNP
Preventa™ safety module XPS CM outputs
2 guided contact relays, each 1 N.O.
AC-15: C300, 1800 VA inrush, 180 VA maintained
DC-13: c 24 V/1.5 A, L/R = 50 ms
Maximum thermal current = 2.5 A
8
c 24 V, 20 mA
“Muting” integrated in the safety monitoring module XPS CM
9
Safety module XPS CM: c 24 V (19…29 V)
Sensors XU2S: c 24 V (10…30 V)
10
XU2 Sppppppp + XPS CM
3/140
3/87
General
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Light curtains
3UHVHQWDWLRQ
1
2
The absence of a door or guard reduces the time required for loading, inspection or
adjustment operations as well as making access easier.
'LUHFWLYHVDQGVWDQGDUGV
&RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV
7KHVHOLJKWFXUWDLQVFRQIRUPWR
b European Machinery Safety Directive 98/37/EC and European Work Equipment
Directive 89/655/EEC,
b Low Voltage Directives 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC and also, the Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC,
b Standard EN/IEC 61496-1, EN/IEC 61496-2 (electro-sensitive protection
equipment: ESPE),
b Standard EN 60825 (emission power),
b Standard EN 999/ISO 13855 (installation positioning),
3
4
7KHVHOLJKWFXUWDLQVDUH8/&6$DQG7h9FHUWL¿HG
$SSOLFDWLRQV
0DLQDSSOLFDWLRQV
b Applications for type 2 products:
- assembly and packaging lines,
- conveying and handling lines,
- warehousing and storage systems,
- waste disposal skips.
5
b Types of machine requiring the use of type 4 products:
- presses (all types), shears and trimmers,
- hoisting equipment,
- saws (all types),
- machine tools (lathes, milling machines, machining centers),
- woodworking machines (planing machines, lathes, spindle moulding machines,
side and face milling cutters),
- textile machinery (carding machines, weaving looms, steam rooms),
- assembly machines,
- assembly robots.
6
7
3URWHFWLRQRISHUVRQQHO
Light curtains are electro-sensitive protection equipment (ESPE) designed for the
protection of persons operating or working in the vicinity of machinery, by stopping
the dangerous movement of parts as soon as one of the light beams is broken.
In particular, they provide protection for the VDIHW\RISHUVRQQHO operating
dangerous machinery (annex IV of 98/37/EC) but they are equally suitable for use
with many other types of machines. They make it possible to protect personnel while
allowing free access to machines.
6DIHW\UHTXLUHPHQWV
'HWHFWLRQRIDQRPDOLHV
'HWHFWLRQRIDQRPDOLHVOLDEOHWRFRPSURPLVHVDIHW\DQGVWRSSLQJRIWKH
PDFKLQH
8
The design of the machine and its control system must be to the same level of safety
as that of the light curtain in order to provide the immediate stopping of the machines
dangerous movement as soon as the hazardous zone, protected by the light curtain,
is entered.
9
It must not be possible to enter the protected zone without breaking the protective
light beams. The light curtain must therefore be installed in such a manner that the
light beams cannot be avoided.
The machine can only be restarted if no danger exists and no personnel are present
in the hazardous zone. The risk that persons might be inside the protected zone but
out of the protective light beams must be addressed.
10
3/88
General (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Light curtains
)XQFWLRQV
3URWHFWLRQPRGH
AUTO/MAN (automatic/manual): this is what standard EN/IEC 61496 calls start (or
restart) interlock of the light curtain:
b in AUTO mode: on power-up or after the beams have been cleared, the light
curtain resets itself automatically (closing of the OSSD output safety circuits),
b in MANUAL mode: on power-up or after the beams have been cleared, the light
curtain keeps its output safety circuits in the “open” position. Pressing (and releasing)
the reset button will cause actual resetting of the light curtain (and closing of its
OSSD output safety circuits).
1RWH in all cases, a general start instruction for the machine will trigger its actual
start-up.
1
2
0RQLWRULQJRIH[WHUQDOVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV
Also called EDM (External Devices Monitoring) by standard EN/IEC 61496, this
consists of monitoring the function (open or closed), together with the time taken to
reach that condition, of the machines power switching components.
3
$X[LOLDU\RXWSXW
7KLVLVDORZSRZHUVROLGVWDWHRXWSXWIRUVLJQDOOLQJZKHQFRQ¿JXUDEOH;86/0
XUSLP), to the automation system. This output closes when the light curtain
switches to run mode.
4
$ODUP
This is a low power solid-state output for signalling to the automation system. This
output closes when the light curtain switches to alarm mode.
6LJQDOOLQJ
5
LED display of operating modes and alarm.
$OLJQPHQWDLG
Display by visible infrared LED of each beam broken.
0XWLQJLQKLELWLRQ
When activated, the “muting” function inhibits the detection function of the light
curtain.
Activation (or deactivation) is achieved by means of standard sensors (photo-electric
or other). When activated, a signal is sent to the automation system. This function is
used to allow objects to access the hazardous zones during the process.
Signalling informs the operator or operators that they are not protected.
%ODQNLQJ
This function makes it possible to inhibit detection by a selected group of light beams
in the light curtain (and not all the beams as with muting). This function (adapted to
the size of the objects) allows the presence of objects during process operations.
Blanking effectively increases the Minimum Object Sensitivity (MOS). This imposes
a greater safety distance , increasing the minimum distance between the light curtain
and the hazard. In addition, the use of additional protection each side of the object
present must be included, in order to prevent any intrusion into the free areas.
)ORDWLQJEODQNLQJ
6
7
8
This function makes it possible to inhibit one or two light beams (adjacent or
RWKHUZLVHDQ\ZKHUHLQWKHOLJKWFXUWDLQ7KLVFRQ¿JXUDWLRQLVXVHGIRUH[DPSOHIRU
metal plate feeding applications on folding presses or shears.
%ODQNLQJSOXVÀRDWLQJEODQNLQJ
7KH%ODQNLQJ¿[HGLQKLELWLRQRIOLJKWEHDPVDQG)ORDWLQJ%ODQNLQJPRYLQJLQKLELWLRQ
of one or two light beams) functions can be combined.
9
10
3/89
Characteristics
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety light curtains, type 4
Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and
Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQW\SH
1
XUSLBQ6Apppp
XUSLDMQ6Apppp
LQPP
ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212,
EN/IEC 61496-1 and EN/IEC 61496-2 and IEC 61508-1, 2 (Type 4 ESPE)
&HUWL¿FDWLRQV
e, TUV, UL, CSA
(XURSHDQGLUHFWLYHV
Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and
EMC directive 89/336 EEC
ROHS directive 2002/95/EC
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
Operating
ƒ)ƒ&
14…+ 131 (- 10…+ 55)
For storage
ƒ)ƒ&
- 13…+ 167 (- 25…+ 75)
5HODWLYHKXPLGLW\
95% maximum, without condensation
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
6KRFNDQGYLEUDWLRQ
UHVLVWDQFH
3
XUSLDMY5Appppp
LQPP
(QYLURQPHQWFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
&RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV
2
XUSLBR5Apppp
LQPP
IP 65
Conforming to IEC 61496-1
Shock resistance: 10 gn, impulse 16 ms
Vibration resistance: 10…55 Hz, amplitude: 0.35 ± 0.05 mm
0DWHULDOV
&DVLQJDOXPLQLXPZLWKHOHFWURVWDWLFDOO\DSSOLHGUHG5$/SRO\HVWHUSDLQW¿QLVK
HQGFDSV¿EHUJODVVLPSUHJQDWHGSRO\FDUERQDWH
0RXQWLQJ
End brackets (included)
2SWLFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
0LQLPXPGHWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\026
4
LQPP¿QJHU
1.18 in. (30 mm) (hand)
1RPLQDOVHQVLQJGLVWDQFH6Q
IWP
1…23 (0.3…7) or
9.8 (3) with PDM (1)
1…26.2 (0.3…8) or
65.6 (20) with PDM (1)
3URWHFWHGKHLJKW
LQ
PP
11…53.5 (280…1360)
12.6…83.5 (320…2120)
1…65.6 (0.3…20) or
26.2 (8) with PDM (1)
(IIHFWLYHDSHUWXUHDQJOH($$
2.5° at 9.8ft. (3 m) (3° when used with IP 67 protection tube)
/LJKWVRXUFH
GaAIAs LED, 880 nm
,PPXQLW\WRDPELHQWOLJKW
Conforming to IEC/EN 61496-2
(OHFWULFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
5
5HVSRQVHWLPH
0D[LPXPFXUUHQW
FRQVXPSWLRQQRORDG
6
7
23…32
c 24 V ± 20% 2 A conforming to EN/IEC 61496 and EN/IEC 60204-1
Transmitter
mA
285
Receiver
A
1.8 (with maximum load)
Transmitter
mA
285
Receiver
mA
450
Conforming to EN 61496-1
6DIHW\RXWSXWV266'(Output Signal Switching Devices)
2 solid-state PNP (N/O) outputs y625 mA, c 24 V (Short-circuit protected)
$X[LOLDU\RXWSXW
1 solid-state output 100 mA, c 24 V, PNP or NPN (depending on model)
0RQLWRULQJDFWLYDWLRQRIRXWSXWVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV
03&(('0
50 mA, c 24 V and start/restart 10 mA
6LJQDOOLQJ
Transmitter
1 LED (power supply)
Receiver
4 LEDs (stop, run, interlock, ECS/B Blanking or FB Floating Blanking)
Transmitter
M12, 5-pin, female connector
&RQQHFWLRQV(2)
Light curtains
XPSLCM1
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUVFVD
-XPSHUFDEOHVFVD
Receiver
M12, 8-pin, female connector
Transmitter/Receiver
0SLQIHPDOHFRQQHFWRURQÀ\LQJOHDG
Receiver
M12, 4-pin, female connector
Transmitter/Receiver
22 AWG (0.32 mm2) conductors with M12, 5-pin, male connector
Receiver
22 AWG (0.32 mm2) conductors with M12, 8-pin, male connector
22 AWG (0.32 mm2) conductors with M12, 4-pin, male/female connectors
Transmitter/receiver
&DEOHUHVLVWDQFHRISUHZLUHG Transmitter/receiver
FRQQHFWRUV
&DEOHOHQJWKV
9
23…41
,PPXQLW\WRLQWHUIHUHQFH
Segments XUSLDS
8
PV
3RZHUVXSSO\
1
0.1686 per ft. (0.05531 per m)
Pre-wired connectors with cable lengths of 16.4, 32.8, 49.2, and 98.4 ft (5, 10, 15 and
30 m) are available separately. The maximum cable length is 196.9 ft (60 m),
depending on the load current and power supply.
(1) PDM: Programming and Diagnostic Module, available as option, see page 3/96.
(2) Pre-wired connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/96.
10
Principle:
page 3/88
3/90
Characteristics:
page 3/90
References:
page 3/92
Dimensions:
page 3/98
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/100
Characteristics (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety light curtains, type 4
Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and
Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQW\SH
XUSLBpppppp
XUSLDMppppp
)XQFWLRQV
)XQFWLRQV
Accessible by cabling alone (1)
v
v
v
v
v
Accessible via programming
and diagnostic module
v Auto/Manual
v Monitoring of external switching
devices (EDM: External Device
Monitoring)
v Light beam coding (A or B)
v Sensing distance (short, long)
v Programming and downloading of
FRQ¿JXUDWLRQVHWWLQJVYLDSURJUDPPLQJ
and diagnostic module (PDM)
v Display of operating modes and
anomalies by LED and/or PDM (2)
1
Automatic start
Auxiliary output (PNP, status signalling)
Test (MTS: Monitoring Test Signal)
Alignment aid by display of each light beam broken
LED display of operating modes and anomalies
v Auto/Manual, manual 1st cycle
v Monitoring of external switching
devices (EDM: External Device
Monitoring)
v Blanking (ECS/B)
v Monitored Blanking
v Floating Blanking (FB)
v Reduction of resolution
v Response time (normal, slow)
v Light beam coding (A or B)
v Sensing distance (short, long)
v Auxiliary output (alarm or status
signalling, PNP or NPN)
v Start button (N/O or N/C, 0 V or 24 V)
v Muting (see page 18)
v Cascadable versions with up to 4
segments total (256 light beams max.,
PRGXODU¿QJHUKDQGXVLQJVHJPHQWV
XUSLDS
v Programming and downloading of
FRQ¿JXUDWLRQVHWWLQJVYLDSURJUDPPLQJ
and diagnostic module (PDM)
v Display of operating modes and
anomalies by LED and/or PDM (2)
0RQLWRULQJRIH[WHUQDOVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV
(EDM = External Device Monitoring)
Monitoring of the function (open or closed) as well as the response time of the power
components.
³7HVW´IXQFWLRQ
Instigates the stop instruction of the light curtain by opening the contact (simulated
intrusion)
v With external module XPSLCM1150
v Integrated when using connection
module XPSLCM1 for connecting sensors
and “muting” indicator light
v or with module XPSLCM1150
³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ(inhibition)
2
3
4
5
6
(1) Not requiring use of PDM.
(2) PDM: Programming and Diagnostic Module, available as option, see page 3/96.
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/90
References:
page 3/92
Dimensions:
page 3/98
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/100
3/91
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
References
Safety light curtains, type 4
Light curtains Optimum XUSLB with solid-state output
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRU¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ(1)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP
RUIWPZLWK3'0
b 2 PNP safety outputs
1
3URWHFWHG
KHLJKW
LQPP
2
3
XUSLBQ6Apppp
4
5HVSRQVH
WLPH
1XPEHURI
OLJKWEHDPV
$X[LOLDU\ 5HIHUHQFH
RXWSXW
(2)
:HLJKW
PV
OENJ
11 (280)
23
24
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0280
3.95 (1.790)
12.6 (320)
23
32
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0320
4.34 (1.970)
14.2 (360)
23
36
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0360
4.74 (2.150)
17.3 (440)
23
44
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0440
5.51 (2.500)
20.5 (520)
23
52
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0520
6.33 (2.870)
23.6 (600)
23
60
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0600
7.10 (3.220)
28.3 (720)
32
72
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0720
8.29 (3.760)
29.9 (760)
32
76
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0760
8.69 (3.940)
34.6 (880)
32
88
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0880
9.85 (4.470)
36.2 (920)
32
92
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0920
10.25 (4.650)
37.8 (960)
32
96
PNP
XUSLBQ6A0960
10.65 (4.830)
40.9 (1040)
32
104
PNP
XUSLBQ6A1040
11.44 (5.190)
44.1 (1120)
32
112
PNP
XUSLBQ6A1120
12.21 (5.540)
47.2 (1200)
32
120
PNP
XUSLBQ6A1200
13.01 (5.900)
53.5 (1360)
41
136
PNP
XUSLBQ6A1360
13.62 (6.180)
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRUKDQGSURWHFWLRQ(1)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP
RUIWPZLWK3'0
b 2 PNP safety outputs
5
6
7
XUSLBR5Apppp
8
3URWHFWHG
KHLJKW
5HVSRQVH
WLPH
LQPP
PV
12.6 (320)
23
1XPEHURI
OLJKWEHDPV
$X[LOLDU\ 5HIHUHQFH
RXWSXW
(2)
16
PNP
:HLJKW
OENJ
XUSLBR5A0320
4.34 (1.970)
14.2 (360)
23
18
PNP
XUSLBR5A0360
4.74 (2.150)
17.3 (440)
23
22
PNP
XUSLBR5A0440
5.51 (2.500)
20.5 (520)
23
26
PNP
XUSLBR5A0520
6.33 (2.870)
23.6 (600)
23
30
PNP
XUSLBR5A0600
7.10 (3.220)
26.8 (680)
23
34
PNP
XUSLBR5A0680
7.89 (3.580)
29.9 (760)
23
38
PNP
XUSLBR5A0760
8.69 (3.940)
34.6 (880)
23
44
PNP
XUSLBR5A0880
9.85 (4.470)
36.2 (920)
23
46
PNP
XUSLBR5A0920
10.25 (4.650)
40.9 (1040)
23
52
PNP
XUSLBR5A1040
11.44 (5.190)
47.2 (1200)
23
60
PNP
XUSLBR5A1200
13.01 (5.900)
53.5 (1360)
23
68
PNP
XUSLBR5A1360
14.59 (6.620)
55.1 (1400)
23
70
PNP
XUSLBR5A1400
14.99 (6.800)
59.8 (1520)
32
76
PNP
XUSLBR5A1520
16.16 (7.330)
61.4 (1560)
32
78
PNP
XUSLBR5A1560
16.53 (7.500)
64.6 (1640)
32
82
PNP
XUSLBR5A1640
17.35 (7.870)
67.7 (1720)
32
86
PNP
XUSLBR5A1720
18.14 (8.230)
70.9 (1800)
32
88
PNP
XUSLBR5A1800
18.94 (8.590)
75.6 (1920)
32
96
PNP
XUSLBR5A1920
20.11 (9.120)
83.5 (2120)
32
106
PNP
XUSLBR5A2120 22.09 (10.020)
(1) Supplied with a test rod, 2 sets of 2 brackets with mounting hardware, user guide with
FHUWL¿FDWHRIFRQIRUPLW\RQ&'520DQGDUFVXSSUHVVRUVHW
Programming and Diagnostic Module (if required) and pre-wired connectors to be
ordered separately, see page 3/96.
(2) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLBR5A0320 becomes XUSLBR5A0320R for the receiver only.
To order a transmitter only, add the letter T to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLBR5A0320 becomes XUSLBR5A0320T for the transmitter only.
9
10
2WKHUYHUVLRQV
Combining type 4 safety light curtains with external module for
muting function (see page 2/218)..
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH
Principle:
page 3/88
3/92
Characteristics:
page 3/90
References:
page 3/92
Dimensions:
page 3/98
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/100
References (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety light curtains, type 4
Light curtains Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRU¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ(1)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP
RUIWPZLWK3'0
b 2 PNP safety outputs
3URWHFWHG 5HVSRQVHWLPH
KHLJKW
1RUPDO Slow
LQPP
11 (280)
XUSLDMQpppp
PV
PV
23
38
1XPEHU
RIOLJKW
EHDPV
$X[LOLDU\
RXWSXW
5HIHUHQFH
(2)
24
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0280
1
:HLJKW
OENJ
3.95 (1.790)
12.6 (320)
23
38
32
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0320
4.34 (1.970)
14.2 (360)
23
38
36
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0360
4.74 (2.150)
17.3 (440)
23
38
44
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0440
5.51 (2.500)
20.5 (520)
23
38
52
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0520
6.39 (2.900)
23.6 (600)
23
38
60
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0600
7.10 (3.220)
28.3 (720)
32
53
72
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0720
8.29 (3.760)
29.9 (760)
32
53
76
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0760
8.69 (3.940)
34.6 (880)
32
53
88
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0880
9.85 (4.470)
36.2 (920)
32
53
92
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0920 10.25 (4.650)
37.8 (960)
32
53
96
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A0960 10.65 (4.830)
40.9 (1040) 32
53
104
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A1040 11.44 (5.190)
44.1 (1120) 32
53
112
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A1120 12.21 (5.540)
47.2 (1200) 32
53
120
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A1200 13.01 (5.900)
53.5 (1360) 41
68
136
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMQ6A1360 14.59 (6.620)
2
3
4
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRUKDQGSURWHFWLRQ(1)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP
RUIWPZLWK3'0
b 2 PNP safety outputs
3URWHFWHG 5HVSRQVHWLPH
KHLJKW
1RUPDO Slow
XUSLDMYpppp
LQPP
PV
12.6 (320)
23
1XPEHU $X[LOLDU\
RIOLJKW RXWSXW
EHDPV
5HIHUHQFH
(2)
16
XUSLDMY5A0320
:HLJKW
OENJ
38
PNP/NPN
4.34 (1.970)
14.2 (360)
23
38
18
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A0360
4.74 (2.150)
17.3 (440)
23
38
22
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A0440
5.51 (2.500)
20.5 (520)
23
38
26
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A0520
6.33 (2.870)
23.6 (600)
23
38
30
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A0600
7.10 (3.220)
26.8 (680)
23
38
34
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A0680
7.89 (3.580)
29.9 (760)
23
38
38
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A0760
8.69 (3.940)
34.6 (880)
23
38
44
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A0880
9.85 (4.470)
36.2 (920)
23
38
46
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A0920
10.25 (4.650)
40.9 (1040) 23
38
52
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A1040
11.44 (5.190)
47.2 (1200) 23
38
60
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A1200
13.01 (5.900)
53.5 (1360) 23
38
68
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A1360
14.59 (6.620)
55.1 (1400) 23
38
70
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A1400
14.99 (6.800)
59.8 (1520) 32
53
76
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A1520
16.16 (7.330)
61.4 (1560) 32
53
78
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A1560
16.53 (7.500)
64.6 (1640) 32
53
82
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A1640
17.35 (7.870)
67.7 (1720) 32
53
86
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A1720
18.14 (8.230)
70.9 (1800) 32
53
88
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A1800
18.94 (8.590)
20.11 (9.120)
75.6 (1920) 32
53
96
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A1920
83.5 (2120) 32
53
106
PNP/NPN
XUSLDMY5A2120 22.09 (10.020)
(1) Supplied with a test rod, 2 sets of 2 brackets with mounting hardware, user guide with
FHUWL¿FDWHRIFRQIRUPLW\RQ&'520DQGDUFVXSSUHVVRUVHW
Programming and Diagnostic Module (if required) and pre-wired connectors to be
ordered separately, see page 3/96.
(2) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLDMY5A0320 becomes XUSLDMY5A0320R for the receiver only.
To order a transmitter only, add the letter T to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLDMY5A0320 becomes XUSLDMY5A0320T for the transmitter only.
2WKHUYHUVLRQV
Combining type 4 safety light curtains with external module
for muting function (see page 2/218).
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/90
References:
page 3/92
5
Dimensions:
page 3/98
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/100
3/93
6
7
8
9
10
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Presentation
Safety light curtains, type 4
Segments XUSLDS for Universal XUSLDM light curtains
6HJPHQWVIRUFDVFDGDEOH8QLYHUVDOOLJKWFXUWDLQV
Cascadable versions with up to 4 segments total (256 light beams max., modular
¿QJHUKDQGXVLQJVHJPHQWV;86/'6
1
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQRIVHJPHQWV;86/'6
7ZRVHJPHQWV
1XPEHURIOLJKWEHDPV
5HVSRQVHWLPH
PV
2
0 to 65
23
66 to 120
32
121 to 174
41
175 to 229
50
230 to 256
59
7KUHHVHJPHQWV
3
1XPEHURIOLJKWEHDPV
5HVSRQVHWLPH
PV
XUSLDM + XUSLDS
4
0 to 59
23
60 to 114
32
115 to 168
41
169 to 223
50
224 to 256
59
)RXUVHJPHQWV
1XPEHURIOLJKWEHDPV
5HVSRQVHWLPH
PV
5
0 to 53
23
54 to 108
32
109 to 162
41
163 to 217
50
218 to 256
59
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
3/94
Characteristics:
page 3/90
References:
page 3/92
Dimensions:
page 3/98
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/100
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
References
Safety light curtains, type 4
Segments XUSLDS for Universal XUSLDM light curtains
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRU¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ(1)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHGHSHQGLQJRQ
;86/'0OLJKWFXUWDLQXVHG
b Segments for cascadable Universal light curtains (2)
3URWHFWHG
KHLJKW
1XPEHURI
OLJKWEHDPV
5HIHUHQFH
(3)
24
XUSLDSQ6A0280
:HLJKW
LQPP
11 (280)
XUSLDSQ6Apppp
1
OENJ
3.95 (1.790)
12.6 (320)
32
XUSLDSQ6A0320
4.34 (1.970)
14.2 (360)
36
XUSLDSQ6A0360
4.74 (2.150)
17.3 (440)
44
XUSLDSQ6A0440
5.51 (2.500)
20.5 (520)
52
XUSLDSQ6A0520
6.33 (2.870)
23.6 (600)
60
XUSLDSQ6A0600
7.10 (3.220)
28.3 (720)
72
XUSLDSQ6A0720
8.29 (3.760)
29.9 (760)
76
XUSLDSQ6A0760
8.69 (3.940)
34.6 (880)
88
XUSLDSQ6A0880
9.85 (4.470)
36.2 (920)
92
XUSLDSQ6A0920
10.25 (4.650)
10.65 (4.830)
37.8 (960)
96
XUSLDSQ6A0960
40.9 (1040)
104
XUSLDSQ6A1040
11.44 (5.190)
44.1 (1120)
112
XUSLDSQ6A1120
12.21 (5.540)
47.2 (1200)
120
XUSLDSQ6A1200
13.01 (5.900)
2
3
4
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRUKDQGSURWHFWLRQ(1)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHGHSHQGLQJRQ;86/'0
OLJKWFXUWDLQXVHG
b Segments for cascadable Universal light curtains (2)
3URWHFWHG
KHLJKW
1XPEHURI
OLJKWEHDPV
5HIHUHQFH
(3)
16
XUSLDSY5A0320
:HLJKW
LQPP
12.6 (320)
XUSLDSY5Apppp
OENJ
14.2 (360)
18
XUSLDSY5A0360
4.74 (2.150)
17.3 (440)
22
XUSLDSY5A0440
5.51 (2.500)
20.5 (520)
26
XUSLDSY5A0520
6.33 (2.870)
23.6 (600)
30
XUSLDSY5A0600
7.10 (3.220)
26.8 (680)
34
XUSLDSY5A0680
7.89 (3.580)
29.9 (760)
38
XUSLDSY5A0760
8.69 (3.940)
34.6 (880)
44
XUSLDSY5A0880
9.85 (4.470)
36.2 (920)
46
XUSLDSY5A0920
10.25 (4.650)
40.9 (1040)
52
XUSLDSY5A1040
11.44 (5.190)
47.2 (1200)
60
XUSLDSY5A1200
13.01 (5.900)
53.5 (1360)
68
XUSLDSY5A1360
14.59 (6.620)
55.1 (1400)
70
XUSLDSY5A1400
14.99 (6.800)
59.8 (1520)
76
XUSLDSY5A1520
16.16 (7.330)
61.4 (1560)
78
XUSLDSY5A1560
16.53 (7.500)
64.6 (1640)
82
XUSLDSY5A1640
17.35 (7.870)
67.7 (1720)
86
XUSLDSY5A1720
18.14 (8.230)
18.94 (8.590)
70.9 (1800)
88
XUSLDSY5A1800
75.6 (1920)
96
XUSLDSY5A1920
20.11 (9.120)
83.5 (2120)
106
XUSLDSY5A2120
22.09 (10.020)
(1) Supplied with 2 sets of 2 brackets and hardware.
Jumper cables to be ordered separately, see 3/96.
(2) The segments are to be connected to the M12 4-pin connector on top of the XUSLDM light
curtains.
(3) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLDSY5A0320 becomes XUSLDSY5A0320R for the receiver only.
To order a transmitter only, add the letter T to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLDSY5A0320 becomes XUSLDSY5A0320T for the transmitter
only.
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/90
References:
page 3/92
Dimensions:
page 3/98
5
4.34 (1.970)
6
7
8
9
10
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/100
3/95
References (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
0
Safety light curtains, type 4
Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and
Universal XUSLDM/LDS with solid-state output
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWV
3RZHUVXSSOLHVƒPLUURUDGDSWRUVSURWHFWLYHFRYHUVDQWLYLEUDWLRQNLW
PRXQWLQJEDVHVODVHUDOLJQPHQWWRRO
1
3/97 and 3/130 to 3/137.
$FFHVVRULHV
'HVFULSWLRQ
)RUXVHZLWK
/HQJWK
5HIHUHQFH
IWP
2
3
563528
XUSLPDM
3URJUDPPLQJDQG
'LDJQRVWLF0RGXOH3'0
Light curtains
XUSLB/LDM
+ROGHUPRXQW
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUV
IRUOLJKWFXUWDLQV
;86/%;86/'0
4
XSZ BCTpp
XSZ BCRpp
-XPSHUFDEOHV
IRUVHJPHQWV;86/'6
M12 male/female,
4-pin, straight
0.62 (0.280)
Programming and –
diagnostic module
XUSLPDM
XUSLZPDM
0.09 (0.040)
Transmitter type
Transmitter type
5
Receiver type
6
-XPSHUVIRUUHSODFHPHQWRI
OLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/7E\
XUSLB or XUSLDM
9
XSZBCT05
0.86 (0.390)
32.8 (10) XSZBCT10
1.52 (0.690)
49.2 (15) XSZBCT15
2.27 (1.030)
98.4 (30) XSZBCT30
4.25 (1.930)
16.4 (5)
XSZBCR05
0.99 (0.450)
32.8 (10) XSZBCR10
1.72 (0.780)
49.2 (15) XSZBCR15
2.43 (1.100)
98.4 (30) XSZBCR30
5.03 (2.280)
XSZDCT003
0.11 (0.050)
1.6 (0.5) XSZDCT005
1 (0.3)
0.15 (0.070)
3.3 (1)
XSZDCT010
0.24 (0.110)
6.6 (2)
XSZDCT020
0.46 (0.210)
9.9 (3)
XSZDCT030
0.66 (0.300)
16.4 (5)
XSZDCT050
1.08 (0.490)
32.8 (10) XSZDCT100
2.09 (0.950)
1 (0.3)
XSZDCR003
0.11 (0.050)
1.6 (0.5) XSZDCR005
0.15 (0.070)
3.3 (1)
XSZDCR010
0.24 (0.110)
6.6 (2)
XSZDCR020
0.46 (0.210)
9.9 (3)
XSZDCR030
0.66 (0.300)
16.4 (5)
XSZDCR050
1.08 (0.490)
32.8 (10) XSZDCR100
2.12 (0.960)
XSZTBDMCT003 0.13 (0.060)
Receiver type Male/ 1 (0.3)
Female
8 pins
XSZTBDMCR003 0.13 (0.060)
)RUXVHZLWK
8QLWUHIHUHQFH
5HSODFHPHQWFDSV
IRU0FRQQHFWRU
6ROGLQORWVRI
Light curtains XUSLDM
and segments XUSLDS
XUSLZ600
0.002
(0.001)
5HSODFHPHQWFDSV
IRU0FRQQHFWRU
(programming and diagnostic
module XUSLPDM connection
to light curtains)
6ROGLQORWVRI
Light curtains XUSLB/LDM
and segments XUSLDS
XUSLZ610
0.02
(0.010)
PRXQWLQJNLW(2 brackets)
Light curtains XUSLB/LDM
and segments XUSLDS
XUSLZ228
0.22
(0.100)
6OLGLQJQXWV(4 nuts)
for rear or side mounting with
XUSLZ228
Light curtains XUSLB/LDM
XUSLZ330
0.09
(0.040)
$UFVXSSUHVVRU(pair)
All types of light curtain
XUSLZ500
0.04
(0.020)
'HVFULSWLRQ
Transmitter type
Male/Female
5 pins
16.4 (5)
1 (0.3)
7
8
OENJ
XUSLPDM
Receiver type
–
,3SURWHFWLRQWXEH
(see page 3/97)
8VHUJXLGHRQ
CD-ROM
10
3/96
:HLJKW
:HLJKW
OENJ
–
All types of light curtain
XUSLZ450
0.02
(0.010)
&RQQHFWLRQPRGXOHIRUVHQVRUV Light curtains XUSLDM
DQG0XWLQJLQGLFDWRUOLJKW
(see page 3/104)
XPSLCM1
0.42
(0.190)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Characteristics,
references
0
Safety light curtains, type 4
Protection tubes for light curtains with solid-state output
XUSLB/XUSLDM and segments XUSLDS
,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHVIRUOLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/%;86/'0
DQGVHJPHQWV;86/'6
XUSLZD7pppp
1
(QYLURQPHQWFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
$LUWHPSHUDWXUH
For operation
ƒ)ƒ&
32...+ 104 (0...+ 40)
For storage
ƒ)ƒ&
- 13...+ 158 (- 25...+ 70)
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
IP 67 conforming to IEC 60529
0DWHULDO
Acrylic
6HQVLQJGLVWDQFH (Sn)UHGXFWLRQFRHI¿FLHQW
0.90
2
(QYLURQPHQWDOFKHPLFDOV
&KHPLFDOUHVLVWDQFH
Aliphatic hydrocarbons
Resistant
Alkalis
3
Aqueous solutions
Detergents and cleaners
Inorganic diluted acids
Chlorinated or aromatic hydrocarbons
Limited resistance
Esters
Ketones
(QYLURQPHQWDO
UHVLVWDQFH
Adverse weather, sunlight (UV)
4
Resistant
Humidity
Immersion in water
5HIHUHQFHVRI,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHV
108048
'HVFULSWLRQ
+HLJKW
LQPP
5HIHUHQFH
,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHVIRU
XUSLpp6A0280
;86/%/'0WUDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHU XUSLpppA0320
SDLUDQGVHJPHQWV
XUSLpppA0360
XUSLDSppp
11.2 (284.4)
XUSLZD70280
5.84 (2.650)
12.8 (324.8)
XUSLZD70320
6.19 (2.810)
14.4 (364.5)
XUSLZD70360
6.53 (2.960)
6Q (1)
6ROGLQORWVRI
XUSLpppA0440
17.5 (443.9)
XUSLZD70440
7.21 (3.270)
XUSLpppA0520
20.6 (523.4)
XUSLZD70520
7.89 (3.580)
XUSLpppA0600
23.8 (604.1)
XUSLZD70600
8.58 (3.890)
XUSLpp5A0680
26.9 (683.6)
XUSLZD70680
9.24 (4.190)
XUSLpp6A0720
28.5 (724)
XUSLZD70720
9.59 (4.350)
XUSLpppA0760
30 (763)
XUSLZD70760
9.92 (4.500)
XUSLpppA0880
34.8 (882.8)
XUSLZD70880
10.93 (4.960)
XUSLpppA0920
36.3 (922.5)
XUSLZD70920
11.28 (5.120)
XUSLpp6A0960
37.9 (963.6)
XUSLZD70960
11.62 (5.270)
XUSLpppA1040
41.1 (1042.9)
XUSLZD71040
12.30 (5.580)
XUSLpp6A1120
44.2 (1122.3)
XUSLZD71120
12.99 (5.890)
XUSLpppA1200
47.4 (1203.8)
XUSLZD71200
13.67 (6.200)
XUSLpppA1360
53.6 (1362)
XUSLZD71360
15.01 (6.810)
XUSLpp5A1400
55.2 (1401.7)
XUSLZD71400
15.37 (6.970)
XUSLZD7ppp
)RUXVHZLWK
:HLJKW
OENJ
XUSLpp5A1520
59.9 (1521.5)
XUSLZD71520
16.38 (7.430)
XUSLpp5A1560
61.5 (1563.3)
XUSLZD71560
16.71 (7.580)
XUSLpp5A1640
64.6 (1641.3)
XUSLZD71640
17.89 (7.890)
XUSLpp5A1720
67.7 (1720.8)
XUSLZD71720
18.08 (8.200)
XUSLpp5A1800
71 (1802.9)
XUSLZD71800
18.76 (8.510)
XUSLpp5A1920
75.7 (1922.8)
XUSLZD71920
19.78 (8.970)
XUSLpp5A2120
83.5 (2120.7)
XUSLZD72120
21.47 (9.740)
5
6
7
8
9
6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHUHGXFWLRQFRHI¿FLHQWWREHWDNHQLQWRDFFRXQWIRUHDFKSDLURI,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHVXVHG
10
Characteristics::
page 3/97
References:
page 3/97
Dimensions:
page 3/99
3/97
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
3UHYHQWDŒ
Dimensions
Safety light curtains, type 4
Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and
Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQV
1
3URJUDPPLQJDQG
GLDJQRVWLFPRGXOH
XUSLB
2.08
52.8
XUSLDM
1.93
(1)
2.08
49.1
52.8
2.31
2.31
58.6
58.6
XUSLPDM
1.93
(1)
49.1
2.56
2.31
2.31
58.6
58.6
65
0.06...0.2
2
1.46
1.55
39.4
2.07
1.46
1.55
37.2
39.4
1.50
1.5...5
5.16
53
37.2
131
1.50
38
38
1.97
1.97
50
b
b1
H
b
H
b1
50
3
2.28
2.28
58
58
1.46
1.46
37.2
37.2
4
3.04
3.04
77.3
77.3
(3)
1.50
(2)
38.1
(3)
1.50
(2)
38.1
2.42
2.42
61.5
61.5
2.33
2.33
59.3
5
59.3
2.33
2.33
59.2
59.2
Dual Dimensions:
90°
XUS
6
7
8
9
10
b
90°
b1
H
3URWHFWHG
KHLJKW
XUS
b
INCHES
Millimieters
b1
H
3URWHFWHG
KHLJKW
LBppp0280
11.2 (284.4)
16.6 (420.4)
15 (381.7)
11 (280)
LDMpp0280
11.2 (284.4)
16.6 (420.4)
15 (381.7)
11 (280)
LBppp0320
12.8 (324.8)
18.1 (460.8)
16.6 (422.1)
12.6 (320)
LDMpp0320
12.8 (324.8)
18.1 (460.8)
16.6 (422.1)
12.6 (320)
LBppp0360
14.4 (364.5)
19.7 (500.5)
18.2 (461.8)
14.2 (360)
LDMpp0360
14.4 (364.5)
19.7 (500.5)
18.2 (461.8)
14.2 (360)
LBppp0440
17.5 (443.9)
22.8 (579.9)
21.3 (541.2)
17.3 (440)
LDMpp0440
17.5 (443.9)
22.8 (579.9)
21.3 (541.2)
17.3 (440)
LBppp0520
20.6 (523.4)
26 (659.4)
24.4 (620.7)
20.5 (520)
LDMpp0520
20.6 (523.4)
26 (659.4)
24.4 (620.7)
20.5 (520)
LBppp0600
23.8 (604.1)
29.1 (740.1)
27.6 (701.4)
23.6 (600)
LDMpp0600
23.8 (604.1)
29.1 (740.1)
27.6 (701.4)
23.6 (600)
LBppp0680
26.9 (683.6)
32.3 (819.6)
30.7 (780.9)
26.8 (680)
LDMpp0680
26.9 (683.6)
32.3 (819.6)
30.7 (780.9)
26.8 (680)
LBppp0720
28.5 (724)
33.9 (860)
32.3 (821.3)
28.3 (720)
LDMpp0720
28.5 (724)
33.9 (860)
32.3 (821.3)
28.3 (720)
LBppp0760
30 (763)
35.4 (899)
33.9 (860.3)
29.9 (760)
LDMpp0760
30 (763)
35.4 (899)
33.9 (860.3)
29.9 (760)
LBppp0880
34.8 (882.8)
40.1 (1018.8) 38.6 (980.1)
34.6 (880)
LDMpp0880
34.8 (882.8)
40.1 (1018.8)
38.6 (980.1)
34.6 (880)
LBppp0920
36.3 (922.5)
41.7 (1058.5) 40.1 (1019.8) 36.2 (920)
LDMpp0920
36.3 (922.5)
41.7 (1058.5)
40.1 (1019.8)
36.2 (920)
LBppp0960
37.9 (963.6)
43.3 (1099.6) 41.8 (1060.9) 37.8 (960)
LDMpp0960
37.9 (963.6)
43.3 (1099.6)
41.8 (1060.9)
37.8 (960)
LBppp1040
41.1 (1042.9)
46.4 (1178.9)
LDMpp1040
41.1 (1042.9) 46.4 (1178.9)
44.9 (1140.2)
40.9 (1040)
LBppp1120
44.2 (1122.3)
49.5 (1258.3) 48 (1219.6)
44.1 (1120)
LDMpp1120
44.2 (1122.3) 49.5 (1258.3)
48 (1219.6)
44.1 (1120)
LBppp1200
47.4 (1203.8)
52.7 (1339.8) 51.2 (1301.1) 47.2 (1200)
LDMpp1200
47.4 (1203.8) 52.7 (1339.8)
51.2 (1301.1)
47.2 (1200)
LBppp1360
53.6 (1362)
59 (1498)
LDMpp1360
53.6 (1362)
57.5 (1459.3)
53.5 (1360)
LBppp1400
55.2 (1401.7)
60.5 (1537.7) 59 (1499)
55.1 (1400)
LDMpp1400
55.2 (1401.7) 60.5 (1537.7)
59 (1499)
55.1 (1400)
LBppp1520
59.9 (1521.5)
65.3 (1657.5) 63.7 (1618.8) 59.8 (1520)
LDMpp1520
59.9 (1521.5) 65.3 (1657.5)
63.7 (1618.8)
59.8 (1520)
LBppp1560
61.5 (1563.3)
66.9 (1699.3) 65.4 (1660.6) 61.4 (1560)
LDMpp1560
61.5 (1563.3) 66.9 (1699.3)
65.4 (1660.6)
61.4 (1560)
LBppp1640
64.6 (1641.3)
70 (1777.3)
68.4 (1738.6) 64.6 (1640)
LDMpp1640
64.6 (1641.3) 70 (1777.3)
68.4 (1738.6)
64.6 (1640)
LBppp1720
67.7 (1720.8)
73.1 (1856.8) 71.6 (1818.1) 67.7 (1720)
LDMpp1720
67.7 (1720.8) 73.1 (1856.8)
71.6 (1818.1)
67.7 (1720)
LBppp1800
71 (1802.9)
76.3 (1938.9) 74.8 (1900.2) 70.9 (1800)
LDMpp1800
71 (1802.9)
76.3 (1938.9)
74.8 (1900.2)
70.9 (1800)
LBppp1920
75.7 (1922.8)
81.1 (2058.8) 79.5 (2020.1) 75.6 (1920)
LDMpp1920
75.7 (1922.8) 81.1 (2058.8)
79.5 (2020.1)
75.6 (1920)
LBppp2120
83.5 (2120.7)
88.8 (2256.7) 87.3 (2217.3) 83.5 (2120)
LDMpp2120
83.5 (2120.7) 88.8 (2256.7)
87.3 (2217.3)
83.5 (2120)
44.9 (1140.2) 40.9 (1040)
57.5 (1459.3) 53.5 (1360)
59 (1498)
(1) 2 elongated holes 0.73 x 0.27 in (18.5 x 6.8 mm).
(2) 4 elongated holes 0.91 x 0.27 in (23.2 x 6.8 mm).
(3) M12 male connector on 10.6 in. (0.27 m) pigtail.
Principle:
page 3/88
3/98
Characteristics:
page 3/90
References:
page 3/90
Dimensions:
page 3/98
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/100
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
3UHYHQWDŒ
Dimensions (continued)
Safety light curtains, type 4
Segments XUSLDS for Universal XUSLDM light curtains
Protection tube
&DVFDGDEOHVHJPHQWV
XUSLDS
XUSLDS
1.55
XUS
39.4
2.31
15.8 (401.5)
15 (381.7)
14.3 (363.1) 11 (280)
16.6 (422.1)
15.9 (403.5) 12.6 (320)
LDSppp0360 14.4 (364.5)
19.7 (500.5)
19 (482)
18.2 (461.8)
17.4 (443.2) 14.2 (360)
LDSppp0440 17.5 (443.9)
22.8 (579.9)
22.1 (561.4)
21.3 (541.2)
20.6 (522.6) 17.3 (440)
LDSppp0520 20.6 (523.4)
26 (659.4)
25.2 (640.9)
24.4 (620.7)
23.7 (602.1) 20.5 (520)
LDSppp0600 23.8 (604.1)
29.1 (740.1)
28.4 (721.6)
27.6 (701.4)
26.9 (682.8) 23.6 (600)
LDSppp0680 26.9 (683.6)
32.3 (819.6)
31.5 (801.1)
30.7 (780.9)
30 (762.3)
LDSppp0720 28.5 (724)
33.9 (860)
33.1 (841.5)
32.3 (821.3)
31.6 (802.7) 28.3 (720)
LDSppp0760 30 (763)
35.4 (899)
34.7 (880.5)
33.9 (860.3)
33.1 (841.7) 29.9 (760)
LDSppp0880 34.8 (882.8)
40.1 (1018.8) 39.4 (1000.3)
38.6 (980.1)
37.9 (961.5) 34.6 (880)
2.31
LDSppp0920 36.3 (922.5)
41.7 (1058.5) 40.9 (1040)
40.1 (1019.8) 39.4 (1001.2) 36.2 (920)
58.8
LDSppp0960 37.9 (963.6)
43.3 (1099.6) 42.6 (1081.1)
41.8 (1060.9) 41 (1042.3)
b
b2
38
(1)
58.8
1.55
39.4
b
XUSLDM
b1
3URWHFWHG
KHLJKW
17.4 (442.3)
2.31
H
H1
16.6 (420.4)
39.4
58
H
18.1 (460.8)
1.55
2.28
b2
LDSppp0320 12.8 (324.8)
1.5
H1
50
b1
LDSppp0280 11.2 (284.4)
58.8
1.97
b
37.8 (960)
44.9 (1140.2) 44.2 (1121.6) 40.9 (1040)
LDSppp1120 44.2 (1122.3) 49.5 (1258.3) 48.8 (1239.8)
48 (1219.6)
LDSppp1200 47.4 (1203.8) 52.7 (1339.8) 52 (1321.3)
51.2 (1301.1) 50.5 (1282.5) 47.2 (1200)
LDSppp1360 53.6 (1362)
57.5 (1459.3) 56.7 (1440.7) 53.5 (1360)
59 (1498)
58.2 (1479.5)
3
44.1 (1120)
LDSppp1400 55.2 (1401.7) 60.5 (1537.7) 59.8 (1519.2)
59 (1499)
3.04
LDSppp1520 59.9 (1521.5) 65.3 (1657.5) 64.5 (1639)
63.7 (1618.8) 63 (1600.2)
77.3
LDSppp1560 61.5 (1563.3) 66.9 (1699.3) 66.2 (1680.8)
65.4 (1660.6) 66.1 (1679.2) 61.4 (1560)
LDSppp1640 64.6 (1641.3) 70 (1777.3)
68.4 (1738.6) 67.7 (1720)
69.2 (1758.8)
2
26.8 (680)
LDSppp1040 41.1 (1042.9) 46.4 (1178.9) 45.7 (1160.4)
47.3 (1201)
1
58.3 (1480.4) 55.1 (1400)
59.8 (1520)
4
64.6 (1640)
LDSppp1720 67.7 (1720.8) 73.1 (1856.8) 72.4 (1838.3)
71.6 (1818.1) 70.8 (1799.5) 67.7 (1720)
LDSppp1800 71 (1802.9)
76.3 (1938.9) 75.6 (1920.4)
74.8 (1900.2) 74.1 (1881.6) 70.9 (1800)
LDSppp1920 75.7 (1922.8) 81.1 (2058.8) 80.3 (2040.3)
79.5 (2020.1) 78.8 (2001.5) 75.6 (1920)
LDSppp2120 83.5 (2120.7) 88.8 (2256.7) 88.1 (2237.5)
87.3 (2217.3) 86.6 (2198.7) 83.5 (2120)
5
(1) Flexible 4.33 in (0.11 m) long cable.
3URWHFWLRQWXEHIRUOLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/%;86/'0DQGVHJPHQWV;86/'6
XUSLZD7pppp
4.40
6
111.5
2.05
Ø0.28
Ø7
52.1
4.51
114.5
3.25
4.07
82.5
7
1.04
26.5
b
Ø80
b1
Ø3.15
103.5
1.46
37
XUS
3.66
2.83
LZD70280
93
72
4.09
104
4.86
123.5
5.43
138
3.88
98.5
Dual Dimensions:
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/90
b
b1
11.2 (284.4)
19.8 (502.8)
XUS
LZD71040
b
b1
41.1 (1042.9)
49.7 (1261.3)
LZD70320
12.8 (324.8)
21.4 (543.2)
LZD71120
44.2 (1122.3)
52.8 (1340.7)
LZD70360
14.4 (364.5)
22.9 (582.9)
LZD71200
47.4 (1203.8)
56 (1422.2)
LZD70440
17.5 (443.9)
26.1 (662.3)
LZD71360
53.6 (1362)
62.2 (1580.4)
LZD70520
20.6 (523.4)
29.2 (741.8)
LZD71400
55.2 (1401.7)
63.8 (1620.1)
LZD70600
23.8 (604.1)
32.4 (822.5)
LZD71520
59.9 (1521.5)
68.5 (1739.9)
LZD70680
26.9 (683.6)
35.5 (902)
LZD71560
61.5 (1563.3)
70.1 (1781.7)
LZD70720
28.5 (724)
37.1 (942.4)
LZD71640
64.6 (1641.3)
73.2 (1859.2)
LZD70760
30 (763)
38.6 (981.4)
LZD71720
67.7 (1720.8)
76.3 (1939.2)
LZD70880
34.8 (882.8)
43.4 (1101.2)
LZD71800
71 (1802.9)
79.6 (2021.2)
LZD70920
36.3 (922.5)
44.9 (1140.9)
LZD71920
75.7 (1922.8)
84.3 (2141.2)
LZD70960
37.9 (963.6)
46.5 (1182)
LZD72120
83.5 (2120.7)
92.1 (2338.4)
INCHES
8
9
10
Millimieters
References:
page 3/92
Dimensions:
page 3/98
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/100
3/99
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams
Safety light curtains, type 4
Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and
Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output
'LUHFWFRQQHFWLRQZLWK;86/%/'0ppp
N
1
L
F1
Earth
N
L
2
(1)
GND
Earth 0 V 24 V
0 V 24 V MPCE/EDM Start
AUX
K1
To PLC (2)
(3)
3
4
7UDQVPLWWHU;86/%/'0
5HFHLYHU;86/%/'0
Power supply
Start
NC
K2
OSSD1
GND
OSSD2
0 V 24 V
MTS
MTS Ret
Test
K1
K2
(4)
(4)
(1) For testing prior to installation, the user can select MPCE/EDM OFF (default factory setting). In this case, the MPCE/EDM line
must be connected to the 0 V line of the system.
(2) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional).
(3) If remote start is not used, connect the start line to the 0 V line.
(4) The K1 and K2 coils must be protected using the arc suppressors included in the documentation kit.
Note: Relays K1 and K2 must have mechanically linked contacts.
5
&RQQHFWLRQYLDD3UHYHQWDŒ;36$)/PRGXOH
Control panel
L
K3
N
L
F1
6
A1
C8 C7
F3
Start
K4
S33
S34
F4
13
S39
23
33
Control circuit
XPS AFL
GND
N
L
T
Power supply
K1
K3
K2
K4
Logic
7
A2
GND 0 V 24 V
S11
S12
S11 S22
14
K3
To PLC (1)
24
34
K4
N
Test
8
GND 0 V 24 V MPCE/EDM
Start
AUX
OSSD1
GND
OSSD2
5HFHLYHU;86/%/'0 (2)
0 V 24 V
MTS
MTS Ret
7UDQVPLWWHU;86/%/'0
9
(1) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional).
7KHOLJKWFXUWDLQPXVWEHFRQ¿JXUHGZLWK03&(('02))DQGZLWKDXWRPDWLFVWDUW
10
Note: Relays K1 and K2 must have mechanically linked contacts.
Principle:
page 3/88
3/100
Characteristics:
page 3/90
References:
page 3/92
Dimensions:
page 3/98
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/100
Wiring diagrams (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety light curtains, type 4
Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and
Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output
7UDQVPLWWHU
7UDQVPLWWHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWRU
MTS (1)
BK
1
WH
BU
c0V
1
OK
7UDQVPLWWHUFRQQHFWRU
MTS return (1)
BN
c + 24 V
GR
2
1 Yellow LED
(1) Light curtain test input.
5HFHLYHU
5HFHLYHUFRQQHFWRU
3
5HFHLYHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWRU
Start
YE
MPCE/EDM
RD
Auxiliary
output
OSSD2
WH
GR
PK
BN
BU
c + 24 V
BK
4
1
2
3-4
c0V
OSSD1
5
1 Blanking: Orange LED
2 Interlock or Alarm: Yellow LED
3 - 4 Machine run: Green LED
Machine stop: Red LED
3URJUDPPLQJDQGGLDJQRVWLFPRGXOH
'HVFULSWLRQDQGFRQQHFWLRQWROLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/%/'0
6
XUSLPDM
1
ENTER
7
2
XUS LPDM
8
1 Screen
2 Navigation button for displaying menus and
selecting functions
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/90
References:
page 3/92
Dimensions:
page 3/98
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/100
3/101
Substitution table
Light curtains with closest
functionalities
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety light curtains, type 4
Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and
Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQV2SWLPXP
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP
1
2
3
4
Old light curtain
XUSLTQ6A0260, XUSLTQ6B0260
1HZOLJKWFXUWDLQ
XUSLBQ6A0280
XUSLTQ6A0350, XUSLTQ6B0350
XUSLBQ6A0320, XUSLBQ6A0360
XUSLTQ6A0435, XUSLTQ6B0435
XUSLBQ6A0440
XUSLTQ6A0520, XUSLTQ6B0520
XUSLBQ6A0520
XUSLTQ6A0610, XUSLTQ6B0610
XUSLBQ6A0600
XUSLTQ6A0700, XUSLTQ6B0700
XUSLBQ6A0720
XUSLTQ6A0785, XUSLTQ6B0785
XUSLBQ6A0760
XUSLTQ6A0870, XUSLTQ6B0870
XUSLBQ6A0880, XUSLBQ6A0920
XUSLTQ6A0955, XUSLTQ6B0955
XUSLBQ6A0960
XUSLTQ6A1045, XUSLTQ6B1045
XUSLBQ6A1040
XUSLTQ6A1130, XUSLTQ6B1130
XUSLBQ6A1120
XUSLTQ6A1215, XUSLTQ6B1215
XUSLBQ6A1200
XUSLTQ6A1305, XUSLTQ6B1390,
XUSLTQ6A1390, XUSLTQ6B1390
XUSLBQ6A1360
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP
5
6
7
8
Old light curtain
1HZOLJKWFXUWDLQ
XUSLTR5A0350, XUSLTR5B0350
XUSLBR5A0320, XUSLBR5A0360,
XUSLBR5A0440
XUSLTR5A0520, XUSLTR5B0520
XUSLBR5A0520, XUSLBR5A0600
XUSLTR5A0700, XUSLTR5B0700
XUSLBR5A0680, XUSLBR5A0760
XUSLTR5A0870, XUSLTR5A0870,
XUSLBR5A0880, XUSLBR5A0920
XUSLTR5A1045, XUSLTR5B1045
XUSLBR5A1040
XUSLTR5A1215, XUSLTR5B1215
XUSLBR5A1200, XUSLBR5A1360
XUSLTR5A1390, XUSLTR5B1390
XUSLBR5A1400, XUSLBR5A1520
XUSLTR5A1570, XUSLTR5B1570
XUSLBR5A1560, XUSLBR5A1640
XUSLTR5A1745, XUSLTR5B1745
XUSLBR5A1720, XUSLBR5A1800
XUSLTR5A1920, XUSLTR5B1920
XUSLBR5A1920
XUSLTR5A2095, XUSLTR5B2095
XUSLBR5A2120
Note: the characteristics of the ranges (optics, connections, dimensions, mounting, functions,
etc.) are not exactly the same.
Please refer to the detailed characteristics of the XUSLBppppppp and XUSLDppppppp
ranges and associated accessories when replacing a light curtain from
the XUSLTppppppp range.
9
10
3/102
Substitution table
Light curtains with closest
functionalities
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Safety light curtains, type 4
Light curtains Optimum XUSLB and
Universal XUSLDM with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQV8QLYHUVDO
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP
XUSLTY5A0520, XUSLTY5B0520
1HZOLJKWFXUWDLQ
XUSLDMY5A0320, XUSLDMY5A0360,
XUSLDMY5A0440
XUSLDMY5A0520, XUSLDMY5A0600
XUSLTY5A0700, XUSLTY5B0700
XUSLDMY5A0680, XUSLDMY5A0760
XUSLTY5A0870, XUSLTY5B0870
XUSLDMY5A0880, XUSLDMY5A0920
XUSLTY5A1045, XUSLTY5B1045
XUSLDMY5A1040
XUSLTY5A1215, XUSLTY5B1215
XUSLDMY5A1200, XUSLDMY5A1360
XUSLTY5A1390, XUSLTY5B1390
XUSLDMY5A1400, XUSLDMY5A1520
XUSLTY5A1570, XUSLTY5B1570
XUSLDMY5A1560, XUSLDMY5A1640
XUSLTY5A1745, XUSLTY5B1745
XUSLDMY5A1720, XUSLDMY5A1800
XUSLTY5A1920, XUSLTY5B1920
XUSLDMY5A1920
XUSLTY5A2095, XUSLTY5B2095
XUSLDMY5A2120
Old light curtain
XUSLTY5A0350, XUSLTY5B0350
Note: Caution, the characteristics of the ranges (optics, connections, dimensions, mounting,
functions, etc.) are not exactly the same.
Please refer to the detailed characteristics of the XUSLBppppppp and XUSLDppppppp
ranges and associated accessories when replacing a light curtain from
the XUSLTppppppp range.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3/103
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Operating principle
1
Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1
For “muting” function on light curtains
type XUSLDM
c + 24 V
Sensors
1
“Muting”
indicator light
2
When the system is switched on by the start command and the light curtain
protection not interrupted, the main circuit is closed by the safety outputs of the
XUSLDM light curtain (solid-state safety outputs). In addition to the safety outputs,
the light curtain incorporates signalling LEDs and an auxiliary output (alarm or status
signalling) for sending system status information to the PLC. Four LEDs on the light
curtain and one on the front face of connection module XPSLCM1 provide
information on the safety circuit status.
3
$QLQWHUUXSWLRQRIWKHSURWHFWLRQ¿HOGPRQLWRUHGE\WKHHOHFWURVHQVLWLYHSURWHFWLRQ
equipment causes instantaneous opening of the safety outputs; the process PLC
receives a stop command and the LED display mounted on the front face indicates
the change of state of the safety circuits. The “open” state is maintained until the light
EHDPVDUHXQREVWUXFWHGDQGLILQFOXGHGLQWKHOLJKWFXUWDLQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQWKH6WDUW
key switch operated.
Receiver
Transmitter
4
The “muting” function cannot be activated by supplying the “muting” sensors unless
the safety outputs have been closed beforehand. To trigger the “muting” function, the
³PXWLQJ´GHYLFHVPXVWEHDFWLYDWHGZLWKLQWKHFRQ¿JXUDEOHWLPHLQWHUYDO
(50 milliseconds to 5 seconds in increments of 50 milliseconds). During the activated
³PXWLQJ´SKDVHPDWHULDOVFDQEHWUDQVSRUWHGWKURXJKWKHSURWHFWLRQ¿HOGZLWKRXW
deactivating the safety outputs. In the event of intrusion into the hazardous zone, a
person cannot activate the “muting” sensors in the same way and the system stops.
While the “muting” function is activated, a “muting” status indicator light is controlled
by the connection module XPSLCM1. A fault at indicator light level (short-circuit,
open circuit) is immediately recognized and deactivates the “muting” function. The
indicator light only illuminates when a “muting” signal is generated and indicates the
inhibition of the protection function.
5
6
“Muting”
indication
Entry direction
7
Hazardous
zone
ESPE
(Light curtain)
m
A
D
B
C
Materials trolley
Materials trolley
dM
8
2SHUDWLQJSULQFLSOH
Universal XUSLDM light curtains have an integrated “muting” function that is
FRQ¿JXUDEOHXVLQJWKHSURJUDPPLQJDQGGLDJQRVWLFPRGXOH;86/3'07KLV
function enables the automatic passage of parts for machining or loaded pallets,
without interrupting the transportation movement within the zone protected by the
electro-sensitive protection equipment (ESPE) system. In addition to the safety light
curtain, a connection module XPSLCM1, which is connected directly to the top of the
light curtain receiver, enables the cabling of 2 to 4 “muting” sensors as well as an
LQGLFDWRUOLJKW,QWKHHYHQWRIDVHTXHQFHHUURUWKH³PXWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWÀDVKHV
(1 second interval) and turning the Start key switch off and back on restarts the
system.
&RQGLWLRQVWREHREVHUYHGIRUWKH³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ
b The “muting” sensors must either be
v thru-beam: XUK 0ARCTL2 (sensing distance 98.4 ft (30 m)) + XUK 0ARCTL2T
v SRODULVHGUHÀH[;8.$5&7/VHQVLQJGLVWDQFHIWPUHÀHFWRU;8=&
or mechanical limit switches with contacts.
b dM )m to obtain continuous validation of the “muting” function.
b Avoid the intrusion of persons during the “muting” phase. This phase is indicated
by the indicator light connected to the “muting” indicator output of connection
module XPSLCM1.
b A materials trolley must provide the “muting” signal before entering the protection
¿HOGDQGFHDVHLWRQFHLWKDVFOHDUHGDOOWKHVHQVRUVRIWKHSURWHFWLRQ¿HOGRQH[LWLQJ
ESPE: electro-sensitive protection equipment (light curtain).
A, B, D, C: “muting” sensors.
m: trolley length and dM = distance between A, B and D, C.
9
10
Principle:
page 3/104
3/104
Characteristics:
page 3/105
References:
page 3/106
Dimensions:
page 3/106
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/107
Characteristics
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
1
Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1
For “muting” function on light curtains
type XUSLDM
&KDUDFWHULVWLFV
&RQQHFWLRQPRGXOHW\SH
&HUWL¿FDWLRQV
3URGXFWGHVLJQHGIRUPD[
XVHLQVDIHW\UHODWHGSDUWV
RIFRQWUROV\VWHPV
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
conforming to IEC 529
XPSLCM1
For operation
For storage
1
e, TÜV, CSA, UL
Category 4
Conforming to
EN 954-1/ISO 13849-1
ƒ)ƒ&
ƒ)ƒ&
Terminals
Enclosure
32…+ 131 (0…+ 55)
- 13…+ 167 (- 25…+ 75)
2
IP 20
IP 20
3RZHUVXSSO\E\OLJKWFXUWDLQ Voltage
XUSLDM
Maximum current
0D[LPXPFRQVXPSWLRQ
V
mA
W
c 24 (- 20…+ 20
30
0.7
5DWHGLQVXODWLRQYROWDJH(Ui)
V
500
5DWHGLPSXOVHZLWKVWDQGYROWDJH(Uimp)
6KRFNUHVLVWDQFH
Conforming to IEC 68-2-6
9LEUDWLRQUHVLVWDQFH
Conforming to IEC 68-2-29
1XPEHURIOLJKWFXUWDLQVWKDWFDQEHFRQQHFWHG
,QSXWVIRU³PXWLQJ´VHQVRUV
- number of inputs to be monitored
- supply voltage of sensors
- output current of each sensor
7\SHRI³PXWLQJ´VHQVRUV
6\QFKURQL]DWLRQWLPHRI³PXWLQJ´VHQVRUV
0D[LPXP³PXWLQJ´WLPH
6DIHW\RXWSXWV
- number and type
- breaking capacity of outputs
³0XWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWRXWSXW
³0XWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWSRZHU
³0XWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWW\SH
6LJQDOOLQJ
N9
JQ
JQ
1.1
6 (10...55 Hz)
10 (16 ms)
1 transmitter-receiver pair
&RQQHFWLRQ
1-wire connection
2-wire connection
Type
Without cable end
With cable end
With cable end
Without cable end
Without cable end
V
mA
PV
PLQ
mA
W
3
2 to 4 per “muting” function
c 24
< 20
7KUXEHDPSRODUL]HGUHÀH[RUVHQVRUVZLWKYROWIUHHFRQWDFWV
WRFRQ¿JXUDEOHLQOLJKWFXUWDLQ;86/'0LQLQFUHPHQWVRIPV
2 or unlimited
4
2 PNP (terminals 1 and 2)
30 V/100
1 NPN
1 to 7 max.
/('RU¿ODPHQWEXOE
1 LED
5
Captive screw clamp terminals, non removable
6ROLGRUÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*PP2)
:LWKRXWEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*PP2)
:LWKEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*PP2)
:LWKRXWEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*PP2)
'RXEOHZLWKEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*PP2)
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/104
Characteristics:
page 3/105
References:
page 3/106
Dimensions:
page 3/106
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/107
3/105
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Description,
references,
dimensions
1
Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1
For “muting” function on light curtains
type XUSLDM
'HVFULSWLRQ
XPSLCM1
To aid diagnostics, the connection module has 1 LED on the front face 1.
1
Lamp
PE
+VDC 0VDC
RET +RS
1
Status
2
S3S1 S2S4
5HIHUHQFHV
3
&RQQHFWLRQPRGXOH
'HVFULSWLRQ
&RQQHFWLRQ
PRGXOHIRU
³PXWLQJ´
IXQFWLRQ
4
7\SHRI
WHUPLQDO
EORFN
FRQQHFWLRQ
Non removable
6XSSO\
³0XWLQJ´
LQGLFDWRUOLJKW
RXWSXW
5HIHUHQFH
c 24 V
XPSLCM1
1 NPN
:HLJKW
R]NJ
6.70
(0.190)
6SDUHSDUWV
'HVFULSWLRQ
5
6
Power
W
5HIHUHQFH
³0XWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWNLW(1) 5
XSZCM01
5HSODFHPHQWEXOEVIRU
³PXWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWNLW
comprising one lot of 10
replacement bulbs and
1 removal/insertion tool
XBF X13
XSZCM02
1 to 7
:HLJKW
R]NJ
0.42
(0.012)
0.56
(0.016)
;9%RU;9'ZLWKVWHDG\OLJKW/('RU¿ODPHQWEXOEFDQDOVREHXVHG
'LPHQVLRQV
XPSLCM1
Mounting on 35 mm rail
7
Lamp
PE
+VDC 0VDC
RET +RS
3.9
Status
99.1
S3S1 S2S4
8
4.5
.9
114.3
22.5
³0XWLQJ´LQGLFDWRUOLJKWNLW;6=&0
9
.43
11
1.7
44
1.2
31
Ø.70
10
Ø18
(1)
Dual Dimensions:
(1) Faston connector 4.7.
Principle:
page 3/104
3/106
Characteristics:
page 3/105
References:
page 3/106
Dimensions:
page 3/106
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/107
INCHES
Millimieters
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams
1
Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1
For “muting” function on light curtains
type XUSLDM
&RQQHFWLRQRIOLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/'0ZLWKFRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH;36/&0
([DPSOHFRQ¿JXUDWLRQZLWKOLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/'0
N
1
L
F1
N
L
7UDQVPLWWHU;86/'0
5HFHLYHU;86/'0
2
ABL 8RPS
Dedicated
power supply
(1)
0V
24 V
GND 0 V
24 V MPCE/EDM Start AUX OSSD1
OSSD2
GND
0V
K1
(3)
K2
6WDUW
NC
3
7HVW
To PLC
(2)
K1
24 V MTS MTS Ret.
Rer
K2
(4)
(4)
OG
4
BN
c+V
BU
S1-In
+
Sensor A’
PNP
dark switching
–
BK A
5
OG
BR
XPS LCM1
BU Return
S1-In
BN
BU
–RS485
S1-In
6
OG
S1-In
Sensor B’
PNP
light switching
–
BK A
WH
+RS485
+
OG
BN
BU
+
Sensor C’
PNP
dark switching
–
BK A
Lamp
Shield
7
OG
BK
BN
GND
BU
+
–
BK A
Sensor D’
PNP
light switching
“Muting”
indicator light
8
(1) For testing prior to installation, the user can select MPCE/EDM OFF (default factory setting). In this case, the MPCE/EDM line must be connected to the 0 V line
of the system.
(2) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional).
(3) If remote start is not used, connect the start line to the 0 V line.
(4) The K1 and K2 coils must be protected using the arc suppressors included in the documentation kit.
9
10
Principle:
page 3/104
Characteristics:
page 3/105
References:
page 3/106
Dimensions:
page 3/106
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/107
3/107
Functional diagrams
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1
For “muting” function on light curtains
type XUSLDM
)XQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPRIOLJKWFXUWDLQ;86/'0ZLWKFRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH;36/&0
1
³6WDUWUHVWDUWLQWHUORFN´PRGHZLWKVHQVRUV
Power supply
,QKLELWLRQPLQ«’
1 Light curtain
interrupted
1 Light curtain
interrupted
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQRIPRGXOH
t 50…500 ms
t<3s
t < 1 ms
t < 1 ms
Connection module alarm
2
EDM/MPCE
Inputs
Start (1)
“Muting” sensor 1
3
Channel 1
inputs
“Muting” sensor 2
OSSD
OSSD
4
Outputs
M-lamp
OSSD
5
OSSD
Outputs
Auxiliary
Auxiliary PNP
Alarm
Auxiliary
Auxiliary PNP
Alarm
6
(1) Press Start button.
2YHUULGHIXQFWLRQ
After 10 minutes
7
st
1 Sensor
2nd Sensor
“Muting” indicator
light
OSSD 1
OSSD 2
8
Start
Key
0
1
9
10
Principle:
page 3/104
3/108
Characteristics:
page 3/105
References:
page 3/106
Dimensions:
page 3/106
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/107
1
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Functional diagrams
1
Connection module Preventa™ XPSLCM1
For “muting” function on light curtains
type XUSLDM
(continued)
)XQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPRIOLJKWFXUWDLQ;86/'0ZLWKFRQQHFWLRQPRGXOH;36/&0
³6WDUWUHVWDUWLQWHUORFN´PRGHZLWKVHQVRUV
1
Inhibition : < 10 minutes
Power supply
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQRIPRGXOH
1 Light curtain
interrupted
1 Light curtain
interrupted
t<3s
t<3s
t < 1 ms
Connection module alarm
2
EDM/MPCE
Inputs
Start (1)
3
“Muting” sensor 1
“Muting” sensor 2
Channel 1
inputs
“Muting” sensor 3
“Muting” sensor 4
4
OSSD 1A
OSSD 1B
Outputs
M-lamp 1
5
OSSD A
OSSD B
Outputs
Auxiliary
Auxiliary PNP
Alarm
6
Auxiliary
Auxiliary PNP
Alarm
7
(1) Press Start button.
2YHUULGHIXQFWLRQ
After 10 minutes
1st Sensor
2nd Sensor
8
3rd Sensor
4th Sensor
“Muting” indicator
light
OSSD 1
OSSD 2
9
Start
Key 0
1
10
Principle:
page 3/104
Characteristics:
page 3/105
References:
page 3/106
Dimensions:
page 3/106
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/107
3/109
Characteristics
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LT with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQW\SH
1
XUSLTQ6pppp
LQPP
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
3
4
5HODWLYHKXPLGLW\
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
6KRFNDQGYLEUDWLRQ
UHVLVWDQFH
0DWHULDOV
Operating
For storage
6
7
ƒ)ƒ&
ƒ)ƒ&
Conforming to IEC 61496-1
0RXQWLQJV
2SWLFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
LQPP ¿QJHU
IWP
1 to 24.6 ft. (0.3 to 7.5 m)
3URWHFWHGKHLJKW
(IIHFWLYHDSHUWXUHDQJOH($$
/LJKWVRXUFH
,PPXQLW\WRDPELHQWOLJKW
LQPP 10.2 to 54.7 (260 to 1390) 13.8 to 82.5 (350 to 2095)
2.5° at 3 m (3° when used with IP 67 protection tube)
GaAIAs LED, 850 nm
Conforming to IEC/EN 61496-2
0D[LPXPFXUUHQWSRZHU
FRQVXPSWLRQQRORDG
PV
Transmitter
Receiver
Transmitter
Receiver
,PPXQLW\WRLQWHUIHUHQFH
6DIHW\RXWSXWV266'(Output Signal Switching Devices)
$ODUPRXWSXW
0RQLWRULQJDFWLYDWLRQRIRXWSXWVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV
03&(('0
6LJQDOOLQJ
Transmitter
Receiver
&RQQHFWLRQV(1)
Transmitter
Receiver
&RQGXFWRU
Transmitter
Receiver
&DEOHUHVLVWDQFH
Transmitter
Receiver
mA
A
mA
mA
1 to 65 ft. (0.3 to to 20 m)
20…40
20…35
c 24 V ± 20% 2 A conforming to EN/IEC 61496 and EN/IEC 60204-1
285
1.4 (with maximum load)
285
300
Conforming to EN 61496-1
2 solid-state PNP (N.O.) outputs )500 mA, c 24 V (Short-circuit protected)
1 solid-state output 100 mA, c 24 V, PNP or NPN depending on model
50 mA, c 24 V
$:*
(mm2)
$:*
(mm2)
1
1
IWP
7LJKWHQLQJWRUTXH
1 LED (power supply)
4 LEDs (stop, run, interlock, ECS/B Blanking or FB Floating Blanking)
M12, 5-pin, male connector on 9.8 in. (0.25 m) pigtail
M12, 8-pin, male connector on 9.8 in. (0.25 m) pigtail
22 (0.34). Tinned wires.
Power supply and output signals: 20 (0.5) (white, orange and yellow wires); 22 AWG
(0.34) (grey, pink and violet wires). Tinned wires.
0.169 per ft (0.056 per m) for 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) wire
0.012 per ft. (0.039 per m) for 22 AWG (0.50 mm2) wire
Pre-wired connectors with shielded (60% coverage) cable lengths of 32.8, 49.2, and
98.4 ft (5, 10, and 30 m) are available separately. The maximum cable length is 196.8
ft. (60 m), depending on the load current and power supply.
Receiver end cap assembly screw: 8 lb-in. (0.9 Nm)
)XQFWLRQV
)XQFWLRQV
9
0RQLWRULQJRIH[WHUQDOVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV
(EDM = External Devices Monitoring)
³7HVW´IXQFWLRQ
10
1.18 (30) (hand)
1 to 29.5 ft. (0.3 to 9 m)
(OHFWULFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
&DEOHOHQJWKV
8
ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212, EN/
IEC 61496-1 and EN/IEC 61496-2 (Type 4)
e, TUV, UL, CSA
Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC
directive 89/336 EEC
+ 32…+ 131 (0…+ 55)
- 13…+ 167 (- 25…+ 75)
95% maximum, without condensation
IP 65
Shock resistance: 10 gn, impulse 16 ms,
Vibration resistance: 10…55 Hz, amplitude: 0.35 ± 0.05 mm
&DVLQJDOXPLQLXPZLWKHOHFWURVWDWLFDOO\DSSOLHGUHG5$/SRO\HVWHUSDLQW¿QLVK
HQGFDSV¿EHUJODVVLPSUHJQDWHGSRO\FDUERQDWH
End brackets (included)
0LQLPXPGHWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\
1RPLQDOVHQVLQJGLVWDQFH(Sn)
5HVSRQVHWLPH
3RZHUVXSSO\
5
XUSLTY5ppppp
LQPP
(QYLURQPHQWDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
&RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV
&HUWL¿FDWLRQV
(XURSHDQGLUHFWLYHV
2
XUSLTR5ppppp
LQPP
³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ(inhibition)
(1) Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/112.
Principle:
page 3/88
3/110
Characteristics:
page 3/110
- Auto/Manual, manual 1st cycle,
- Monitoring of external switching devices (EDM: External Devices Monitoring),
- Test (MTS: Monitoring Test Signal),
- Blanking (ECS/B),
- Floating Blanking (FB),
- Alignment aid by display of each light beam broken,
- LED display of operating modes and alarm.
6HOHFWLRQRI$XWR0DQXDOEODQNLQJUHOD\PRQLWRULQJÀRDWLQJEODQNLQJDQGEODQNLQJ
ÀRDWLQJEODQNLQJUHOD\PRQLWRULQJE\FRQ¿JXUDWLRQVZLWFKHV
Monitoring of the function (open or closed) as well as the response time of the power
components.
3DUDPHWHUDEOHXVLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQVZLWFKHV
Instigates the stop instruction of the light curtain by opening the contact (simulated
intrusion)
Possible with external module XPS LCM1150
References:
page 3/111
Dimensions:
page 3/114
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/116
References
Safety detection solutions
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LT with solid-state output
107
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRU¿QJHUSURWHFWLRQ(1)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP
b 2 PNP safety outputs
3URWHFWHG
5HVSRQVH
1XPEHURI
$ODUP
5HIHUHQFH
:HLJKW
KHLJKW
WLPH
OLJKWEHDPV
RXWSXW
(2) (3)
LQPP
PV
OENJ
10.24 (260)
20
24
PNP
XUSLTQ6A0260
8.82 (4.000)
13.78 (350)
20
32
PNP
XUSLTQ6A0350
9.41 (4.270)
17.13 (435)
20
40
PNP
XUSLTQ6A0435
9.99 (4.530)
20.47 (520)
25
48
PNP
XUSLTQ6A0520
10.58 (4.800)
24.02 (610)
25
56
PNP
XUSLTQ6A0610
11.16 (5.060)
27.56 (700)
25
64
PNP
XUSLTQ6A0700
11.75 (5.330)
30.91 (785)
30
72
PNP
XUSLTQ6A0785
12.35 (5.600)
34.25 (870)
30
80
PNP
XUSLTQ6A0870
12.92 (5.860)
37.60 (955)
35
88
PNP
XUSLTQ6A0955
14.82 (6.720)
41.14 (1045)
35
96
PNP
XUSLTQ6A1045
15.41 (6.990)
44.49 (1130)
35
104
PNP
XUSLTQ6A1130
15.98 (7.250)
47.83 (1215)
40
112
PNP
XUSLTQ6A1215
16.58 (7.520)
51.38 (1305)
40
120
PNP
XUSLTQ6A1305
17.15 (7.780)
54.72 (1390)
40
128
PNP
XUSLTQ6A1390
17.75 (8.050)
6XSSOLHGZLWKDWHVWURGVHWVRIEUDFNHWVZLWKPRXQWLQJVDQGDXVHUJXLGHZLWKFHUWL¿FDWHRI
conformity and 1 arc suppressor set.
Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/112.
(2) To order a transmitter-receiver pair with an NPN alarm output, replace the letter A by the letter B in
the reference.
Example: reference XUSLTQ6A0260 becomes XUSLTQ6B0260, with an NPN alarm output.
(3) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding transmitterreceiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLTQ6A0260 becomes XUSLTQ6A0260R for the receiver only.
To order a transmitter only, replace the letter A or B by E and add the letter T to the end of the
reference for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLTQ6A0260 becomes XUSLTQ6E0260T for the transmitter only.
XUSLTQ6Apppp
1
2
3
4
5
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRUKDQGSURWHFWLRQ(1)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP
b 2 PNP safety outputs
107
3URWHFWHG
KHLJKW
LQPP
13.78 (350)
20.47 (520)
27.56 (700)
34.25 (870)
41.14 (1045)
47.83 (1215)
54.72 (1390)
61.81 (1570)
68.70 (1745)
75.59 (1920)
82.48 (2095)
5HVSRQVH
WLPH
PV
20
20
20
20
25
25
25
30
30
35
35
1XPEHURI
OLJKWEHDPV
$ODUP
RXWSXW
5HIHUHQFH
(2) (3)
16
24
32
40
48
56
64
72
80
88
96
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
XUSLTR5A0350
XUSLTR5A0520
XUSLTR5A0700
XUSLTR5A0870
XUSLTR5A1045
XUSLTR5A1215
XUSLTR5A1390
XUSLTR5A1570
XUSLTR5A1745
XUSLTR5A1920
XUSLTR5A2095
:HLJKW
OENJ
9.41 (4.270)
10.58 (4.800)
11.75 (5.330)
12.92 (5.860)
15.41 (6.990)
16.58 (7.520)
17.75 (8.050)
18.92 (8.580)
20.08 (9.110)
21.25 (9.640)
22.40 (10.160)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP
b 2 PNP safety outputs
To order a transmitter-receiver pair with a sensing distance 1 to 65 ft. (0.3 to 20 m) . replace the letter R by Y.
Example: reference XUSLTR5A0350 becomes XUSLTY5A0350, with a sensing distance 1 to 65 ft.
(0.3 to 20 m).
6XSSOLHGZLWKDWHVWURGVHWVRIEUDFNHWVZLWKPRXQWLQJVDQGDXVHUJXLGHZLWKFHUWL¿FDWHRI
conformity and 1 arc suppressor set.
Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/112.
(2) To order a transmitter-receiver pair with an NPN alarm output, replace the letter A by the letter B in the
reference.
Example: reference XUSLTR5A0350 becomes XUSLTR5B0350, with an NPN alarm output.
(3) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding transmitterreceiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLTR5A0350 becomes XUSLTR5A0350R for the receiver only.
To order a transmitter only, replace the letter A or B by E and add the letter T to the end of the
reference for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLTR5A0350 becomes XUSLTR5E0350T for the transmitter only.
2WKHUYHUVLRQV
Combining type 4 light curtains with external module for muting
function (page 2/218).
XUSLTR/Ypppppp
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/110
References:
page 3/111
Dimensions:
page 3/114
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/116
3/111
6
7
8
9
10
References (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LT with solid-state output
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWV
3RZHUVXSSOLHVƒPLUURUDGDSWRUVSURWHFWLYHFRYHUVDQWLYLEUDWLRQNLW
PRXQWLQJEDVHV
1
See pages 3/113 and 3/130 to 3/137
$FFHVVRULHV
'HVFULSWLRQ
0RXQWLQJVNLW(2 brackets)
2
5
3UHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUV
8VDJH
/HQJWK
IWP
For light curtains –
XUS LT
Transmitter type 16.4 (5)
3
Receiver type
XSZ TCTpp
XSZ TCRpp
4
XUSLZ213
XSZ TCT05
32.8 (10)
XSZ TCT10
49.2 (15)
XSZ TCT15
98.4 (30)
XSZ TCT30
16.4 (5)
XSZ TCR05
32.8 (10)
XSZ TCR10
49.2 (15)
XSZ TCR15
98.4 (30)
XSZ TCR30
(QGFDSZLWKFRQQHFWRU
Receiver type
–
XUSLZ222
9DOLGDWLRQNLW
For light curtains –
XUS LT
All types of light –
curtain
XUSLZ100
All types of light
curtain
XUSLZ450
$UFVXSSUHVVRU(pair)
5
5
5HIHUHQFH
3URWHFWLRQWXEH
(see page 3/113)
8VHUJXLGHRQ&'520
–
XUSLZ500
XUZ LZ100
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
3/112
Characteristics:
page 3/110
References:
page 3/111
Dimensions:
page 3/114
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/116
:HLJKW
R]NJ
3.52
(0.100)
12.69
(0.360)
24.34
(0.690)
35.27
(1.000)
68.08
(1.930)
16.23
(0.460)
31.75
(0.900)
45.50
(1.290)
86.07
(2.440)
0.35
(0.010)
0.25
(0.007)
0.71
(0.020)
0.35
(0.010)
Characteristics,
references
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LT with solid-state output
,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHVIRUFRPSDFWOLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/7
XUSLZ7pppp
(QYLURQPHQWDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
$LUWHPSHUDWXUH
1
For operation
ƒ)ƒ&
+ 32…+ 104 (0...+ 40)
For storage
ƒ)ƒ&
- 13…+ 158 (- 25...+ 70)
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
IP 67 conforming to IEC 60529
0DWHULDO
Acrylic
6HQVLQJGLVWDQFH (Sn)
UHGXFWLRQFRHI¿FLHQW
0.90
2
(QYLURQPHQWDOFKHPLFDOV
&KHPLFDOUHVLVWDQFH
(QYLURQPHQWDO
UHVLVWDQFH
Aliphatic hydrocarbons
Alkalis
Aqueous solutions
Detergents and cleaners
Inorganic diluted acids
Chlorinated or aromatic hydrocarbons
Esters
Ketones
Adverse weather, sunlight (UV)
Humidity
Immersion in water
Resistant
3
Limited resistance
Resistant
4
5HIHUHQFHVRI,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHV
'HVFULSWLRQ
+HLJKW
5HIHUHQFH
:HLJKW
LQPP
OENJ
,3SURWHFWLRQWXEHVIRU
XUSLTppp260
10.4
XUSLZ70260
5.95
XUS LTppp
(262.9)
(2.700)
WUDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLU
XUSLTppp350
13.8
XUSLZ70350
5.95
6Q (1)
(350)
(2.700)
(Sold in sets of 2)
XUSLTppp435
17.2
XUSLZ70435
5.95
(436)
(2.700)
XUSLTppp520
20.6
XUSLZ70520
7.05
(523.8)
(3.200)
XUSLTppp610
24.1
XUSLZ70610
7.05
(610.9)
(3.200)
XUSLTppp700
27.5
XUSLZ70700
7.05
(697.7)
(3.200)
XUSLTppp785
30.9
XUSLZ70785
7.05
(784.6)
(3.200)
XUSLTppp870
34.3
XUSLZ70870
7.05
(871.1)
(3.200)
XUSLTppp955
37.7
XUSLZ70955
7.05
(958.6)
(3.200)
XUSLTppp1045
41.2
XUSLZ71045
9.04
(1045.5)
(4.100)
XUSLTppp1130
44.6
XUSLZ71130
9.04
(1132)
(4.100)
XUSLTppp1215
48
XUSLZ71215
9.92
(1219.5)
(4.500)
XUSLTppp1305
51.4
XUSLZ71305
9.92
(1306.3)
(4.500)
XUSLTppp1390
54.9
XUSLZ71390
9.92
(1393.4)
(4.500)
XUSLTppp1570
61.7
XUSLZ71570
14.99
(1567.4)
(6.800)
XUSLTppp1745
68.6
XUSLZ71745
14.99
(1741.4)
(6.800)
XUSLTppp1920
75.4
XUSLZ71920
14.99
(1915.4)
(6.800)
XUSLTppp2095
82.3
XUSLZ72095
14.99
(2089.7)
(6.800)
6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHUHGXFWLRQFRHI¿FLHQWWREHWDNHQLQWRDFFRXQWIRUHDFKSDLURI,3
protection tubes used.
XUS LZ7ppp
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/113
References:
page 3/113
)RUXVHZLWK
Dimensions:
page 3/115
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/116
3/113
5
6
7
8
9
10
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Dimensions
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LT with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQV
XUSLTppp
1
2.33
2.08
59.1
52.8
(1)
1.05
26.7
2
1.45
36.8
1.38
35
1.97
b
b1
3
H
50
XUS
LTppp0260
LTppp0350
LTppp0435
LTppp0520
LTppp0610
LTppp0700
LTppp0785
LTppp0870
LTppp0955
LTppp1045
LTppp1130
LTppp1215
LTppp1305
LTppp1390
LTppp1570
LTppp1745
LTppp1920
LTppp2095
4
1.47
37.3
1.5
5
38.1
0.40
10.2
16°
(2)
6
b
LQPP
10.35 (263)
13.82 (351)
17.24 (438)
20.59 (523)
24.13 (613)
27.56 (700)
30.91 (785)
34.29 (871)
37.71 (958)
41.18 (1046)
44.61 (1133)
47.99 (1219)
51.42 (1306)
54.88 (1394)
61.81 (1570)
68.74 (1746)
75.59 (1920)
82.48 (2095)
b1
LQPP
13.67 (347.3)
17.14 (435.3)
20.56 (522.3)
23.91 (607.3)
27.45 (697.3)
30.88 (784.3)
34.22 (869.3)
37.61 (955.3)
41.04 (1042.3)
44.50 (1130.3)
47.93 (1217.3)
51.31 (1303.3)
54.74 (1390.3)
50.33 (1478.3)
65.13 (1654.3)
72.06 (1830.3)
78.91 (2004.3)
85.80 (2179.3)
H
LQPP
12.87 (327)
16.34 (415)
19.76 (502)
23.11 (587)
26.65 (677)
30.08 (764)
33.43 (849)
36.81 (935)
40.24 (1022)
43.70 (1110)
47.13 (1197)
50.51 (1283)
53.94 (1370)
57.40 (1458)
64.33 (1634)
71.26 (1810)
78.11 (1984)
85.00 (2159)
3URWHFWHGKHLJKW
LQPP
10.24 (260)
13.78 (350)
17.13 (435)
20.47 (520)
24.02 (610)
27.56 (700)
30.91 (785)
34.25 (870)
37.60 (955)
41.14 (1045)
44.49 (1130)
47.83 (1215)
51.38 (1305)
54.72 (1390)
61.81 (1570)
68.70 (1745)
75.59 (1920)
82.48 (2095)
(1) 6 elongated holes .45 x .27 in. (11.45 x 6.75 mm).
(2) M12 male connector on 10.63 in. (0.27 m) pigtail.
Dual Dimensions:
7
INCHES
Millimieters
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
3/114
Characteristics:
page 3/110
References:
page 3/111
Dimensions:
page 3/114
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/116
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Dimensions (continued)
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LT with solid-state output
3URWHFWLRQWXEHIRUFRPSDFWOLJKWFXUWDLQV;86/7
XUSLZ7pppp
1
4.40
111.5
2.00
2.05
Ø0.28
Ø7
52.1
50.7
2.82
71.7
2
0.62
3.2
15.7
82.
Ø3.15
Ø80
b
3
0.83
21.1
3.4
2.21
XUS
88.
56.1
3.04
77.1
LZ70260
LZ70350
LZ70435
LZ70520
LZ70610
LZ70700
LZ70785
LZ70870
LZ70955
b
LQPP
10.35 (263)
13.82 (351)
17.24 (438)
20.59 (523)
24.13 (613)
27.56 (700)
30.91 (785)
34.29 (871)
37.71 (958)
XUS
LZ71045
LZ71130
LZ71215
LZ71305
LZ71390
LZ71570
LZ71745
LZ71920
LZ72095
b
LQPP
41.18 (1046)
44.61 (1133)
47.99 (1219)
51.42 (1306)
54.88 (1394)
61.81 (1570)
68.74 (1746)
75.59 (1920)
82.48 (2095)
4
5
5.43
138
3.88
6
98.5
Dual Dimensions:
INCHES
Millimieters
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/113
References:
page 3/113
Dimensions:
page 3/115
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/116
3/115
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LT with solid-state output
'LUHFWFRQQHFWLRQZLWK;86/7ppp
1
N
F1
GND
2
L
N
L
Power supply
5HFHLYHU;86/7
GND
GND
7UDQVPLWWHU;86/7
(1)
0 V 24 V
0 V 24 V MPCE/EDM Start
AUX
K1
To PLC
OSSD1
GND
OSSD2
0 V 24 V
MTS
MTS Ret
(5)
3
4
Test
(2)
(3)
Start
NC
K2
K1
K2
(4)
(4)
(1) For testing prior to installation, the user can select MPCE/EDM OFF (default factory setting). In this case, the MPCE/EDM line must be connected to the 0 V line
of the system.
(2) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional).
(3) If remote start is not used, connect the start line to the 0 V line.
(4) The MPCE/EDM coils must be protected using the arc suppressors included in the documentation kit.
(5) Connect the 0 V terminal to ground.
Note: There must not be an unshielded connection exceeding 3.3 ft. (1 m) in length (for example: start button, auxiliary outputs, power supply, MPCE/EDM, OSSD1
and OSSD2). Relays K1 and K2 must have mechanically linked contacts.
5
&RQQHFWLRQYLDD3UHYHQWDŒ;36$)/PRGXOH
Control panel
L
K3
N
L
F1
6
A1
C8 C7
F3
Start
K4
S33
S34
F4
13
S39
23
33
Control circuit
XPS AFL
GND
N
L
T
Power supply
K1
K3
K2
K4
Logic
7
A2
GND 0 V 24 V
S11
S12
S11 S22
14
(2)
K3
To PLC (1)
24
34
K4
N
Test
8
GND 0 V 24 V MPCE/EDM
9
10
Start
AUX
OSSD1
GND
OSSD2
0 V 24 V
MTS
MTS Ret
7UDQVPLWWHU;86/7
5HFHLYHU;86/7(3)
(1) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional).
(2) Connect the 0 V terminal to ground.
7KHOLJKWFXUWDLQPXVWEHFRQ¿JXUHGZLWK03&(('02))DQGZLWKDXWRPDWLFVWDUW
Note: There must not be an unshielded connection exceeding 3.3 ft. (1 m) in length (for example: start button, auxiliary outputs, power supply, MPCE/EDM, OSSD1
and OSSD2). Relays K1 and K2 must have mechanically linked contacts.
Principle:
page 3/88
3/116
Characteristics:
page 3/110
References:
page 3/111
Dimensions:
page 3/114
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/116
Wiring diagrams (continued)
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LT with solid-state output
7UDQVPLWWHU
5HPRWHFRQQHFWRURIWUDQVPLWWHU
7UDQVPLWWHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWRU
1
MTS (1)
BU
MTS return (1)
Screening
Non isolated wire
1
BK
2
BN
WH
+ 24 V
0V
1 Yellow LED
(1) Light curtain test input.
3
5HFHLYHU
5HPRWHFRQQHFWRURIUHFHLYHU
5HFHLYHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWRU
1
Start
MPCE/EDM
PK
2
3
4
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQLQGLFDWRU
5
OSSD2
GY
YE
1
VT
Alarm
output
OSSD1
6
P
WH
BN
3
4
5
6
5
6
3
4
1
2
ON
+ 24 V
4
1
2
2
OG
ON
0V
Screening
Non isolated wire
5
3
1 %ODQNLQJRUÀRDWLQJEODQNLQJ
orange LED
2 Interlock or Alarm
yellow LED
3 Connector
4 Machine stop
red LED
5 Machine run
green LED
6 Programming button
1 Switches A
2 Switches B
3 Connector
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/110
References:
page 3/111
Dimensions:
page 3/114
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/116
3/117
Characteristics
Safety detection solutions
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LP with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQW\SH
1
XUSLPpppp
(QYLURQPHQWDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
&RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV
&HUWL¿FDWLRQV
(XURSHDQGLUHFWLYHV
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
2
5HODWLYHKXPLGLW\
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
6KRFNDQGYLEUDWLRQ
UHVLVWDQFH
0DWHULDOV
Operating
For storage
ƒ)ƒ&
ƒ)ƒ&
Conforming to IEC 61496-1
0RXQWLQJV
3
4
ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11:19-1990, OSHA 1910.217(C), OSHA 1910.212, EN/
IEC 61496-1-2 for type 4 ESPE
e, TUV, UL, CSA
Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC
directive 89/336 EEC
+ 32…+ 131 (0…+ 55)
- 13…+ 167 (- 25…+ 75)
95% maximum, without condensation
IP 65 and IP 67
Shock resistance: 10 gn, impulse 16 ms,
Vibration resistance: 10…55 Hz, amplitude: 0.35 ± 0.05 mm
&DVLQJDOXPLQLXPZLWKHOHFWURVWDWLFDOO\DSSOLHGUHG5$/SRO\HVWHUSDLQW¿QLVK
HQGFDSV¿EHUJODVVLPSUHJQDWHGSRO\FDUERQDWH)URQWFRYHUDFU\OLF
End brackets (included)
2SWLFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
0LQLPXPGHWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\
LQ
PP
11.8, 15.7, 19.7, 23.6 (300, 400. 500. 600) and single beam (Body protection)
1RPLQDOVHQVLQJGLVWDQFH(Sn)
IWP
WRRUWRWRRUWRGHSHQGLQJRQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQDQG
2.6 to 26.2 (0.8 to 8) for light curtains with passive receiver
Depending on number of light beams, see table on page 3/123
2.5° at 9.8 ft (3 m)
GaAIAs LED, 850 nm
Conforming to EN/IEC 61496-2
PV
< 16…< 24 depending on light beam coding selected
c 24 V ± 20% 2 A conforming to EN/IEC 61496 and EN/IEC 60204-1
100
1.6 (with maximum load)
100
300
Conforming to EN/IEC 61496-1
2 solid-state PNP (N.O.) outputs )650 mA, c 24 V (Short-circuit protected)
3URWHFWHGKHLJKW
(IIHFWLYHDSHUWXUHDQJOH($$
/LJKWVRXUFH
,PPXQLW\WRDPELHQWOLJKW
(OHFWULFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
5HVSRQVHWLPH
3RZHUVXSSO\
5
6
7
0D[LPXPFXUUHQWSRZHU
FRQVXPSWLRQQRORDG
Transmitter
Receiver
Transmitter
Receiver
,PPXQLW\WRLQWHUIHUHQFH
6DIHW\RXWSXWV266'(Output Signal Switching Devices)
$X[LOLDU\RXWSXW
0RQLWRULQJDFWLYDWLRQRIRXWSXWVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV
03&(('0
6LJQDOOLQJ
Transmitter
Receiver
&RQQHFWLRQV(1)
Transmitter
Receiver
&RQGXFWRU
Transmitter/receiver pre-wired
connector
&DEOHUHVLVWDQFH
Transmitter/receiver
&DEOHOHQJWKV
mA
A
mA
mA
1 solid-state output 100 mA, c 24 V, PNP
50 mA, c 24 V
$:*
(mm2)
1
IWP
1 LED (power supply)
3 LEDs (stop, run, interlock) and a 2-digit display for diagnostics
M12, 5-pin, male connector or terminal block
M12, 8-pin, male connector or terminal block
22 (0.35). Tinned wires.
0.016 per ft. (0.055 per m) for 22 AWG (0.35 mm2) wire
Pre-wired connectors with cable lengths of 16.4, 32.8, 49.2 and 98.4 ft. (5,10, 15, 30
m) are available separately. The maximum cable length is 394 (120), depending on
the load current and power supply.
)XQFWLRQV
)XQFWLRQV
8
9
0RQLWRULQJRIH[WHUQDOVZLWFKLQJGHYLFHV
(EDM = External Devices Monitoring)
³7HVW´IXQFWLRQ
³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ(inhibition)
(1) Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/121
Start:
- Auto/Manual, manual 1st cycle,
- Monitoring of external switching devices (EDM: External Devices Monitoring),
- Test (MTS: Monitoring Test Signal) for XUS LPZ only,
- Alignment aid by display of each light beam broken,
- Display of operating modes and alarm by LEDs and 2-digit display.
Selection of Auto/Manual, relay monitoring, alarm or auxiliary output functions, light
EHDPFRGLQJDQGVHOHFWLRQRIVHQVLQJGLVWDQFHXVLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQVZLWFKHV
Monitoring of the function (open or closed) as well as the response time of the power
components.
3DUDPHWHUDEOHXVLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQVZLWFKHV
Instigates the stop instruction of the light curtain by opening the contact (simulated
intrusion)
Possible with external module XPS LCM1150
10
Principle:
page 3/88
3/118
Characteristics:
page 3/118
References:
page 3/119
Dimensions:
page 3/122
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/124
References
Safety detection solutions
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LP with solid-state output,
with connector
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRUERG\SURWHFWLRQ(1)
1
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP
DQGVLQJOHEHDP
6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWRUWRIWWRPRUWRP
GHSHQGLQJRQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
1
b 2 PNP safety outputs
105561
'HWHFWLRQ
FDSDFLW\
XUSLPZ1AM
XUSLPZ3AppppM
1XPEHURI $X[LOLDU\ 5HIHUHQFH
OLJKWEHDPV RXWSXW
(2)
LQPP
–
5HVSRQVHWLPH
/LJKWEHDPFRGLQJ
A
B
C
PV
PV
PV
< 24 < 20 < 16
1
PNP
XUSLPZ1AM
19.69 (500)
< 24
< 20
< 16
2
PNP
XUSLPZ2A0500M
23.62 (600)
< 24
< 20
< 16
2
PNP
XUSLPZ2A0600M
15.75 (400)
< 24
< 20
< 16
3
PNP
XUSLPZ3A0400M
19.69 (500)
< 24
< 20
< 16
3
PNP
XUSLPZ3A0500M
11.81 (300)
< 24
< 20
< 16
4
PNP
XUSLPZ4A0300M
11.81 (300)
< 24
< 20
< 16
5
PNP
XUSLPZ5A0300M
11.81 (300)
< 24
< 20
< 16
6
PNP
XUSLPZ6A0300M
:HLJKW
OENJ
9.92
(4.500)
13.89
(6.300)
14.77
(6.700)
15.87
(7.200)
18.96
(8.600)
18.08
(8.200)
20.94
(9.500)
22.93
(10.400)
6XSSOLHGZLWKVHWVRIEUDFNHWVZLWKPRXQWLQJVDQGDXVHUJXLGHZLWKFHUWL¿FDWHRI
conformity.
Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/121.
(2) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLPZ2A0600M becomes XUSLPZ2A0600MR for the receiver only.
To order a transmitter only, add the letter T to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLPZ2A0600M becomes XUSLPZ2A0600MT for the transmitter only.
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRUERG\SURWHFWLRQZLWKSDVVLYH
UHFHLYHU(1)
1
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\DQGLQDQGPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFH
WRIWWRP
b 2 PNP safety outputs
'HWHFWLRQ
FDSDFLW\
1XPEHURI $X[LOLDU\ 5HIHUHQFH
OLJKWEHDPV RXWSXW
(2)
LQPP
19.69 (500)
5HVSRQVHWLPH
/LJKWEHDPFRGLQJ
A
B
C
PV
PV
PV
< 24 < 20 < 16
2
PNP
XUSLPB2A500M
23.62 (600)
< 24
2
PNP
XUSLPB2A600M
< 20
< 16
3
4
5
6
:HLJKW
OENJ
13.89
(6.300)
14.77
(6.700)
6XSSOLHGZLWKVHWVRIEUDFNHWVZLWKPRXQWLQJVDQGDXVHUJXLGHZLWKFHUWL¿FDWHRI
conformity.
Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/121.
(2) To order a passive receiver, replace the letter M by the letter P to the end of the reference for
the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLPB2A500M becomes XUSLPB2A500P for the passive receiver.
To order a transmitter only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLPB2A600M becomes XUSLPB2A600MR for the transmitter only.
2WKHUYHUVLRQV
2
Combining type 4 light curtains with external module for muting
function (page 2/218).
7
8
9
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH
10
XUSLPB2pp
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/118
References:
page 3/119
Dimensions:
page 3/122
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/124
3/119
References (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LP with solid-state output,
with terminal block
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUSDLUVIRUERG\SURWHFWLRQ(1)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPPDQGVLQJOH
EHDP
6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWRUWRIWWRPRUWRP
GHSHQGLQJRQFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ
53
1
b 2 PNP safety outputs
'HWHFWLRQ
FDSDFLW\
2
535340
3
4
XUSLPZ1AB
XUSLPZ3AppppB
5
1XPEHURI $X[LOLDU\ 5HIHUHQFH
OLJKWEHDPV RXWSXW
(2)
LQPP
–
5HVSRQVHWLPH
/LJKWEHDPFRGLQJ
A
B
C
PV
PV
PV
< 24 < 20 < 16
1
PNP
XUSLPZ1AB
19.69 (500)
< 24
< 20
< 16
2
PNP
XUSLPZ2A0500B
23.62 (600)
< 24
< 20
< 16
2
PNP
XUSLPZ2A0600B
15.75 (400)
< 24
< 20
< 16
3
PNP
XUSLPZ3A0400B
19.69 (500)
< 24
< 20
< 16
3
PNP
XUSLPZ3A0500B
11.81 (300)
< 24
< 20
< 16
4
PNP
XUSLPZ4A0300B
11.81 (300)
< 24
< 20
< 16
5
PNP
XUSLPZ5A0300B
11.81 (300)
< 24
< 20
< 16
6
PNP
XUSLPZ6A0300B
Combining type 4 light curtains with external module for muting
function (page 2/218).
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWVDQGDFFHVVRULHVSDJH
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
3/120
Characteristics:
page 3/118
OENJ
9.92
(4.500)
13.89
(6.300)
14.77
(6.700)
15.87
(7.200)
18.96
(8.600)
18.08
(8.200)
20.94
(9.500)
22.93
(10.400)
6XSSOLHGZLWKVHWVRIEUDFNHWVZLWKPRXQWLQJVDQGDXVHUJXLGHZLWKFHUWL¿FDWHRI
conformity.
(2) To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLPZ2A0600B becomes XUSLPZ2A0600BR for the receiver only.
To order a transmitter only, add the letter T to the end of the reference for the corresponding
transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUSLPZ2A0600B becomes XUSLPZ2A0600BT for the transmitter only.
2WKHUYHUVLRQV
6
:HLJKW
References:
page 3/119
Dimensions:
page 3/122
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/124
References (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Light curtains, type 4
Accessories for compact light curtains XUS LP
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWV
3RZHUVXSSOLHVƒPLUURUDGDSWRUVSURWHFWLYHFRYHUVDQWLYLEUDWLRQNLW
PRXQWLQJEDVHV
See pages 3/130 to 3/137.
1
$FFHVVRULHV
'HVFULSWLRQ
0RXQWLQJVNLW(2 brackets)
5
3UHZLUHGIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUV
8VDJH
/HQJWK
m
For light curtains –
XUS LP
Transmitter type 16.40 (5)
XUSLZ219
XSZ PCT05
$UFVXSSUHVVRU(pair)
2
0.77
(0.350)
1.54
(0.700)
XSZ PCT10
49.21 (15)
XSZ PCT15
2.25
(1.020)
98.43 (30)
XSZ PCT30
16.40 (5)
XSZ PCR05
4.45
(2.020)
0.77
(0.350)
32.81 (10)
XSZ PCR10
49.21 (15)
XSZ PCR15
98.43 (30)
XSZ PCR30
–
–
XUSLZ320
All types of light
curtain
All types of light
curtain
–
XUSLZ450
–
XUSLZ500
XSZ PCRpp
6OLGLQJQXWVIRUVLGHPRXQWLQJ
(4 nuts)
8VHUJXLGHRQ&'520
:HLJKW
OENJ
0.99
(0.450)
32.81 (10)
Receiver type
XSZ PCTpp
5HIHUHQFH
1.54
(0.700)
2.25
(1.020)
4.45
(2.020)
0.99
(0.450)
0.04
(0.020)
0.04
(0.020)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/118
References:
page 3/119
Dimensions:
page 3/122
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/124
3/121
Dimensions
Safety detection solutions
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LP with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQV
XUS LPZppp
b1
1
b
G
b1
b1
3
b1
G
b
b
G
b1
b1
2
4
5
Ø0.28x0.66
Ø0.28x0.66
Ø0.28x0.66
Ø6.8x16.7
Ø6.8x16.7
Ø6.8x16.7
Ø0.28x0.66
Ø0.28x0.66
Ø6.8x16.7
Ø6.8x16.7
8.31
8.31
211.2
211.2
9.12
231.6
6
2.17
2.08
52.8
8
3.15
80
80
5.13
5.13
130.4
130.4
2.05
2.05
55
7
3.15
XUS
LPZ1Ap
LPZ2A0500p
LPZ2A0600p
LPZ3A0400p
LPZ3A0500p
LPZ4A0300p
LPZ5A0300p
LPZ6A0300p
52
0.40
2.08
10.2
b
LQPP
9.12 (231.6)
28.80 (731.6)
32.74(831.6)
40.61 (1031.6)
48.49 (1231.6)
44.93 (1141.1)
56.36 (1431.6)
68.17 (1731.6)
52.8
b1
LQPP
–
19.69 (500)
23.62 (600)
15.75 (400)
19.69 (500)
11.81 (300)
11.81 (300)
11.81 (300)
52
0.40
10.2
Dual Dimensions:
INCHES
Millimieters
*
LQPP
8.69 (220.7)
28.37 (720.7)
32.31 (820.7)
40.19 (1020.7)
48.06 (1220.7)
44.12 (1120.7)
55.56 (1411.2)
67.37 (1711.2)
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
3/122
Characteristics:
page 3/118
References:
page 3/119
Dimensions:
page 3/122
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/124
Dimensions (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LP with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQV
XUS LPBppp
1
4.33
4.33
110
110
G
b1
G
b
b1
2
3
4.33
4.33
110
110
4
2.17
55
2.89
2.89
73.5
73.5
1.99
1.99
50.52
50.52
Dual Dimensions:
XUS
LPB2A500M
LPB2A600M
b
LQPP
30.75 (781.1)
34.69 (881.1)
b1
LQPP
19.69 (500)
23.62 (600)
INCHES
Millimieters
*
LQPP
29.95 (760.7)
33.89 (860.7)
5
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/118
References:
page 3/119
Dimensions:
page 3/122
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/124
3/123
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LP with solid-state output
'LUHFWFRQQHFWLRQZLWK;86/3ppp
N
L
1
F1
GND
2
N
L
Power supply
5HFHLYHU;86/3=DQGWUDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHU;86/3%
GND 0 V 24 V
GND
(1)
0 V 24 V MPCE/EDM Start
AUX
K1
To PLC
OSSD1
K2
0 V 24 V
MTS
MTS Ret
Test
Start
3
GND
OSSD2
(2)
(3)
4
7UDQVPLWWHU;86/3=
K1
K2
NO
(1) For testing prior to installation, the user can select MPCE/EDM OFF (default factory setting). In this case, the MPCE/EDM line must be connected to the 0 V line
of the system.
(2) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional).
(3) If remote start is not used, connect the start line to the 0 V line.
&RQQHFWLRQYLDD3UHYHQWDŒ;36$)/PRGXOH
Control panel
L
5
K3
N
L
F1
A1
C8 C7
F3
Start
K4
S33
S34
F4
13
S39
23
33
Control circuit
XPS AFL
GND
6
N
L
T
Power supply
K1
K3
K2
K4
Logic
GND 0 V 24 V
A2
7
S11
S12
S11 S22
14
K3
To PLC (1)
24
34
K4
N
Test
8
GND 0 V 24 V MPCE/EDM
Start
AUX
OSSD1
GND
OSSD2
0 V 24 V
MTS
MTS Ret
7UDQVPLWWHU;86/3=
9
5HFHLYHU;86/3=DQGWUDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHU;86/3% (2)
(1) The auxiliary output connects to a PLC (optional).
7KHOLJKWFXUWDLQPXVWEHFRQ¿JXUHGZLWK03&(('02))DQGZLWKDXWRPDWLFVWDUW
10
Principle:
page 3/88
3/124
Characteristics:
page 3/118
References:
page 3/119
Dimensions:
page 3/122
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/124
Wiring diagrams (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Light curtains, type 4
Compact light curtains XUS LP with solid-state output
;86/3=/3%p
7UDQVPLWWHU
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRURIWUDQVPLWWHU;86/3=
MTS return
7UDQVPLWWHUVWDWXV
LQGLFDWRU
MTS
BK
1
3 2 1
2
3
ON
2
WH
1 Yellow LED
c + 24 V
GN
5HFHLYHU
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRURIUHFHLYHU;86/3=DQGSUHZLUHG
FRQQHFWRURIWUDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHU;86/3%
Start
MPCE/EDM
GY
PK
Output
Aux
5HFHLYHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWRU
1 2
3 4
OSSD2
YE
BU
GN
BN
WH
c + 24 V
1
CODE
ON
1
c 0V
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQLQGLFDWRU
XUS LPB
CODE
ON
BU
BN
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQLQGLFDWRU
XUS LPZ
RD
&RQ¿JXUDWLRQLQGLFDWRU
;86/3=DQG;86/3%
1 Interlock or Alarm
yellow LED
2 Machine stop
red LED
3 Machine run
green LED
4 2-digit display
CODE
ON
ON
3
MODE
ON
1
2
3
1 2 3
4
c 0V
OSSD1
5
&RQQHFWLRQWRWHUPLQDOEORFN
&RQQHFWLRQWR0FRQQHFWRU
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/118
References:
page 3/119
Dimensions:
page 3/122
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/124
3/125
Characteristics
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Light curtains, type 2
Slim, compact light curtains XUS LN with solid-state output
/LJKWFXUWDLQW\SH
1
&RQIRUPLW\WRVWDQGDUGV
&HUWL¿FDWLRQV
(XURSHDQGLUHFWLYHV
$PELHQWDLUWHPSHUDWXUH
2
;86/1*ppppLQPP
(QYLURQPHQWDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
5HODWLYHKXPLGLW\
'HJUHHRISURWHFWLRQ
6KRFNDQGYLEUDWLRQ
UHVLVWDQFH
0DWHULDOV
Operating
For storage
ƒ)ƒ&
ƒ)ƒ&
Conforming to IEC 61496-1
0RXQWLQJV
3
4
IEC 61496-1 and IEC 61496-2 (Type 2 ESPE)
e, TUV, UL, CSA
Machinery directive 98/37/EC, Work equipment directive 89/655/EEC and EMC
directive 89/336 EEC
+ 32…+ 131 (0…+ 55)
- 13…+ 167 (- 25…+ 75)
95% maximum, without condensation
IP 65
Shock resistance: 10 gn, impulse 16 ms,
Vibration resistance: 10…55 Hz, amplitude: 0.35 ± 0.05 mm
&DVLQJDOXPLQLXPZLWKHOHFWURVWDWLFDOO\DSSOLHGUHG5$/SRO\HVWHUSDLQW¿QLVK
HQGFDSV¿EHUJODVVLPSUHJQDWHGQ\ORQIURQWFRYHUDFU\OLF
End brackets (included)
2SWLFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
0LQLPXPGHWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\
LQ
PP
1.18 (30) (Hand)
1RPLQDOVHQVLQJGLVWDQFH(Sn)
3URWHFWHGKHLJKW
IWP
LQ
PP
1 to 49.3 (0.3 to 15)
5.29 to 57.87 in. (150 to 1500 mm)
(IIHFWLYHDSHUWXUHDQJOH($$
/LJKWVRXUFH
,PPXQLW\WRDPELHQWOLJKW
5° at 3 m conforming to IEC 61496-1 and IEC 61496-2 (Type 2 ESPE)
GaAIAs LED, 880 nm
Conforming to IEC/EN 61496-2
(OHFWULFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
5HVSRQVHWLPH
3RZHUVXSSO\
5
0D[LPXPFXUUHQWSRZHU
FRQVXPSWLRQQRORDG
6
7
PV
Transmitter
Receiver
Transmitter
Receiver
,PPXQLW\WRLQWHUIHUHQFH
6DIHW\RXWSXWV266'(Output Signal Switching Devices)
6LJQDOOLQJ
Transmitter
Receiver
&RQQHFWLRQV(1)
Transmitter
Receiver
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRUV
Transmitter/Receiver
&DEOHUHVLVWDQFH
&DEOHOHQJWKV
Transmitter/Receiver
mA
A
mA
mA
$:*
(mm2)
1
IWP
14…24
c 24 V ± 20% 2 A conforming to IEC 61496 and IEC 60204-1
(- 10% using the EDM function)
50
1.09 (with maximum load)
50
90
Conforming to EN 61496-1 and EN 61496-2
2 solid-state PNP (N.O.) outputs )500 mA, c 24 V (Short-circuit protection)
2 LEDs (power supply and diagnostic)
4 LEDs (stop, run, top alignment and bottom alignment)
M12, 4-pin, male connector
M12, 5-pin, male connector
22 (0.25) Tinned wires.
ŸSHUIRRWŸSHUPIRU$:*2PP2) wire
Pre-wired connectors with cable lengths of 9.84, 32.81, and 98.43 ft. (3, 10, and 30 m)
are available separately. The maximum cable length is 164 ft. (50 m), depending on
the load current and power supply.
)XQFWLRQV
)XQFWLRQV
8
³0XWLQJ´IXQFWLRQ(inhibition)
(1) Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see page 3/127.
b Start:
v Automatic: model ;86/1*&
v Manual: model ;86/1*'
b Alignment aid using 2 LEDs
b LED display of operating modes
b Monitoring of external switching devices EDM/MPCE
Possible with external module XPS LCM1150
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
3/126
Characteristics:
page 3/126
References:
page 3/127
Dimensions:
page 3/128
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/129
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
References
Light curtains, type 2
Slim, compact light curtains XUS LN with solid-state output
1
7UDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHUV\VWHPIRUKDQGSURWHFWLRQ(1)
'HWHFWLRQFDSDFLW\LQPP6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHWRIWWRP
b 2 PNP safety outputs - Automatic start
3URWHFWHG
KHLJKW
LQPP
5.91 (150)
11.81 (300)
17.72 (450)
23.62 (600)
29.53 (750)
35.43 (900)
41.34 (1050)
47.24 (1200)
53.15 (1350)
59.06 (1500)
5HVSRQVH
WLPH
PV
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
1XPEHURI
OLJKWEHDPV
$ODUP
RXWSXW
5HIHUHQFH
(2)
7
14
21
28
35
42
49
56
63
70
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
PNP
;86/1*&
;86/1*&
;86/1*&
;86/1*&
;86/1*&
;86/1*&
;86/1*&
;86/1*&
;86/1*&
;86/1*&
:HLJKW
OENJ
5.95 (2.700)
6.39 (2.900)
7.05 (3.200)
7.50 (3.400)
7.94 (3.600)
8.60 (3.900)
9.04 (4.100)
9.48 (4.300)
9.92 (4.500)
10.58 (4.800)
b 2 PNP safety outputs - Manual start
3URWHFWHG
5HVSRQVH
1XPEHURI
$ODUP
5HIHUHQFH
:HLJKW
KHLJKW
WLPH
OLJKWEHDPV
RXWSXW
(2)
LQPP
PV
OENJ
5.91 (150)
14
7
PNP
;86/1*'
5.95 (2.700)
11.81 (300)
15
14
PNP
;86/1*'
6.39 (2.900)
17.72 (450)
16
21
PNP
;86/1*'
7.05 (3.200)
23.62 (600)
17
28
PNP
;86/1*'
7.50 (3.400)
29.53 (750)
18
35
PNP
;86/1*'
7.94 (3.600)
35.43 (900)
19
42
PNP
;86/1*'
8.60 (3.900)
41.34 (1050)
20
49
PNP
;86/1*'
9.04 (4.100)
47.24 (1200)
21
56
PNP
;86/1*'
9.48 (4.300)
53.15 (1350)
22
63
PNP
;86/1*'
9.92 (4.500)
59.06 (1500)
23
70
PNP
;86/1*'
10.58 (4.800)
6XSSOLHGZLWKDWHVWURGVHWVRIEUDFNHWVZLWKPRXQWLQJVDQGDXVHUJXLGHZLWKFHUWL¿FDWHRI
conformity and 1 arc suppressor set.
Pre-wired female connectors to be ordered separately, see below.
(2) To order a transmitter only, replace the letter C or D by E and add the letter T to the end of the reference
for the corresponding transmitter-receiver pair.
Example: reference XUS LNG5C0150 becomes XUS LNG5E0150T for the transmitter only.
To order a receiver only, add the letter R to the end of the reference for the corresponding transmitterreceiver pair.
Example: reference XUS LNG5C0150 becomes XUS LNG5C0150R for the receiver only.
XUSLNG5ppppp
1
2
3
4
5
6
2WKHUYHUVLRQV
Combining type 2 light curtains with external module for muting function and monitoring 2 to 4 light curtains.
See pages 2/218.
7
$FFHVVRULHV
'HVFULSWLRQ
)RUXVHZLWK
0RXQWLQJNLW
(2 brackets)
Light curtains
XUSLN
Transmitter
type
Light curtains
XUSLN
Receiver
type
Light curtains
XUSLN
5
3UHZLUHG
IHPDOH
FRQQHFWRUV
$UFVXSSUHVVRU(pair)
8VHUJXLGHRQ&'520
All types of light
curtain
All types of light
curtains and
accessories
/HQJWK
IWP
–
5HIHUHQFH
XUSLZ218
:HLJKW
R]NJ
0.99 (0.450)
9.84 (3)
32.81 (10)
98.43 (30)
9.84 (3)
32.81 (10)
98.43 (30)
–
XSZ NCT03
XSZ NCT10
XSZ NCT30
XSZ NCR03
XSZ NCR10
XSZ NCR30
XUSLZ500
1.50 (0.680)
2.01 (0.910)
3.00 (1.360)
1.50 (0.680)
2.01 (0.910)
3.00 (1.360)
0.04 (0.020)
–
XUSLZ450
0.04 (0.020)
8
9
6HSDUDWHFRPSRQHQWV
3RZHUVXSSOLHVƒPLUURUDGDSWRUVDQWLYLEUDWLRQNLWDQGPRXQWLQJEDVHV
XSZ NCTpp
Principle:
page 3/88
XSZ NCRpp
See pages 3/130 and 3/132 to 3/137
Characteristics:
page 3/126
References:
page 3/127
10
Dimensions:
page 3/128
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/129
3/127
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Dimensions,
Wiring diagrams
Light curtains, type 2
Slim, compact light curtains XUS LN with solid-state output
'LPHQVLRQV
1
6OLPFRPSDFWOLJKWFXUWDLQV
XUSLNppp
1.22
1.74
31
44.3
1.12
1.26
1.12
28.5
32
28.4
1.66
b
b1
3
4
H
42.1
2
2.76
70.1
XUS
(1)
(2)
0.54
5
6
13.6
Dual Dimensions:
INCHES
Millimieters
8x18°
LNppp0150
LNppp0300
LNppp0450
LNppp0600
LNppp0750
LNppp0900
LNppp1050
LNppp1200
LNppp1350
LNppp1500
b
LQPP
5.79 (147)
11.57 (294)
17.36 (441)
23.15 (588)
28.94 (735)
34.72 (882)
40.51 (1029)
46.30 (1176)
52.09 (1323)
57.87 (1470)
b1
LQPP
10.71 (272)
16.50 (419)
22.28 (566)
28.07 (713)
33.86 (860)
39.65 (1007)
45.43 (1154)
51.22 (1301)
57.01 (1448)
62.80 (1595)
H
LQPP
9.67 (245.6)
15.46 (392.6)
21.24 (539.5)
27.03 (686.6)
32.82 (833.6)
38.61 (980.6)
44.39 (1127.6)
50.18 (1274.6)
55.97 (1421.6)
61.76 (1568.6)
3URWHFWHGKHLJKW
LQPP
5.91 (150)
11.81 (300)
17.72 (450)
23.62 (600)
29.53 (750)
35.43 (900)
41.34 (1050)
47.24 (1200)
53.15 (1350)
59.06 (1500)
(1) 1 elongated hole Ø 0.27 x 0.66 in. (Ø 6.75 x 16.75 mm.)
(2) M12 male connector.
&RQQHFWLRQV
7
7UDQVPLWWHU
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRURIWUDQVPLWWHU;6=1&7
c0V
8
4/BK
3/BU
1/BN
2/WH
7UDQVPLWWHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWRU
1
1 Interlock or Alarm
yellow LED
2 Switch-on/Machine run
green LED
2
c + 24 V
5HFHLYHU
9
3UHZLUHGFRQQHFWRURIUHFHLYHU;6=1&5
c 0V
OSSD2
4/BK
3/BU
1/BN
2/WH
5HFHLYHUVWDWXVLQGLFDWRU
1
2
3
4
10
c + 24 V
5/GY
1 Top alignment
yellow LED
2 Bottom alignment
yellow LED
3 Stop
red LED
4 Run
green LED
OSSD1
Start
Principle:
page 3/88
3/128
Characteristics:
page 3/126
References:
page 3/127
Dimensions:
page 3/128
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/129
6DIHW\GHWHFWLRQVROXWLRQV
Wiring diagrams (continued)
Light curtains, type 2
Slim, compact light curtains XUS LN with solid-state output
Wiring diagrams (continued)
'LUHFWFRQQHFWLRQZLWK;86/1*'ppp
N
1
L
F1
GND
N
L
5HFHLYHU;86/1
Power supply
7UDQVPLWWHU;86/1
2
(24 V)
0V
GND 0 V 24 V
Start
K1
OSSD1
0 V 24 V
OSSD2
K1
3
(2)
K2
Start
NC
K2
K1
K2
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1) The K1 and K2 coils must be protected using the arc suppressors included in the documentation kit.
(2) For the EDM function, contactors LC1DppBD and control relays CADppBD, CA4KNppBW3 and CA3KNppBD are recommended
4
&RQQHFWLRQRIOLJKWFXUWDLQ;86/1&pppYLDD3UHYHQWDŒ;36$)/PRGXOH
Control panel
5
L
K3
N
L
F1
A1
F3
Start
K4
S33
S34
F4
13
S39
23
33
Control circuit
XPS AFL
N
GND
L
T
Power supply
K1
K3
K2
K4
6
Logic
GND 0 V 24 V
A2
S11
S12
S11 S22
14
K3
24
34
7
K4
N
8
0 V 24 V
Start
OSSD1
0 V 24 V
OSSD2
7UDQVPLWWHU;86/1
5HFHLYHU;86/1
9
10
Principle:
page 3/88
Characteristics:
page 3/126
References:
page 3/127
Dimensions:
page 3/128
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/129
3/129
References
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™
0
Accessories for safety light curtains types 2 and 4
90° mirror adaptor for light curtains
Glass mirror (0.88 Sn) (1)
1
Description
537571
90° mirror adaptor
with rotatable
mounting
2
3
XUSZM/ZApppp
4
For use with light curtains
XUSLB/LDM
XUSLP
–
XUSLPZ1Ap
–
–
XUSLB/LDM0280
–
XUSLB/LDM0320
–
XUSLB/LDM0360
XUSLB/LDM0440
–
XUSLB/LDM0520
XUSLPp2A500p
XUSLB/LDM0600/0680 XUSLPp2A0600p
XUSLB/LDM0720
–
XUSLB/LDM0760
–
XUSLB/LDM0880
XUSLPZ3A0400p
XUSLB/LDM0920/0960
XUSLB/LDM1040
XUSLPZ3A0500p
XUSLB/LDM1120
XUSLPZ4A0300p
XUSLB/LDM1200
XUSLPZ5A0300p
XUSLB/LDM1360
–
XUSLB/LDM1400
–
XUSLB/LDM1520
–
XUSLB/LDM1560
XUSLPZ6A0300p
XUSLB/LDM1640/1720 –
XUSLB/LDM1800
–
XUSLB/LDM1920/2120 –
Height (2)
in (mm)
5.5 (140)
7.5 (191)
13.5 (343)
19.5 (495)
Reference
XUSLN
–
–
XUSLNppp0150
XUSLNppp0300
XUSZM0102
XUSZM0152
XUSZM0305
XUSZM0457
Weight
lb (kg)
2.3 (1.040)
2.9 (1.300)
4.2 (1.900)
5.5 (2.500)
XUSLNppp0450
–
XUSLNppp0600
–
XUSLNppp0750
–
XUSLNppp0900
–
XUSLNppp1050
XUSLNppp1200
XUSLNppp1350
–
XUSLNppp1500
–
–
–
–
21.5 (546)
25.5 (648)
29.5 (749)
31.5 (800)
33.5 (851)
37.5 (953)
41.5 (1054)
43.5 (1105)
49.5 (1257)
53.5 (1359)
55.5 (1410)
57.5 (1461)
61.5 (1562)
65.5 (1664)
73.5 (1867)
73.5 (1867)
85.5 (2172)
XUSZM0508
XUSZM0610
XUSZM0711
XUSZM0762
XUSZM0813
XUSZM0914
XUSZM1016
XUSZM1067
XUSZM1219
XUSZM1321
XUSZM1372
XUSZM1422
XUSZM1524
XUSZM1626
XUSZM1830
XUSZM1830
XUSZM2134
6.2 (2.800)
7.1 (3.200)
8.2 (3.700)
8.4 (3.800)
8.8 (4.000)
9.9 (4.500)
11 (5.000)
11.5 (5.200)
13 (5.900)
13.9 (6.300)
14.3 (6.500)
14.8 (6.700)
15.9 (7.200)
16.8 (7.600)
18.7 (8.500)
18.7 (8.500)
21.6 (9.800)
Stainless steel mirror (0.82 Sn) (1)
Description
For use with light curtains
Height (2)
XUSLB/LDM
XUSLP
XUSLN
in (mm)
90° mirror adaptor
–
XUSLPZ1Ap
–
5.5 (140)
with rotatable
–
–
–
7.5 (191)
mounting
XUSLB/LDM0280
–
XUSLNppp0150
13.5 (343)
XUSLB/LDM0320
–
XUSLNppp0300
19.5 (495)
XUSLB/LDM0360
XUSLB/LDM0440
–
XUSLNppp0450
21.5 (546)
XUSLB/LDM0520
XUSLPp2A500p
–
25.5 (648)
XUSLB/LDM0600/0680 XUSLPp2A0600p XUSLNppp0600
29.5 (749)
XUSLB/LDM0720
–
–
31.5 (800)
XUSLB/LDM0760
–
XUSLNppp0750
33.5 (851)
XUSLB/LDM0880
XUSLPZ3A0400p –
37.5 (953)
XUSLB/LDM0920/0960
XUSLNppp0900
41.5 (1054)
XUSLB/LDM1040
XUSLPZ3A0500p –
43.5 (1105)
XUSLB/LDM1120
XUSLPZ4A0300p XUSLNppp1050
49.5 (1257)
XUSLB/DM1200
XUSLPZ5A0300p XUSLNppp1200
53.5 (1359)
XUSLB/LDM1360
–
XUSLNppp1350
55.5 (1410)
XUSLB/LDM1400
–
–
57.5 (1461)
XUSLB/LDM1520
–
XUSLNppp1500
61.5 (1562)
XUSLB/LDM1560
XUSLPZ6A0300p –
65.5 (1664)
XUSLB/LDM1640/1720 –
–
73.5 (1867)
XUSLB/LDM1800
–
–
73.5 (1867)
XUSLB/LDM1920/2120 –
–
85.5 (2172)
6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHUHGXFWLRQFRHI¿FLHQWWREHWDNHQLQWRDFFRXQWIRUHDFKƒPLUURUDGDSWRUXVHG
8VDEOHUHÀHFWLYHKHLJKW
5
6
7
8
Reference
XUSZA0102
XUSZA0152
XUSZA0305
XUSZA0457
Weight
lb (kg)
2.4 (1.090)
2.9 (1.300)
4.4 (2.000)
6 (2.700)
XUSZA0508
XUSZA0610
XUSZA0711
XUSZA0762
XUSZA0813
XUSZA0914
XUSZA1016
XUSZA1067
XUSZA1219
XUSZA1321
XUSZA1372
XUSZA1422
XUSZA1524
XUSZA1626
XUSZA1830
XUSZA1830
XUSZA2134
6.6 (3.000)
7.7 (3.500)
8.6 (3.900)
9.3 (4.200)
9.7 (4.400)
9.9 (4.500)
11.9 (5.400)
12.3 (5.600)
14.1 (6.400)
15 (6.800)
15.4 (7.000)
16.1 (7.300)
17.2 (7.800)
18.3 (8.300)
20.3 (9.200)
20.3 (9.200)
23.4 (10.600)
Accessories
Description
9
Laser alignment tool
Usage
Reference
All types of light curtain
XUSLAT1
Weight
lb (kg)
0.75 (0.340)
Power supplies for light curtains XUSLp
Input
voltage
Secondary
Output
Nominal
voltage
power
Reset
Nominal
current
Conforming Reference
to standard
EN 61000-3-2
Weight
lb (kg)
Single phase (N-L1) or 2-phase (L1-L2) connection
10
$%/536
Characteristics:
page 3/88
3/130
a 100…120 V - 200...500 V
- 15 %,+ 10 %
50/60 Hz
References:
page 3/130
c
72 W
24...28,8 V 120 W
240 W
3A
5A
10 A
Dimensions:
pages 3/134 and 3/137
Auto/manu
Auto/manu
Auto/manu
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wiring diagrams:
page 3/137
ABL8RPS24030
ABL8RPS24050
ABL8RPS24100
0.7 (0.300)
1.5 (0.700)
2.2 (1.000)
&KDUDFWHULVWLFV
references
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™
0
Accessories for safety light curtains types 2 and 4
XUSZWSpppp
Protective covers for light curtains
XUSLB/XUSLDM/XUSLP
Environmental characteristics
Air temperature
For operation
For storage
Material
Sensing distance (Sn)UHGXFWLRQFRHI¿FLHQW
1
°F (°C)
°F (°C)
32 ...+ 131 (0...+ 55)
- 13... + 158 (- 25... + 70)
polycarbonate
0.91 (1)
Environmental chemicals
Chemical resistance
Acids, aliphatic hydrocarbons
Alcohols, Alkalis
Detergents and cleaners
Greases and oils
Silicone oils and greases not
containing alkaline products
Amines
Aromatic hydrocarbons
Detergents and cleaners containing
alkaline
Esters
2
Resistant
Limited resistance
Not resistant
3
Halogenated hydrocarbons
Ketones
Silicone oils and greases containing
alkaline products
4
References of protective covers
Description
537574
537568
polycarbonate
protective covers for
transmitterreceiver pair
(0.91 Sn) (1)
(Sold in sets of 2)
Description
XUSLZWBpppp
For use with
XUSLB/DM280
XUSLB/DM320
XUSLB/DM360
XUSLB/DM440
XUSLB/DM520
XUSLB/DM600
XUSLB/DM680
XUSLB/DM720
XUSLB/DM760
XUSLB/DM880
XUSLB/DM920
XUSLB/DM960
XUSLB/DM1040
XUSLB/DM1120
XUSLB/DM1200
XUSLB/DM1360
XUSLB/DM1400
XUSLB/DM1520
XUSLB/DM1560
XUSLB/DM1640
XUSLB/DM1720
XUSLB/DM1800
XUSLB/DM1920
XUSLB/DM2120
For use with
XUSZWSP
polycarbonate
protective covers for
single beam device
(0.91 Sn) (1)
(Sold in sets of 2)
XUSLP
Height
in (mm)
12.2 (310)
13.8 (350)
15.4 (390)
18.5 (470)
21.7 (550)
24.8 (630)
28 (710)
29.5 (750)
31.1 (790)
35.8 (910)
37.4 (950)
39 (990)
42.1 (1070)
45.3 (1150)
48.4 (1230)
54.7 (1390)
56.3 (1430)
61 (1550)
62.6 (1590)
65.7 (1670)
68.9 (1750)
72 (1830)
76.8 (1950)
84.6 (2150)
Reference
Height
in (mm)
2.5 (62.48)
Reference
XUSLZWB0280
XUSLZWB0320
XUSLZWB0360
XUSLZWB0440
XUSLZWB0520
XUSLZWB0600
XUSLZWB0680
XUSLZWB0720
XUSLZWB0760
XUSLZWB0880
XUSLZWB0920
XUSLZWB0960
XUSLZWB1040
XUSLZWB1120
XUSLZWB1200
XUSLZWB1360
XUSLZWB1400
XUSLZWB1520
XUSLZWB1560
XUSLZWB1640
XUSLZWB1720
XUSLZWB1800
XUSLZWB1920
XUSLZWB2120
XUSZWSP
Weight
lb (kg)
0.6 (0.282)
0.7 (0.318)
0.8 (0.354)
0.9 (0.426)
1.1 (0.497)
1.3 (0.569)
1.4 (0.641)
1.5 (0.677)
1.6 (0.713)
1.8 (0.821)
1.9 (0.857)
2.0 (0.893)
2.1 (0.965)
2.3 (1.037)
2.4 (1.108)
2.8 (1.252)
2.8 (1.288)
3.1 (1.396)
3.2 (1.432)
3.3 (1.504)
3.5 (1.576)
3.6 (1.648)
3.9 (1.756)
4.3 (1.935)
Weight
lb (kg)
2.2 (0.100)
6HQVLQJGLVWDQFHUHGXFWLRQFRHI¿FLHQWWREHWDNHQLQWRDFFRXQWIRUHDFKSDLURISRO\FDUERQDWH
SURWHFWLYHFRYHUVXVHG
5
6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
page 3/131
References:
page 3/131
Dimensions:
page 3/134
3/131
References (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™
0
Accessories for safety light curtains types 2 and 4
Anti-vibration kit
Selection according to weight and application
1
Weight classes
Light curtain type
Height
in (mm)
XUSLN
5.9...23.6 (150...600)
XUSLB/LDMQ/LDSQ/XUSLTQ
2
XUSLBR/LDMY/LDSY/XUSLTR/Y
XUSLPZ1A
XUSLPZ2A0500 et XUSLPZ2A0600
XUSLPZ3A0400
XUSLPZ3A0500
XUSLPZ4A0300
XUSLPZ5A0300 et XUL LPZ6A0300
XUSLPB2A500 et XUSLPB2A600
3
Weight class
1
2
p
3
4
Type of mirror Height
adaptors
in (mm)
XUSZM (1)
Weight class
1
2
3
p
4 (102)
29.5...59.1 (750...1500)
p
12...18 (305...457)
11...40.9 (280…1040)
p
20...28 (508…711)
p
44.1...53.5 (1120…1360)
12.6...40.9 (320…1040)
44.1...83.5 (1120…2120)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
p
p
p
p
p
p
4
p
p
p
32...40 (813…1016)
p
XUSZA
4 (102)
p
12...42 (305…1067)
p
48...64 (1219…1626)
p
72...84 (1830…2134)
8VHRIWKHDQWLYLEUDWLRQNLWLVQRWUHFRPPHQGHGIRUPLUURU
DGDSWRUVJUHDWHUWKDQLQPPLQKHLJKW
p
p
p
Applications
Weight class
Anti-shock applications (1)
Shear mounted
Number of
Reference
mountings
per head (3)
2
XSZSMK
2
XSZSMK1
4
1
2
6
XSZSMK
XSZSMK1
2
Anti-vibration applications (2)
Shear mounted
Compression mounted
Number of
Reference
Number of
Reference
mountings
mountings
per head (3)
per head (3)
2 or 4
XSZSMK
2
XSZSMK1
2 or 4
XSZSMK1
2 or 4
2 or 4
2
3
4
XSZSMK
2
XSZSMK
2 or 4
4
XSZSMK1
2 or 4
XSZSMK1
4
2 or 4
XSZSMK2
2 or 4
4
4
XSZSMK
2
XSZSMK
4
4
XSZSMK1
4
XSZSMK1
4
2
XSZSMK2
2 or 4
/RZIUHTXHQF\KLJKDPSOLWXGHDSSOLFDWLRQVVXFKDVSXQFKLQJSUHVVHVZKHUHDSRZHUIXOVKRFNFDQH[LVW
+LJKIUHTXHQF\ORZDPSOLWXGHDSSOLFDWLRQVVXFKDVRIIVHWSULQWLQJPDFKLQHVZKHUHFRQVWDQWYLEUDWLRQFDQH[LVW
+HDGWUDQVPLWWHUUHFHLYHURUPLUURU
5
2 or 4
2 or 4
Compression mounted
Number of
Reference
mountings
per head (3)
Not
recommended
XSZSMK1
XSZSMK
XSZSMK1
XSZSMK2
XSZSMK
XSZSMK1
XSZSMK2
XSZSMK
XSZSMK1
XSZSMK2
2
2 or 4
XSZSMK
XSZSMK1
2 or 4
4
XSZSMK
XSZSMK1
2
4
XSZSMK
XSZSMK1
Shock absorber characteristics
Characteristics
per shock absorber
7
For antivibration kit
XSZSMK
XSZSMK1
XSZSMK2
Compression mounted
Maximum load
Torque
lb (kg)
18.0 (8.16)
4.8 (2.177)
55.0 (24.94)
OE‡LQ1‡P
222.5 (25.16)
96.1 (10.86)
949.7 (107.39)
Natural
frequency
Hz
11
14
13
Shear mounted
Maximum load
lb (kg)
3.0 (1.36)
2.5 (1.13)
23.0 (10.43)
Torque
OE‡LQ1‡P
27.7 (3.13)
20.7 (2.34)
132.2 (14.94)
Natural
frequency
Hz
9.5
9
7.5
References of anti-vibration kits
537583
Description
8
For use with
Anti-vibration kit
All types of light curtain and
kit consisting of 8 shock absorbers, 90° mirror adaptors
VWXG¿[LQJ
16 washers and 16 nuts included
with kit.
9
XSZ SMKp
537570
Mounting kit for XUSLN
(2 brackets)
10
XUSLZ227
Characteristics:
page 3/132
3/132
References:
page 3/132
Dimensions :
page 3/135
Anti-vibration kit
Reference
XSZSMK
Weight
lb (kg)
0.07
(0.030)
XSZSMK1
0.04
(0.020)
XSZSMK2
0.1
(0.045)
XUSLZ227
1.0
(0.450)
References (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™
0
Accessories for safety light curtains types 2 and 4
XUSZCpppp
Mounting base for light curtains and
mirrors
Environmental characteristics
Ambient air temperature
Operating
For storage
1
°F (°C)
°F (°C)
Materials
- 13…+ 158 (- 25…+ 70)
- 13…+ 158 (- 25…+ 70)
Mounting base: steel
(QGSURWHFWLRQEODFNSRO\FDUERQDWH¿EHUJODVV
2
References
Mounting bases
Désignation For use with
Light
curtains
Height
in (mm)
Mounting
5.9 …35.4
base
(150…900)
XUSZCpppp
36.2 …59.1
(920…1500)
IP 67 tube
Protected Reference
height
Weight
Mirrors
Height
in (mm)
7.2 …35.2
(182…894)
Height
in (mm)
19.8 …38.6
(503…981)
in (mm)
47.2
(1200)
lb (kg)
25
(11.340)
XUSZC1200
39.2 …59.2 43.4 …63.8
70.9
(995…1503) (1102…1620) (1800)
XUSZC1800
35
(15.880)
59.8 …70.9
63.2 …67.2 68.5 …76.3
82.7
(1520…1800) (1605…1706) (1740…1939) (2100)
XUSZC2100
45
(20.410)
75.6 …82.5
75.2
(1920…2095) (1910)
79.6 …84.3
94.5
(2021…2141) (2400)
XUSZC2400
60
(27.220)
–
92
(2336)
XUSZC3100
66
(29.940)
For use with
Reference
Mounting base XUSZCpppp
XUSZCA
Weight
lb (kg)
1.0
(0.450)
Floor mounting kit
Mounting base XUSZCpppp
Consisting of: 4 bolts,
4 rawplugs, 12 washers,
8 standard nuts, 4 lock nuts, 4
rubber insulators,
4 spacers (tube)
XUSZCB
88.2
(2240)
122
(3100)
Accessories
Description
Mounting kit
(sold in lots of 2)
3
4
5
1.0
(0.450)
6
XUSZCpppp
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
page 3/133
References:
page 3/133
Dimensions :
page 3/136
3/133
'LPHQVLRQV
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™
0
Accessories for safety light curtains types 2 and 4
90° mirror adaptors + Mounting clamps
XUSZMpppp/XUSZApppp
1
1.26
Mounting clamp (quantity 2)
5.71
32
.31xØ.28
145
8xØ7
2.05
XUS
Glass
Stainless
steel
ZA102
ZA152
ZA0305
ZA0457
ZA0508
ZA0610
ZA0711
ZA0762
ZA0813
ZA0914
ZA1016
ZA1067
ZA1219
ZA1321
ZA1372
ZA1422
ZA1524
ZA1626
ZA1830
ZA2134
.51
13
b
H
2
3
4
.51
13
.94
ZM0102
ZM0152
ZM0305
ZM0457
ZM0508
ZM0610
ZM0711
ZM0762
ZM0813
ZM0914
ZM1016
ZM1067
ZM1219
ZM1321
ZM1372
ZM1422
ZM1524
ZM1626
ZM1830
ZM2134
b
H
in. (mm) in. (mm)
5.5 (140) 0.7 (182)
7.5 (191) 9.2 (233)
13.5 (343) 15.2 (386)
19.5 (495) 21.2 (538)
21.5 (546) 23.2 (589)
25.5 (648) 27.2 (690)
29.5 (749) 31.2 (792)
31.5 (800) 33.2 (843)
33.5 (851) 35.2 (894)
37.5 (953) 39.2 (995)
41.5 (1054) 43.2 (1097)
43.5 (1105) 45.2 (1148)
49.5 (1257) 51.2 (1300)
53.5 (1359) 55.2 (1402)
55.5 (1410) 57.2 (1452)
57.5 (1461) 59.2 (1503)
61.5 (1562) 63.2 (1605)
65.5 (1664) 67.2 (1706)
73.5 (1867) 75.2 (1910)
85.5 (2172) 87.2 (2214)
52
2.7
68.6
.12
3
1.1
28
1.1
28
Ø1.69
Ø43
4.02
102
4.45
Dual Dimensions:
113
5
Protective cover
XUSZWppp for XUL B/D
b
6
7
1.54
39.2
1.4
35.6
9
XUS
LZWB0280
LZWB0320
LZWB0360
LZWB0440
LZWB0520
LZWB0600
LZWB0680
LZWB0720
LZWB0760
LZWB0880
LZWB0920
LZWB0960
LZWB1040
LZWB1120
LZWB1200
LZWB1360
LZWB1400
LZWB1520
LZWB1560
LZWB1640
LZWB1720
LZWB1800
LZWB1920
LZWB2120
b
in. (mm)
12.2 (310)
13.8 (350)
15.4 (390)
18.5 (470)
21.7 (550)
24.8 (630)
28 (710)
29.5 (750)
31.1 (790)
35.8 (910)
37.4 (950)
39 (990)
42.1 (1070)
45.3 (1150)
48.4 (1230)
54.7 (1390)
56.3 (1430)
61 (1550)
62.6 (1590)
65.7 (1670)
68.9 (1750)
72 (1830)
76.8 (1950)
84.6 (2150)
XUSZWSP for XUSLP
1.22
2.46
30.98
62.48
2.05
52.07
10
Characteristics:
page 3/130 and 3/131
3/134
1.2
30.5
2.05
24
8
52
References :
pages 3/130 and 3/131
Dimensions:
page 3/134
INCHES
Millimieters
'LPHQVLRQV(continued)
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™
0
Accessories for safety light curtains types 2 and 4
Anti-vibration kits (1)
XSZSMK
XSZSMK1
XSZSMK2
1
Ø.24
Ø.24
Ø6
Ø6
Ø.24
Ø6
.38
9.65
.38
9.65
.63
Ø.75
16
Ø19
.38
9.65
.38
.5
12.7
9.65
Ø.38
Ø9.65
.5
12.7
.5
.75
12.7
19
Ø1
Ø25.4
2
7KHDQWLYLEUDWLRQNLWFRQVLVWVRIVKRFNDEVRUEHUVZDVKHUVDQGQXWV
Mounting brackets for anti-vibration kit
XUSLZ227 and XUSLN
.39
.39
.21
10
10
5.28
3
.66
16.75
1.19
30.30
(1)
4
(2)
1.75
44.3
Ø .58
Ø 14.81
1.19
30.10
5
.09
2.27
1.12
28.50
Dual Dimensions:
INCHES
Millimieters
6
HORQJDWHGKROHV‘[LQ‘[PP
HORQJDWHGKROH‘[LQ‘[PP
7
8
9
10
Characteristics :
page 3/132
References :
page 3/132
Dimensions:
page 3/135
3/135
'LPHQVLRQV(continued)
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™
0
Accessories for safety light curtains types 2 and 4
Mounting base
Floor mounting kit (quantity 4) for mounting base XUSZCpppp
XUSZCpppp
XUSZCB
Echelle 2,5
1
1
2
3
4
Ø1.69
Ø43
2.5
5
2
7
Bolt,
1 lock nut,
3 washers,
Rubber insulator,
Spacer (tube),
2 standard nuts,
Rawplug.
b
6
63.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
5.98
152
Dual Dimensions:
4
6.1
155
8
203
XUS
ZC1200
6.1
155
.16xØ1.26 ZC1800
8
203
5
4xØ32
ZC2100
ZC2400
ZC3100
b
in (mm)
47.3 (1200)
70.9 (1800)
82.7 (2100)
94.5 (2400)
122 (3100)
6
7
8
9
10
characteristics :
page 3/133
3/136
References :
page 3/133
Dimensions:
page 3/136
INCHES
Millimieters
'LPHQVLRQV(continued)
:LULQJGLDJUDPV
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™
0
Accessories for safety light curtains types 2 and 4
Dimensions
ABL8RPS24ppp
common side view
1
0.47
ABL8
12
a
b
RPS24030
RPS24050
RPS24100
L1 N/L2 L3
4.92
5.63
125
143
a
in (mm)
b
in (mm)
4.7 (120)
4.7 (120)
5.5 (140)
1.7 (44)
2.2 (56)
3.3 (85)
2
+IN – +OUT–
11
14
.24
6
Dual Dimensions:
INCHES
Millimieters
.24
6
3
Internal wiring diagrams
C
LV
+
+
14
11
14
C
HV
4
PFC
+
+
+
+
PFC
11
PFC
ABL8RPS24100
HV
LV
C
ABL8RPS24050
HV
LV
ABL8RPS24030
5
6
7
8
9
10
Characteristics:
page 3/130
References:
page 3/130
Dimensions:
page 3/137
Wiring diagrams:
page 3/137
3/137
2SHUDWLQJSULQFLSOH
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™ safety modules and single-beam
photo-electric sensors
With a test input associated with a built-in
“muting” function
Operating principle
XPSCM safety modules form, with XU2S single-beam photo-electric sensors
(periodically tested), a category 2 light curtain conforming to standards IEC/EN 61496
parts 1 and 2 and EN 60825-1.
The connection of 1 to 4 pairs of XU2S photo-electric sensors makes it possible to
create a protected space up to 47.2 in. (1200 mm) high conforming to EN 999/ISO
13855 and 26.2 ft. (8 m) long.
1
The built-in “muting” function allows for the automatic passage of parts to be
machined or loaded pallets without interrupting the transportation movement.
When the system is engaged by the operating control (in series with the main circuit
feedback loop) and the light protection is not interrupted, the main circuit is closed by
the two safety relays of the XPSCM module.
2
$Q LQWHUUXSWLRQ RI WKH SURWHFWLRQ ¿HOG FDXVHV WKH VDIHW\ RXWSXWV WR RSHQ
instantaneously, and the process PLC receives a stop command. The LED on the
XPSCM front panel changes from green to red. The “open” state is maintained until the
module is restarted using the start button.
3
The “muting” function allows the light protection to be inhibited (muted). This possibility
allows a trolley transporting materials to pass through without triggering the main
circuit. The “muting” function cannot be activated by supplying the inhibition devices
unless the safety outputs have been switched on beforehand.
4
To trigger the “muting” function, the inhibition devices (muting sensors) must be
activated within the 3-second time interval. This synchronization time for the two
LQKLELWLRQLQSXWVFDQEHGHDFWLYDWHGE\FRQQHFWLQJWZRFRQ¿JXUDWLRQWHUPLQDOV7KH
³PXWLQJ´F\FOHKDVDPD[LPXPGXUDWLRQRIVHFRQGV'XULQJWKLVSHULRGPDWHULDOV
FDQ EH WUDQVSRUWHG WKURXJK WKH SURWHFWLRQ ¿HOG ZLWKRXW GHDFWLYDWLQJ WKH VDIHW\
RXWSXWV7KH VHFRQGOLPLWYDOXHRIWKH³PXWLQJ´F\FOHPD\EHPDGHLQ¿QLWHE\
FRQQHFWLQJWZRFRQ¿JXUDWLRQWHUPLQDOV
5
During the “muting” operation process, a light indicating the “muting” state is
controlled by the XPSCM module. An error at the level of the indicator light (shortcircuit, open-circuit) will be recognized, and will deactivate the “muting” function. The
indicator light comes on when a “muting” signal is generated and indicates the inhibition
of the protection function.
6
“Muting” indication
Hazardous
zone
D4
Penetration direction
D3
m
7
D2
MA1
Materials
trolley
D1
MB1
MB2
MA2
Materials
trolley
dM
8
D1, D2, D3, D4: monitoring photo-electric sensors.
MA1, MB1, MA2, MB2: “Muting” photo-electric sensors.
m = trolley length
dM = distance between MA1, MB1 and MA2, MB2.
Conditions to be observed for the “muting” function
b “Muting” sensors must be of the XU2 M18PP340 thru-beam or XU9 M18PP340
SRODUL]HGUHÀH[W\SHRUPHFKDQLFDOOLPLWVZLWFKHVZLWKFRQWDFWV
b dM )m to obtain continuous validation of the “muting” function.
b Avoid the intrusion of persons during the “muting” phase. This phase is indicated
by an indicator light on the “muting” indicator output of the XPSCM module.
b A materials transportation trolley (i.e.: Automatically Guided Vehicle (AGV)) must
JHQHUDWHWKH³PXWLQJ´VLJQDOEHIRUHLWHQWHUVWKHSURWHFWLRQ¿HOGDQGLQWHUUXSWWKH
VLJQDOZKHQLWLVRQFHDJDLQUHOHDVHGIURPDOOWKHVHQVRUVRIWKHSURWHFWLRQ¿HOG
9
10
Principle:
page 3/138
3/138
Characteristics:
page 3/139
References:
page 3/140
Dimensions:
page 3/143
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/143
&KDUDFWHULVWLFV
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™ safety modules and single-beam
photo-electric sensors
With a test input associated with a built-in
“muting” function
Characteristics of safety modules
Module type
Products designed for max. use in safety related parts of
control systems conforming to EN 954-1
Ambient air temperature
Degree of protection conforming to IEC 529
Supply
Voltage
Maximum power consumption
Module fuse protection
Rated insulation voltage (Ui)
V
Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp)
kV
Number of inputs to be monitored
Input voltage
Supply voltage of sensors
Supply current of sensors
Inputs for the
Number of “muting” inputs
“muting” function
Input voltage
0D[LPXPFXUUHQW
Synchronization time for the activation of
the MA/MB “muting” signal
³0XWLQJ´PD[LPXPGXUDWLRQ
Single-beam thru-beam photo-electric sensors
for input monitoring Z1-Z2-Z3-Z4
- VHQVRUVDXWKRUL]HGIRUWKHSURWHFWLRQ¿HOGPD[
- “muting” sensors
- Sensor supply resistivity
Safety outputs
- number and type
- solid-state output breaking capacity
- breaking capacity in AC-15
- breaking capacity in DC-13
- PD[LPXPWKHUPDOFXUUHQW,WKH
- VXPRIPD[LPXPWKHUPDOFXUUHQW
- minimum current (volt-free contact)
- minimum voltage (volt-free contact)
- short-circuit protection
XPSCM1144
XPSCM1144P
Category 2 (type 2) conforming to IEC/EN 61496-1
°F (°C)
V
mA
s
Operation: + 14…+ 131 (-10...+ 55). Storage: - 13…+ 185 (- 25…+ 85)
Terminals: IP 20, enclosure: IP 40
c 24, voltage limits: - 20…+ 20 %
< 15, with thru-beam photoelectric sensors and “muting” signalling
Internal, electronic
300 (degree of pollution 2 conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1
and 2)
4 (overvoltage category 3, conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1, DIN VDE 0110 parts 1 and
2)
4 (terminals Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4)
c 24
c 24 (terminal U+/U-)
< 200
2 (terminals MA, MB)
c 24 (terminal U+/U-)
< 200
3 (+/- 20 %)
s
60 (- 10…+ 30 %)
V
W
Inputs for sensors
“Muting” signalling sensors for incandescent lamp
Response time on input change of state
Electrical life
Display
Connection
Type
- 1-wire connection
- 2-wire connection
Without cable ends
With cable ends
With cable ends
Without cable ends
With cable ends
With cable ends
1
V
V
mA
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Degree of protection
Connection
Pre-cabled
Connector
Materials
Nominal sensing distance
Rated supply voltage
Voltage limits
Switching capacity (sealed)
Voltage drop, closed state
Current power consumption, no-load
Maximum switching frequency
Delays
Principle:
Characteristics:
page 3/138
page 3/139
3
4
XU2S18PP340ppp (infrared)
1
VA
A
A
mA
V
A
ms
XU2 M18PP340ppp or XU9 M18PP340ppp photo-electric sensors or XC limit switches
PD[
2 N.O. (terminals 13-14, 23-24), hard contacts
4 N.O. 24 V/20 mA, (Y33-Y34, Y33-Y44, Y33-Y54, Y33-Y64)
C300: inrush 1800, maintained 180
24 V/1.5 A, L/R = 50 ms
5.6
11
10
17
4 gG or 6 fast-acting fuse cartridge, conforming to EN/IEC 60947-5-1 and DIN VDE 0660
part 200
1XPEHUWHUPLQDO+PD[LPXPSRZHU:c9PD[LPXPSRZHU:c 24 V
< 25
See page 2/172
4 LEDs
Captive screw clamp terminals
Captive screw clamp terminals, separate
removable terminal block
6ROLGRUÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*
6ROLGRUÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*
:LWKRXWEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*
:LWKRXWEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*
:LWKEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*
:LWKEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*
6ROLGRUÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*
Solid cable: 24-18 AWG,
ÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*
:LWKRXWEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:* :LWKRXWEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*2
'RXEOHZLWKEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*
'RXEOHZLWKEH]HOÀH[LEOHFDEOH$:*
Characteristics of photo-electric sensors
3URGXFWFHUWL¿FDWLRQ
Ambient air temperature
2
e, conforming to EN/IEC 61496-1/-2 and EN/IEC 60825-1
°F (°C) Operation: - 13…+ 131 (- 25…+ 55) (infrared transmission sensors),
Storage: - 40…+ 158 (- 40…+ 70)
7 gn (f = 10…55 Hz), conforming to EN/IEC 60068-2-6
JQD[HVWLPHVFRQIRUPLQJWR(1,(& IP 67 conforming to EN/IEC 60529
39&FDEOHGLDPHWHULQPPIWPORQJZLUH[$:*2PPë
for thru-beam transmitter)
M12 male connector, 4-pin (suitable jumper cables and female connectors M12,
4-contact, see our catalogue “Global detection”)
Case: nickel-plated brass (infrared transmission sensors). Lenses: PMMA
ft. (m) 26.2 (8) (infrared transmission sensors)
V
c 12…24 (with protection against reverse polarity)
V
c 10…30 V (including ripple)
mA
)100 mA (with overload and short-circuit protection)
V
) 1.5
mA
)35
Hz
500
ms
Response: ) 1; recovery: ) 1
References:
Dimensions:
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/140
page 3/143
page 3/143
3/139
5
6
7
8
9
10
References
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™ safety modules and single-beam
photo-electric sensors
With a test input associated with a built-in
“muting” function
Safety modules
Description
Type of
terminal
block
connection
Safety modules
Integrated in
for the monitoring module
of single-beam
photo-electric
sensors with a
test input
associated with a
built-in “muting”
function
580000
1
2
Number Additional Supply
of
outputs
safety
circuits
2
4
c 24 V
Reference
Weight
XPSCM1144
oz (kg)
12.35
(0.350)
XPSCM1144p
3
Separate,
2
can be
removed from
module
4
c 24 V
XPSCM1144P
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/138
3/140
Characteristics:
page 3/139
References:
page 3/140
Dimensions:
page 3/143
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/143
12.35
(0.350)
References (continued)
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™ safety modules and single-beam
photo-electric sensors
With a test input associated with a built-in
“muting” function
Single-beam photo-electric sensors with a test input
811176
Description
811175
PNP
thru-beam
pair
(transmitter +
receiver)
Light or dark
programmable
switching
XU2S18p3/
Transmission
type
Infrared
Sensing
distance:
26.2 ft. (8 m)
Line of
Connection
sight
Along
Pre-cabled
FDVHD[LV L = 16.4 ft (5 m)
M12 connector
XU2S18PP340L5
XU2S18PP340D
Weight
oz (kg)
17.11
(0.485)
5.47
(0.155)
XU2S18PP340WL5
17.11
(0.485)
M12 connector
XU2S18PP340WD
5.47
(0.155)
Along
Pre-cabled
FDVHD[LV L = 16.4 ft (5 m)
XU2S18KP340L5T
8.29
(0.235)
XU2S18KP340DT
2.65
(0.075)
XU2S18KP340WL5T
8.29
(0.235)
1
2
811181
811180
90° to
Pre-cabled
FDVHD[LV L = 16.4 ft (5 m)
Reference
3
XU2S18p3:/
811176
Thru-beam
transmitter
alone
(for
XPSCM1144p)
Infrared
4
M12 connector
XU2S.3/7
811180
90° to
Pre-cabled
FDVHD[LV L = 16.4 ft (5 m)
M12 connector
XU2S.3:/7
811178
PNP thru-beam Infrared
receiver
alone
(for
XPSCM1144p)
XU2S33'5
Along
Pre-cabled
FDVHD[LV L = 16.4 ft (5 m)
M12 connector
XU2S18KP340WDT
5.47
(0.155)
XU2S18PP340L5R
8.82
(0.250)
XU2S18PP340DR
2.82
(0.080)
5
6
811181
7
90° to
Pre-cabled
FDVHD[LV L = 16.4 ft (5 m)
XU2S18PP340WL5R
8.82
(0.250)
XU2S18PP340WDR
2.82
(0.080)
XU2S33:/5
M12 connector
8
9
10
Principle:
page 3/138
Characteristics:
page 3/139
References:
page 3/140
Dimensions:
page 3/143
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/143
3/141
)XQFWLRQDOGLDJUDPV
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™ safety modules and single-beam
photo-electric sensors
With a test input associated with a built-in
“muting” function
Functional diagram of XPSCM module
1
Supply
voltage
3URWHFWLRQ¿HOG
interrupted
3URWHFWLRQ¿HOG
free
3URWHFWLRQ¿HOG
free
Terminals A1-A2
Sensors Z1-Z4
2
Start button
Output 13-14/23-24
Solid-state output Y33-Y34
(A1/A2 - Fuse)
Solid-state output Y33-Y44
(Starting required)
3
Solid-state output Y33-Y54
(OSSD activated)
Solid-state output Y33-Y64
(muting faulty)
1
Key
4
Start
Start
0
Functional diagram of the XPSCM module with “muting” function
Protection
¿HOG
free
MA muting
activated
Supply
voltage
Muting
Protection
MA muting
Protection
de-activated
¿HOG
activated
¿HOG
interrupted
free
Muting
Protection
MB muting Protection
de-activated
¿HOG
¿HOG
activated
interrupted
free
Muting MB
activated
MA muting
activated
Protection
¿HOG
interrupted
MB muting
activated
5
Muting Profaulty tection
¿HOG
Muting
free
de
activated
Terminals A1-A2
Sensors Z1-Z4
Start button
6
Output 13-14/23-24
Solid-state output Y33-Y34
(A1/A2 Fuse)
Solid-state output Y33-Y44
(starting required)
7
Solid-state output Y33-Y54
(OSSD activated)
Solid-state output Y33-Y64
(muting faulty)
MA muting input
8
MB muting input
Lamp muting
Start
1
Key
9
0
Start
>3s
> 60 s
< 60 s
Key to LEDs
1
2
3
4
10
< 300 ms
<3s
A1-A2 supply voltage, electronic internal fuse status
Signalling for restarting
Safety output closed
Safety output open
1
2
3
4
Principle:
page 3/138
3/142
Characteristics:
page 3/139
References:
page 3/140
Dimensions:
page 3/143
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/143
2SHUDWLRQ
GLPHQVLRQV
ZLULQJGLDJUDPV
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™ safety modules and single-beam
photo-electric sensors
With a test input associated with a built-in
“muting” function
Operation
Light switching
No object
in beam
Output state (PNP) indicator, yellow
LED (illuminated when sensor
output is on)
Dark switching
No object
in beam
Object
in beam
1
Object
in beam
Curves
Infrared detection curve
Functional check
Ø of beam
cm
2
Signal 1.5
level 1
0.7
E
36.1 ft
Red LED
11 m
Optimum
alignment
LED on
–
LED off
26.25 ft
+
3
Dimensions
XU2S18PP340L5, XU2S18PP340L5L
0.16
M.71x.04 (2)
4
XU2S18PP340D
0.16
(1)
M.71x.04 (2)
4
4
0.2
0.94
2.17
0.94
2.17
55
(1)
M18x1
M18x1
55
24
24
3.15
3.15
80
80
3.62
92
(1) LED
3RWHQWLRPHWHU
Mounting nut tightening torque: 17.7 lb-ft (24 N.m)
Connector tightening torque: 1.5 lb-ft (2 N.m)
XU2S18PP340WL5
0.16
M.71x.04 (2)
4
0.16
(1)
M.71x.04 (2)
4
(1)
M18x1
M18x1
.16
4
2.17
55
5
XU2S18PP340WD
55
24
3.74
6
0.94
2.17
0.94
24
3.15
80
95
Dual Dimensions:
4.21
INCHES
Millimieters
107
(1) LED
3RWHQWLRPHWHU
Mounting nut tightening torque: 17.7 lb-ft (24 N.m)
Connector tightening torque: 1.5 lb-ft (2 N.m)
7
Wiring diagrams (3-wire c)
Cable connection
Transmitter
Receiver
Light switching (no object present).
PNP output
+
BN
VI
BU
OG
Test
–
Plug-in connector
Transmitter
BU
BN
BK
OG
VI
BK
BU
–
(Blue)
(Brown)
(Black) (receiver)
(Orange) (receiver)
(Violet) (transmitter)
Characteristics:
page 3/139
1
+
4
3
–
Connector diagrams
Sensor connector pin view
Transmitter
Receiver
1 (+)
2
Test
References:
page 3/140
BN
+
BK
BU
OG
–
8
Receiver
Dark switching (no object present). PNP output
1
+
4
3
2
–
9
Beam break test (for transmitter only)
Beam made
Beam broken
1 ( +)
4
3 (–)
Principle:
page 3/138
+
2
Test
Cable connections
(–)
(+)
(OUT)
(Prog.)
(Test)
BN
Receiver
Light switching (no object present).
PNP output
1
2
3
Receiver
Dark switching (no object present). PNP output
2
Switching
4
Output
3 (–)
Dimensions:
page 3/143
BN/1 +
BN/1
VI/2
VI/2
BU/3
–
BU/3
+
10
–
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/143
3/143
:LULQJGLDJUDPV(continued)
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™ safety modules and single-beam
photo-electric sensors
With a test input associated with a built-in
“muting” function
Wiring Diagrams
1
Connection of XPSCM module with 4 pairs of XU2S single-beam sensors
(Connection of 1 to 4 pairs of XU2S sensors to XPSCM, see page 3/147)
24 V
F1
OG
(1) Sensor 3
2
De-activation of time
intervals
BN
BU
VI
BN
BU
BK
A
ESC
K3
3 s de-activated
A
S1
Start
BN
BU
BK
K4
A1
4
U
U
T1
Z1
Z3
Y2
Y1
60 s de-activated
(1) Sensor 1
BN
BU
VI
3
H1
Muting
OG
STM
Y3 Y4 Y5
UV
H1
13
23
Y33
14
24
Y34
T
K1
Logic
K2
5
XPS CM
Z2 Z4
A
(1) Sensor 4
7
BN
BU
BK
BN
BU
BK
A
(2) Sensor B2
OG
(2) Sensor B1
OG
BN
BU
VI
A
BN
BU
BK
Y64
A
BN
BU
BK
BN
BU
BK
Muting faulty
A
Y54
OSSD activated
6
BN
BU
BK
Y44
(2) Sensor A2
OG
OG
BN
BU
VI
UV MA MB
(1) Sensor A1
(1) Sensor 2
Starting required
T2 T3
A1/A2 - Fuse
U
OG
U
OG
A2
A
K3
K4
N( )
Motor main control
object
8
XU2SVHQVRUVFDQEHSURJUDPPHGIRUOLJKWVZLWFKLQJRUGDUNVZLWFKLQJGDUNVZLWFKLQJZLWKVHQVRUVDQGDQGOLJKWVZLWFKLQJZLWKVHQVRUVDQGIRUH[DPSOH
(6&H[WHUQDOVWDUWFRQGLWLRQV
Y1-Y2: feedback loop.
STM: for stopping time measurement.
3URWHFWLRQ¿HOGVHQVRUV
(2) Muting sensors
9
10
Principle:
page 3/138
3/144
Characteristics:
page 3/139
References:
page 3/140
Dimensions:
page 3/143
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/143
:LULQJGLDJUDPV(continued)
Safety detection solutions
Preventa™ safety modules and single-beam
photo-electric sensors
With a test input associated with a built-in
“muting” function
Wiring Diagrams (continued)
Connection of XPSCM module with 1 pair of XU2S sensors
Connection of XPSCM module with 2 pairs of XU2S sensors
1
Sensor 1
Sensor 1
+
+
Test
A
–
–
BN
BU
BK
BN
BU
VI
A1 U+ U– T1
Z1
+
+
Test
A
–
–
BN
BU
BK
A1 U+ U– T1
Z3
XPS CM
2
Z1
Z3
Z2
Z4
XPS CM
Z2
A2 U+ U– T2 T3
Z4
Sensor 2
BN
BU
VI
Connection of XPSCM module with 3 pairs of XU2S sensors
Test
A
–
BN
BU
BK
4
Sensor 3
Test
A
–
BN
BU
BK
BN
BU
VI
+
+ BN
BU
Test
A
Sensor 1
+
+
Test
A
–
–
– BK
–
BN
BU
BK
A1 U+ U– T1
BN
BU
VI
Z1
Z3
XPS CM
6
OG
+
–
5
OG
OG
(2 for dark switching, 2 for light switching)
+
Sensor 1
BN
BU
VI
+
–
OG
BN
BU
VI
+
Connection of XPSCM module with 4 pairs of XU2S sensors
(2 for dark switching, 1 for light switching)
Sensor 3
+
+
Test
A
–
–
BN
BU
BK
A1 U+ U– T1
Z1
Z3
Z2
Z4
XPS CM
Sensor 2
+
–
BN
BU
BK
BN
BU
VI
A
Test
A2 U+ U– T2 T3
Sensor 2
+
–
Z4
OG
Z2
+
+
–
–
Test
A
Sensor 4
BN
BU
VI
OG
A2 U+ U– T2 T3
BN
BU
VI
3
OG
A2 U+ U– T2 T3
+
+
Test
A
–
7
8
BN
BU
BK
OG
BN
BU
VI
OG
(dark switching)
OG
(dark switching)
–
9
BN
BU
BK
10
Principle:
page 3/138
Characteristics:
page 3/139
References:
page 3/140
Dimensions:
page 3/143
Wiring Diagrams:
page 3/143
3/145